CM7&8_SONET_SDH_RevD

CM7/8

SONET/SDH

155-Mbps

Digital Microwave Radio

System User’s Manual

Site____________________Part Number 8831607-00Revision DIssued: 5/04

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 11/9/03 Page iii

CM7/8 SONET/SDH Manual – Revision History

Section Changed Pages Changed

Revision A -- Initial Release

Revision B – 8/6/03

Front Matter Cover, history, table of contents, index

Chapter 1, Introduction 1-2, 1-8 to 1-10

Chapter 2, Principles of Operation 2-20, 2-21, 2-22, 2-23, 2-27, 2-28

Chapter 3, Module Descriptions 3-1, 3-2

Section 3-1, Radio Cabinet all (10 pages)

Section 3-2, RF Distribution 3-2-6, 3-2-10

Section 3-11, SYNDES 3-11-1, 3-11-2, 3-11-5

Chapter 4, Installation 4-1, 4-2, 4-6, 4-11

Chapter 5, Alignment 5-10, 5-11

Chapter 6, Maintenance 6-4, 6-18, 6-29, 6-32

Appendix A, T/I Curves A-3, A-4

Appendix B, QuikLink Screens B-27, B-30

Appendix D, Alarm Codes D-4

Appendix E, Frequency Switch Settings E-1, E-5 to E-8

Appendix G, SNMP Option added all

Revision C 11/9/03

Front Matter cover, revision history, TOC, index

Chapter 3, Module Descriptions 3-7-5, 3-7-6, 3-12-4, 3-12-5

Appendix C, Configuration Tables C-1 to C-12

Revision D 5/12/05

Front Matter cover, revision history, TOC

Chapter 3, Module Descriptions 3-1, 3-2, 3-1-1 to 3-1-14 (all); 3-14-1 to 3-14-8 (all)

Chapter 4, Installation 4-6 to 4-12

Appendix C, Configuration Tables all

Index all

Page iv 11/9/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual

Commercial Warranty

Microwave Networks, Inc. (MNI) manufactured products are warranted to be free from defect in material and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from date of shipment. In the event of a defect during the warranty period, Buyer will return item to the MNI depot repair facility for repair or replacement. Repair at MNI's option may include the replacement of parts or equipment, and all replaced parts or equipment shall be the property of MNI. Parts or equipment replaced dur-ing the warranty period are warranted for the remainder of the original applicable warranty period or ninety (90) days, whichever is greater. This express warranty is extended by MNI to the origi-nal Buyer for commercial, industrial or governmental use. Such action on the part of MNI shall be the full extent of MNI's liability and Buyer's exclusive remedy.

This warranty extends only to products manufactured by MNI, and it is expressly conditioned upon the equipment having been installed in accordance with the installation practices accepted by the telecommunications industry, the standard installation and configuration practices recom-mended by MNI, and the equipment having been maintained in accordance with MNI recom-mended standard maintenance practices. Frequency sensitive components, towers, vidicon tubes, test equipment, batteries, and other manufacturers' products are excluded, but carry their own sep-arate limited warranties as authorized by the individual manufacturers.

This warranty shall automatically terminate if the product is used in other than its normal and cus-tomary manner, has been subject to misuse, accident, neglect or damage, has improper alterations or repairs made to it, or if nonconforming parts are used in the product, unless done by a service facility authorized by MNI to perform warranty service. An authorization to return products to MNI under this warranty must be obtained from the MNI Customer Care Center prior to making shipment to MNI's repair center. All returns shall be shipped freight prepaid and collect shipments will not be accepted. MNI will prepay return freight charges on repaired and replaced products found to be defective. There will be a minimum charge for each warranty module replacement requested as an emergency exchange.

Because each radio system is unique, MNI disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of a system as a whole under this warranty except by a separate written agreement signed by an officer of MNI. MNI's total liability is limited to the total price of the products sold. Buyer's sole remedy is to request MNI, at MNI's option, to either refund the purchase price, repair or replace product(s) that are not as warranted. No action shall be brought for any breach of this contract more than one (1) year after the accrual of such cause of action except for money due upon open account.

This MNI warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties, either expressed or implied, which are specifically excluded, including warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. In no event shall MNI be liable for any incidental or consequential damages arising from this war-ranty.

Where you can find us

Company Headquarters:

Microwave Networks4000 GreenbriarStafford, TX 77477USATel 281.263.6500Fax 281.263.6400Toll free in US 1.888.225.6429

Internet: www.microwavenetworks.com

24-Hour Customer Service Hotline

Tel 281.263.6501Toll free in US 1.888.225.4762

International

LondonTel 44.1628.788383Fax 44.1628.788424

http://www.microwavenetworks.com

CM7/8 SONET System User’s Manual Page vii

Using This Manual

1.0 IntroductionWelcome to the CM7/8 SONET System User’s Manual. This section is provided to help guide you through the manual.

2.0 Manual OrganizationThis manual is organized into the following sections.

Using This Manual provides a quick guide for locating information in this manual.

The Table of Contents lists all chapters, sections, headings, and subheadings in the manual, as well as where to find them.

Chapter 1 provides General Information on the radio, including an equipment description and system specifications.

Chapter 2 outlines Principles of Operation, including a description of signal flow through the radio, equipment descriptions and configurations, switching and loopback information, and detailed instructions on how to use the radio features.

Chapter 3 is divided into sections that give Module Descriptions, including module block dia-grams and other module-specific information, such as principles of operation, front panel descriptions, and jumper and DIP switch settings.

Chapter 4, Equipment Installation, gives step-by-step instructions on how to unpack, config-ure, and install the radio.

Chapter 5, Alignment, describes radio alignment and tests.

Chapter 6 discusses Maintenance procedures, and provides sections on troubleshooting and module replacement procedures.

Appendix A provides T/I Curves for the CM7/8 SONET radio.

Appendix B shows all Screens that appear on the remote VT-100 Display Terminal, accompa-nied by screen descriptions.

Appendix C contains all of the Configuration Tables necessary to prepare the radio for oper-ation.

Appendix D lists radio Alarm Codes.

Appendix E describes procedure to set LO oscillator frequency

Appendix F, Glossary describes common terms and acronyms used in this manual.

Appendix G, SNMP Option, describes the equipment, installation, and operation of the SNMP radio management system.

The Index is designed to aid in rapid location of information in the manual.

Page viii CM7/8 SONET System User’s Manual

Using This Manual

3.0 CM7/8 SONET Radio Quick ReferenceThe following quick reference table identifies sections in the manual which will help you to per-form specific tasks on the radio.

Quick Reference Table

Description Chapter

How to install the radio 4

How to turn up the radio 5

How to maintain the radio 6

How to troubleshoot the radio 6

How to repair the radio 6

How to spare the radio TXU/RXU 6

How to switch TX 2

How to switch RX 2

How to initiate loopbacks 2

How to enable or disable APC 2

How to check or change frequency 2

How to change protection configuration 2

How to add service channel 2

How to add orderwire 2

How to add ATDE or WTU 2

How to check for alarms 2

How to check the alarm log 2

How to check performance values 2

How to establish RF loopback 6

How to check receive threshold 5

How to check Tx fade margin 5

How to add NMU 2

How to install the SNMP option App. G

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page ix

Chapter 1–General Information1.0. Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 1-12.0. CM7/8 Protection Features................................................................................................................. 1-2

2.1. Protection..................................................................................................................................... 1-23.0. SONET Optical Data Conversion ...................................................................................................... 1-44.0. Channel Capacity ............................................................................................................................... 1-45.0. FCC Compliance ................................................................................................................................ 1-46.0. Equipment Description....................................................................................................................... 1-57.0. Transmission Engineering.................................................................................................................. 1-7

7.1. RF Channel Separation................................................................................................................ 1-77.2. Radio System Gain ...................................................................................................................... 1-77.3. Interference Considerations......................................................................................................... 1-7

8.0. Specifications ..................................................................................................................................... 1-78.1. Transmitter Power ....................................................................................................................... 1-78.2. Receiver Sensitivity..................................................................................................................... 1-7

Chapter 2–Principles of Operation1.0. Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 2-1

1.1. Transmitting ................................................................................................................................ 2-11.2. Receiving..................................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.0. RF Modules ........................................................................................................................................ 2-32.1. Branching Waveguide ................................................................................................................. 2-32.2. Transmitter Unit (TXU) .............................................................................................................. 2-42.3. RF Power Supply Unit (RF PSU)................................................................................................ 2-4

3.0. Signal Processing ............................................................................................................................... 2-53.1. Access Panel................................................................................................................................ 2-53.2. Signal Processing Modules.......................................................................................................... 2-53.3. ATDE and Dispersive Fade Margin ............................................................................................ 2-6

4.0. Equipment Configurations ................................................................................................................. 2-74.1. Protection..................................................................................................................................... 2-74.2. Repeater Arrangements ............................................................................................................. 2-10

5.0. Protection Switching ........................................................................................................................ 2-115.1. Monitored Hot Standby Tx/Rx Switching (HH) ....................................................................... 2-115.2. Automatic Switching vs. Manual Switching ............................................................................. 2-12

5.2.1. What Happens During an A SYNDES Module Failure .................................................. 2-125.3. Monitored Hot-Standby Transmit Switching ............................................................................ 2-13

5.3.1. Transmitter Switch Levels............................................................................................... 2-135.4. Transmitter SYNDES-MUX Switch ......................................................................................... 2-145.5. Transmitter TXU-MOD Switch ................................................................................................ 2-145.6. Transmitter SCU Switch .......................................................................................................... 2-145.7. Transmit WTU Switch ............................................................................................................. 2-145.8. Performing Manual Switchovers.............................................................................................. 2-14

5.8.1. Performing a Manual SYNDES-MUX Switchover........................................................ 2-155.8.2. Performing a Manual TXU-MOD Switchover ............................................................... 2-155.8.3. Performing a Manual RXU-DEMOD Switchover ......................................................... 2-15

Table of Contents

Microwave Networks

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page x

5.8.4. Performing a Manual SCU Switchover .......................................................................... 2-165.8.5. Performing the WTU Switch Manually.......................................................................... 2-16

5.9. Hot-Standby Protected Receive Switching Levels ................................................................... 2-175.9.1. Receiver RXU-DEMOD Switch..................................................................................... 2-175.9.2. Receiver SYNDES-MUX Switch Level......................................................................... 2-185.9.3. Receiver SCU Switch ..................................................................................................... 2-185.9.4. Receive WTU Switch ...................................................................................................... 2-18

5.10. Monitored Hot-Standby Transmitter, Space Diversity Receiver Switching (HS).................. 2-186.0. Loopbacks......................................................................................................................................... 2-19

6.1. Traffic Requirements ................................................................................................................. 2-206.2. How to Perform a Loopback ..................................................................................................... 2-206.3. RF Local Loopback ................................................................................................................... 2-20

6.3.1. Initiating the RF Local Loopback.................................................................................... 2-216.4. IF Local Loopback..................................................................................................................... 2-226.5. MUX Local Loopback............................................................................................................... 2-246.6. SYNDES Loopback................................................................................................................... 2-24

6.6.1. Local Loopback ............................................................................................................... 2-246.7. Remote Loopback...................................................................................................................... 2-246.8. Service Channel Unit Loopback................................................................................................ 2-25

6.8.1. Local Loopback ............................................................................................................... 2-256.8.2. Remote Loopback ............................................................................................................ 2-25

6.9. WTU Loopback ......................................................................................................................... 2-256.9.1. Local Loopback ............................................................................................................... 2-256.9.2. Remote Loopback ............................................................................................................ 2-26

7.0. Automatic Power Control................................................................................................................. 2-277.1. Manually Activating the Automatic Power Control for Loopback .......................................... 2-27

Chapter 3–Module Descriptions1.0. Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 3-1

Section 3-1–Radio Cabinet

1.0. Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 3-1-12.0. Access Panel .................................................................................................................................... 3-1-1

2.1. Principles of Operation ............................................................................................................. 3-1-42.2. Access Panel Features .............................................................................................................. 3-1-5

3.0. SP Shelf Backplane ....................................................................................................................... 3-1-103.1. Jumpers ................................................................................................................................... 3-1-10

4.0. RF Shelf Backplane....................................................................................................................... 3-1-115.0. Equipment Rack ............................................................................................................................ 3-1-12

5.1. Installing Auxiliary Equipment in the Rack ........................................................................... 3-1-126.0. Installation Kits ............................................................................................................................. 3-1-12

Section 3-2–RF Distribution

1.0. General Information ........................................................................................................................ 3-2-12.0. Description of Function ................................................................................................................... 3-2-2

2.1. Transmit Section....................................................................................................................... 3-2-52.2. Receive Section ........................................................................................................................ 3-2-5

3.0. User Operation................................................................................................................................. 3-2-63.1. Front Panel Functions (HH) ..................................................................................................... 3-2-6

Microwave Networks

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xi

3.2. Front Panel Functions (HS) ...................................................................................................... 3-2-73.3. Front Panel Functions (NS) ...................................................................................................... 3-2-83.4. Front Panel Functions (FF)....................................................................................................... 3-2-93.5. Front Panel Functions (NN) ................................................................................................... 3-2-10

Section 3-3–Transmitter Unit (TXU)

1.0. Physical Description........................................................................................................................ 3-3-12.0. Functional Description .................................................................................................................... 3-3-23.0. Front Panel Functions...................................................................................................................... 3-3-24.0. Setting TXU Boards ........................................................................................................................ 3-3-4

4.1. TXU Alarm/Control Board MLN8146 and MLN8147 ............................................................ 3-3-44.2. TX IF BPF/LO Board Jumpers................................................................................................. 3-3-5

Section 3-4–Receiver Unit (RXU)

1.0. General Information ........................................................................................................................ 3-4-12.0. Description of Function ................................................................................................................... 3-4-23.0. Front Panel Functions...................................................................................................................... 3-4-2

3.1. RXU Control Board MLN7905A Jumpers............................................................................... 3-4-4

Section 3-5–RF Power Supply Unit (RF PSU)

1.0. General Information ........................................................................................................................ 3-5-12.0. Functional Description .................................................................................................................... 3-5-23.0. RF PSU Board Features................................................................................................................... 3-5-3

Section 3-6–SP Power Supply Unit (SP PSU)

1.0. General Information ........................................................................................................................ 3-6-12.0. Functional Description .................................................................................................................... 3-6-23.0. Front Panel Functions...................................................................................................................... 3-6-3

Section 3-7–Alarm and Control Unit

1.0. Physical Description........................................................................................................................ 3-7-12.0. Functional Description .................................................................................................................... 3-7-23.0. Front Panel Functions...................................................................................................................... 3-7-4

3.1. Jumpers and Switches............................................................................................................... 3-7-4

Section 3-8–Modulator (MOD)

1.0. General Information ........................................................................................................................ 3-8-12.0. Description ...................................................................................................................................... 3-8-1

2.1. Physical..................................................................................................................................... 3-8-12.2. Functional ................................................................................................................................. 3-8-2

3.0. Front Access Functions ................................................................................................................... 3-8-34.0. 8000514 MOD Jumpers (SONET/SDH)......................................................................................... 3-8-4

Section 3-9–Demodulator (DEMOD)

1.0. General Information ........................................................................................................................ 3-9-12.0. Functional Description .................................................................................................................... 3-9-23.0. Front Panel Functions...................................................................................................................... 3-9-4

3.1. 8000515 DEMOD Jumper (SONET/SDH) .............................................................................. 3-9-5

Microwave Networks

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xii

Section 3-10–Multiplexer (MUX)

1.0. General Information ...................................................................................................................... 3-10-12.0. Functional Description .................................................................................................................. 3-10-23.0. Front Panel Functions......................................................................................................................3-10-34.0. 8000513 MUX Jumpers (SONET/SDH)....................................................................................... 3-10-4

Section 3-11–Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES)

1.0. General Information ...................................................................................................................... 3-11-12.0. Functional Description .................................................................................................................. 3-11-2

2.1. Transmit.................................................................................................................................. 3-11-22.2. Receive ................................................................................................................................... 3-11-2

3.0. SYNDES Front Access.................................................................................................................. 3-11-44.0. SYNDES Jumpers ......................................................................................................................... 3-11-5

Section 3-12–Service Channel Unit (SCU)

1.0. General Information ...................................................................................................................... 3-12-12.0. Functional Description .................................................................................................................. 3-12-23.0. Front Panel Functions.................................................................................................................... 3-12-34.0. Configuring the SCU..................................................................................................................... 3-12-4

Section 3-13–Orderwire Unit (OWU)

1.0. General Information ...................................................................................................................... 3-13-12.0. Description of Function ................................................................................................................. 3-13-23.0. Front Panel Functions.................................................................................................................... 3-13-44.0. Handset Functions ......................................................................................................................... 3-13-4

4.1. Handset Functions .................................................................................................................. 3-13-44.2. Jumpers and Switches............................................................................................................. 3-13-5

5.0. Orderwire, Service Channel, and Bridge Configuration .................................................................3-13-7

Section 3-14–Wayside Traffic Unit (WTU)

1.0. General Information ...................................................................................................................... 3-14-12.0. Description of Function ................................................................................................................. 3-14-23.0. Front Panel Features ...................................................................................................................... 3-14-44.0. MLN7330 Jumpers and Configuration Switch.............................................................................. 3-14-45.0. 8000608-00 Configuration Switch ................................................................................................ 3-14-6

Section 3-15–Network Management Unit (NMU)

1.0. General Information ...................................................................................................................... 3-15-12.0. Description of Function ................................................................................................................. 3-15-1

2.1. Jumpers ................................................................................................................................... 3-15-32.2. DIP Switches .......................................................................................................................... 3-15-4

Chapter 4–Equipment Installation1.0. Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 4-12.0. Preparing for Installation.................................................................................................................... 4-1

2.1. Location Considerations .............................................................................................................. 4-12.2. Unpacking the Equipment ........................................................................................................... 4-2

Microwave Networks

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xiii

3.0. Rack Installation................................................................................................................................. 4-23.1. Rack Ground Bar ......................................................................................................................... 4-53.2. Power Cable Considerations........................................................................................................ 4-5

4.0. Access Panels .................................................................................................................................... 4-64.1. General Description ..................................................................................................................... 4-64.2. Access Panel Connections ........................................................................................................... 4-74.3. Network Management Port Connections................................................................................... 4-11

5.0. Connecting Performance Monitoring Devices ................................................................................. 4-135.1. Connecting the MLN8003 Local Maintenance Terminal.......................................................... 4-135.2. Configuring the LMT for VT-100 Operation ............................................................................ 4-13

5.2.1. Before Beginning............................................................................................................. 4-135.2.2. Configuring the LMT ...................................................................................................... 4-13

5.3. Connecting a Computer or Terminal ......................................................................................... 4-145.3.1. Verifying Operation......................................................................................................... 4-18

5.4. Connecting a Modem................................................................................................................. 4-195.5. Connection Diagrams ................................................................................................................ 4-21

6.0. Antenna Connections....................................................................................................................... 4-216.1. Installing the Waveguide ........................................................................................................... 4-22

Chapter 5–Alignment1.0. Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 5-12.0. Inspection ........................................................................................................................................... 5-1

2.1. Visual Inspection ......................................................................................................................... 5-12.2. IF Cabling .................................................................................................................................... 5-82.3. RF Cables .................................................................................................................................... 5-8

3.0. Verification......................................................................................................................................... 5-83.1. Preliminary Checks...................................................................................................................... 5-93.2. Jumper and DIP Switch Settings ................................................................................................. 5-93.3. DC Voltages ................................................................................................................................ 5-93.4. System Configuration .................................................................................................................. 5-93.5. SP Verification .......................................................................................................................... 5-10

4.0. Alignment ......................................................................................................................................... 5-104.1. Modulator Frequency (IF) ......................................................................................................... 5-104.2. Local Oscillator Frequency ....................................................................................................... 5-104.3. Transmitter Carrier Frequency/Receiver LO Frequency........................................................... 5-104.4. Transmitter Output Power ......................................................................................................... 5-114.5. Access Panel and Module Fail LEDs ........................................................................................ 5-114.6. End-to-End 155-Mbit/s Data Check .......................................................................................... 5-114.7. End-to-End Service Channel Check .......................................................................................... 5-134.8. Receive Threshold Check.......................................................................................................... 5-15

4.8.1. Remote Terminal Setup ................................................................................................... 5-154.8.2. Local Terminal Setup ...................................................................................................... 5-15

4.9. RF Tx Fade Margin Check ........................................................................................................ 5-174.9.1. Remote Terminal Setup ................................................................................................... 5-174.9.2. Local Terminal Setup ...................................................................................................... 5-17

4.10. Receive Signal Level/AGC Recording.................................................................................... 5-194.11. Commissioning Radio Link..................................................................................................... 5-19

5.0. Recommended Test Equipment........................................................................................................ 5-206.0. Test Tables........................................................................................................................................ 5-22

Microwave Networks

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xiv

Chapter 6–Maintenance1.0. Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 6-1

1.1. Customer Service......................................................................................................................... 6-11.1.1. Repair and Exchange Services........................................................................................... 6-11.1.2. Technical Support Services ............................................................................................... 6-2

1.2. Recommended Test Equipment................................................................................................... 6-21.3. Description of the Local Maintenance Terminal ......................................................................... 6-3

2.0. Maintenance ....................................................................................................................................... 6-42.1. Annual Transmitter Checks ......................................................................................................... 6-42.2. DC Voltages ................................................................................................................................ 6-4

3.0. Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................. 6-53.1. Check Alarms Using Alarm LEDs .............................................................................................. 6-5

3.1.1. Check the ACU.................................................................................................................. 6-63.2. Check Alarms Using the Local Maintenance Terminal .............................................................. 6-6

3.2.1. Checking the Alarm Log ................................................................................................... 6-73.2.2. Checking Performance Values........................................................................................... 6-7

3.3. Check LBO and DS1 Line Coding .............................................................................................. 6-84.0. Upgrades and Changes ....................................................................................................................... 6-8

4.1. Changing Local Oscillator Frequency......................................................................................... 6-84.1.1. Checking LO Frequency.................................................................................................... 6-94.1.2. Changing LO Frequency.................................................................................................... 6-9

4.2. Changing Protection Configuration............................................................................................. 6-94.3. Adding Service Channel, Orderwire, or WTU .......................................................................... 6-104.4. Adding the Optional Network Management Unit ..................................................................... 6-10

5.0. Replacing Modules ........................................................................................................................... 6-115.1. Replacing TXU and RXU.......................................................................................................... 6-11

5.1.1. TXU ................................................................................................................................. 6-115.1.2. RXU................................................................................................................................. 6-12

5.2. Replacing All Other Modules.................................................................................................... 6-136.0. Troubleshooting Charts .................................................................................................................... 6-14

Site Engineering–

Appendix A–T/I Curves1.0. Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... A-12.0. T/I Ratio............................................................................................................................................. A-1

Appendix B–QuikLink ScreensIntroduction .............................................................................................................................................. B-1Verifying the ACU Software Version ...................................................................................................... B-1

Software Revision.............................................................................................................................. B-1Screen Layout........................................................................................................................................... B-2

Selecting Screens ............................................................................................................................... B-2Aborting Changes .............................................................................................................................. B-2Navigating Screens ............................................................................................................................ B-2

Monitoring Radio Functions..................................................................................................................... B-4Index of Screens ....................................................................................................................................... B-4Screen Menu Flowcharts .......................................................................................................................... B-7Local Maintenance Screens ...................................................................................................................... B-9

Microwave Networks

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xv

Appendix C–Configuration Tables1.0. Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... C-1

Appendix D–Alarm Codes1.0. Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... D-1

Appendix E–Setting Frequency SwitchesIntroduction ............................................................................................................................................... E-1CM7 Setting Switches ............................................................................................................................... E-1CM8 Switch Settings................................................................................................................................. E-5

Appendix F–Glossary

Appendix G–CM SNMPIntroduction .............................................................................................................................................. G-1What is CM SNMP?................................................................................................................................. G-1SNMP Option Components ...................................................................................................................... G-2

The SNMP Front Panel...................................................................................................................... G-2The SNMP NMU (Network Management Unit) ............................................................................... G-3

Layout of a CM SNMP Network.............................................................................................................. G-4Installing Hardware .................................................................................................................................. G-5

Connecting Cables ............................................................................................................................. G-6Ethernet (10BaseT) Port ............................................................................................................. G-6SCE Port ..................................................................................................................................... G-6 Local Access Port ...................................................................................................................... G-7

Installing Software.................................................................................................................................... G-8Install ................................................................................................................................................. G-8Configure ........................................................................................................................................... G-8

System Operation ................................................................................................................................... G-10SNMP Network Manager ................................................................................................................ G-10

Microwave Networks MIB ....................................................................................................... G-10MIB Tables ............................................................................................................................... G-10Performance Table.................................................................................................................... G-11Configuration Table.................................................................................................................. G-12Fault Manager Table................................................................................................................. G-12CM SNMP Traps ...................................................................................................................... G-13Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................... G-13

Telnet ............................................................................................................................................... G-14Telnet Commands ..................................................................................................................... G-15Telnet Command Usage ........................................................................................................... G-16

Microwave Networks

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xvi

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xvii

Chapter 1–General InformationFigure 1-1. CM7/8 SONET SDH Digital Microwave Radio .................................................................. 1-1Figure 1-2. CM7/8 155-Mbps Hot Standby System Block Diagram ...................................................... 1-3Figure 1-3. CM7/8 Digital Microwave Radio in Hot-Standby Configuration ........................................ 1-5

Chapter 2–Principles of OperationFigure 2-1. RF Shelf; Hot-Standby Tx/Rx and Hot-Standby Tx/Space Diversity Rx............................. 2-3Figure 2-2. Signal Processing Shelf in Protected Configuration ............................................................. 2-6Figure 2-3. Hot Standby Tx/Rx (HH) Signal Flow.................................................................................. 2-7Figure 2-4. Hot-Standby Tx, Space Diversity Rx (HS) Signal Flow....................................................... 2-8Figure 2-5. Non-Protected Tx, Space Diversity Rx (NS) Signal Flow.................................................... 2-9Figure 2-6. Frequency Diversity Tx/Rx (FF) Signal Flow ...................................................................... 2-9Figure 2-7. Non-protected Tx/Rx (NN) Signal Flow............................................................................. 2-10Figure 2-8. Back-to-Back Terminal Configuration................................................................................ 2-10Figure 2-9. Monitored Hot Standby Switching Diagram....................................................................... 2-11Figure 2-10. Monitored Hot Standby Switching...................................................................................... 2-13Figure 2-11. Monitored Hot Standby Switching (Repeated)................................................................ 2-17

Figure 2-12. Hot Standby Tx, Space Diversity Rx (HS) Switching ........................................................ 2-19Figure 2-13. RF Loopback Circuit Setup................................................................................................ 2-21Figure 2-14. RF Loopback Circuit Setup................................................................................................. 2-23

Chapter 3–Module Descriptions


Figure 3-1-1 8209309-00 – Universal Access Panel for 28DS1, 3DS3, 100BaseT and SONET\SDH. 3-1-2Figure 3-1-2 MGN8112 Early-Model Access Panel for 28xDS1, 3xDS3 and SONET/SDH ............... 3-1-3Figure 3-1-3 8209120-00 – Access Panel for SONET/SDH Optical & Electrical ................................ 3-1-3Figure 3-1-4 8209296-00 – Access Panel for SONET/SDH Optical & Electrical and SNMP NMS .... 3-1-4Figure 3-1-5 Power Distribution Diagram ............................................................................................. 3-1-4Figure 3-1-6 Access Panel Features ....................................................................................................... 3-1-5Figure 3-1-7. SP Backplane Jumper Locations (as viewed through the chassis).................................. 3-1-10Figure 3-1-8 RF Shelf Backplane (viewed through chassis from front of the cabinet) ....................... 3-1-11


Figure 3-2-1. RF Distribution Block; TX/RX Hot Standby (HH) .......................................................... 3-2-2Figure 3-2-2. RF Distribution Block; TX Hot Standby, RX Space Diversity (HS)................................ 3-2-3Figure 3-2-3. RF Distribution Block; TX Non-Protected, RX Space Diversity (NS)............................. 3-2-3Figure 3-2-4. RF Distribution Block; TX/RX Frequency Diversity (FF) ............................................... 3-2-4

List of Figures

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xviii

Microwave Networks

Figure 3-2-5. RF Distribution Block; TX/RX Non-protected (NN) ....................................................... 3-2-4Figure 3-2-6. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (HH) ................. 3-2-6Figure 3-2-7. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (HS) .................. 3-2-7Figure 3-2-8. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (NS) .................. 3-2-8Figure 3-2-9. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (FF)................... 3-2-9Figure 3-2-10. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (NN) ............... 3-2-10


Figure 3-3-1. Transmitter Unit ................................................................................................................ 3-3-1Figure 3-3-2. TXU Block Diagram ......................................................................................................... 3-3-2Figure 3-3-3. Transmitter Unit Front Panel............................................................................................. 3-3-3Figure 3-3-4. TXU Alarm/Control Board ............................................................................................... 3-3-4Figure 3-3-5. TX IF BPF/LO Board Jumper Locations .......................................................................... 3-3-5


Figure 3-4-1. Receiver Unit (RXU) ........................................................................................................ 3-4-1Figure 3-4-2. Receiver Functional Block ................................................................................................ 3-4-2Figure 3-4-3. Front Panel Functions of the RXU.................................................................................... 3-4-3Figure 3-4-4. Jumper Locations for MLN7905....................................................................................... 3-4-4


Figure 3-5-1. RF Power Supply Unit ...................................................................................................... 3-5-1Figure 3-5-2. RF PSU Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-5-2Figure 3-5-3. RF Power Supply Board.................................................................................................... 3-5-3


Figure 3-6-1. SP Power Supply Unit....................................................................................................... 3-6-1Figure 3-6-2. SP PSU Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 3-6-2Figure 3-6-3. Front Panel Functions of the SP PSU................................................................................ 3-6-3


Figure 3-7-1. Alarm and Control Unit..................................................................................................... 3-7-1Figure 3-7-2. ACU Block Diagram......................................................................................................... 3-7-3Figure 3-7-3. Front Panel Functions of the ACU.................................................................................... 3-7-4


Figure 3-8-1. Modulator .......................................................................................................................... 3-8-1Figure 3-8-2. MOD Block Diagram........................................................................................................ 3-8-2Figure 3-8-3. Front Panel Functions of the MOD ................................................................................... 3-8-3Figure 3-8-4. MOD 8000514 Jumper Locations (SONET/SDH) ........................................................... 3-8-4


Figure 3-9-1. Typical Demodulator......................................................................................................... 3-9-1

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xix

Microwave Networks

Figure 3-9-2. DEMOD Block Diagram (SONET/SDH) ......................................................................... 3-9-3Figure 3-9-3. Front Panel Functions of the DEMOD.............................................................................. 3-9-4Figure 3-9-4. DEMOD 8000515 Jumper Locations (SONET/SDH) ...................................................... 3-9-5


Figure 3-10-1 Typical Multiplexer......................................................................................................... 3-10-1Figure 3-10-2 MUX Operations Block Diagram ................................................................................... 3-10-2Figure 3-10-3 ALM LED on the Front Panel......................................................................................... 3-10-3Figure 3-10-4 MUX 8000513 Jumper Locations (SONET/SDH) ......................................................... 3-10-4


Figure 3-11-1. Typical SYNDES Module............................................................................................... 3-11-1Figure 3-11-2. SYNDES Block Diagram................................................................................................ 3-11-3Figure 3-11-3. SYNDES Front Panel LED Alarm Function................................................................... 3-11-4Figure 3-11-4. Jumper Locations for SYNDES Module......................................................................... 3-11-5


Figure 3-12-1. Service Channel Unit ...................................................................................................... 3-12-1Figure 3-12-2. SCU Block Diagram........................................................................................................ 3-12-2Figure 3-12-3. Front Panel Functions of the SCU................................................................................... 3-12-3Figure 3-12-4. SCU Jumper Locations and Dip Switch Settings............................................................ 3-12-4


Figure 3-13-1. Orderwire Unit ................................................................................................................ 3-13-1Figure 3-13-2. Order Wire Unit Operations ............................................................................................ 3-13-3Figure 3-13-3. Front Panel Functions of the OWU................................................................................. 3-13-4Figure 3-13-4. Functions of the Orderwire Handset (MLN7324A)........................................................ 3-13-5Figure 3-13-5. OWU Jumper and Switch Locations ............................................................................... 3-13-5Figure 3-13-6. Orderwire When Used with SCU Set Up for Dual Narrow Band VF............................. 3-13-7Figure 3-13-7. Orderwire When Used with SCU Set Up for Single Wide Band VF.............................. 3-13-8


Figure 3-14-1. Wayside Traffic Unit....................................................................................................... 3-14-1Figure 3-14-2. Functional Blocks of the Wayside Traffic Unit .............................................................. 3-14-3Figure 3-14-3. WTU Alarm LED Location............................................................................................. 3-14-4Figure 3-14-4. MLN7330 WTU Jumper and Switch Locations ............................................................. 3-14-4Figure 3-14-5. 8000608-00 WTU Configuration Switch Location......................................................... 3-14-6


Figure 3-15-1. Network Management Unit Block Diagram ................................................................... 3-15-2Figure 3-15-2. Jumpers on the Network Management Unit (NMU)....................................................... 3-15-3Figure 3-15-3. DIP Switch S1 Values ..................................................................................................... 3-15-4

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xx

Microwave Networks

Chapter 4–Equipment InstallationFigure 4-1 Customer DC Power Connections......................................................................................... 4-3Figure 4-2 Recommended DC Power Connection for Dual Battery Source ......................................... 4-3Figure 4-3 DC Power Connection for a Single Battery Source .............................................................. 4-4Figure 4-4 NOT RECOMMENDED DC Power Connection for Battery Source(s) .............................. 4-4Figure 4-5 Rack Ground Wiring ............................................................................................................. 4-5Figure 4-6 155-Mbit/s Access Panels ..................................................................................................... 4-6Figure 4-7 Network Connections Between Radios and the Telescan NMS ......................................... 4-12Figure 4-8 Terminal to Radio Connection; DTE-to-DTE..................................................................... 4-16Figure 4-9 Terminal to Radio Connection; DTE-to-DCE and Null-Modem........................................ 4-17Figure 4-10 Modem Connection to Radio Access Panel, Local Access Port ......................................... 4-19Figure 4-11 Various DTE-to-DTE and DTE-to-DCE Wiring Configurations ....................................... 4-21Figure 4-12 Antenna Port Connections for NN or HH Radios ............................................................... 4-22Figure 4-13 Antenna Port Connections for Space Diversity Radio ........................................................ 4-23

Chapter 5–AlignmentFigure 5-1. RF Section and RF Distribution in HH Configuration.......................................................... 5-3Figure 5-2. SP Section in HH Configuration ........................................................................................... 5-3Figure 5-3. RF Section and RF Distribution in HS Configuration .......................................................... 5-4Figure 5-4. SP Section in HS Configuration............................................................................................ 5-4Figure 5-5. RF Section and RF Distribution in NS Configuration .......................................................... 5-5Figure 5-6. SP Section in NS Configuration............................................................................................ 5-5Figure 5-7. RF Section and RF Distribution in FF Configuration ........................................................... 5-6Figure 5-8. SP Section in FF Configuration ............................................................................................ 5-6Figure 5-9. RF Distribution and RF Section in Non-protected/Non-protected Configuration ................ 5-7Figure 5-10. SP Section in NN Configuration ........................................................................................... 5-7Figure 5-11. IF Cabling.............................................................................................................................. 5-8Figure 5-12. BER Test Set Connections to the Radio.............................................................................. 5-12Figure 5-13. Service Channel BER Test Set Connections to the Radio .................................................. 5-14Figure 5-14. TX and RX Signal Attenuator Connection to the Radio..................................................... 5-16Figure 5-15. Signal Attenuator Connection to the Radio......................................................................... 5-18

Chapter 6–MaintenanceFigure 6-1. TXU Bandpass Filter Location ........................................................................................... 6-12Figure 6-2. Synthesizer Switch Location............................................................................................... 6-13

Site Engineering–

Appendix A–T/I CurvesFigure A-1. CM7 SONET Electrical, T/I Curve, APC On, SP TXUs..................................................... A-2Figure A-2. CM7 SONET Electrical, T/I Curve, APC Off, SP TXU...................................................... A-3Figure A-3. CM8 SONET Electrical, CW Interference, APC Off, DHP Tx........................................... A-4

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xxi

Microwave Networks

Figure A-4. CM8 SONET Electrical, CW Interference, APC On, DHP Tx............................................ A-4

Appendix B–QuikLink ScreensFigure B-1. Screen 002 – Main Menu ..................................................................................................... B-2Figure B-2. Flowchart - Main Menus ...................................................................................................... B-7Figure B-3. Flowchart - Performance Monitoring Screens ..................................................................... B-7Figure B-4. Flowchart -Alarm and Status Screens .................................................................................. B-8Figure B-5. Flowchart - Configuration Screens ...................................................................................... B-8Figure B-6. Flowchart - Control and Maintenance Screens .................................................................... B-9

001 - Product Label Screen B-10002 - Main Menu B-10003 - Performance Monitoring Menu B-11004 - View Link B-11005 - View Measurements Screen B-12006 - Reset Statistics Menu B-13007 - View Comm Ports Screen B-13020 - Alarm and Status Menu B-14021 - System Alarm Menu B-14022 - SYNDES Alarm Screen B-15023 - MUX Alarm Screen B-16024 - DEMOD Alarm Screen B-17025 - MOD Alarm Screen B-17026 - SCU Alarm Screen B-18027 - ATDE Alarm Screen B-18028 - TXU Alarm Screen B-19029 - RXU Alarm Screen B-20030 - OWU Alarm Screen B-21031 - SP PSU Alarm Screen B-21032 - RF PSU Alarm Screen B-22033 - WTU Alarm Screen B-22034 - SCE Alarm Screen B-23035 - Alarm Summary Screen B-23036 - System Alarms Screen B-24037 - System LED Status Screen B-24038 - Alarm Log Menu B-25039 - Alarm Log Screen B-25040 - TX and RX Path Status B-26050 - System Configuration Menu B-26051 - System/Module Parameters Screen B-27052 - AIS Options Screen B-28053 -Tx Output Power Calibration Screen B-28054 - Date and Time Menu B-29057 - 28DS1 SYNDES Configuration Screen B-30070 - Control and Maintenance Menu B-31071 - Path Switching Screen B-31073 - TTL and Relay I/O Status Screens B-32081 - Loopback Monitoring Screen B-33

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xxii

Microwave Networks

082 - IF/Baseband Loopback Screen B-33083 - MUX Loopback Screen B-34084 - SYNDES Loopback Screen B-34084 - 3DS3-100BaseT SYNDES Loopback Screen B-35085 - SCU Loopback Screen B-35086 - WTU Loopback Screen B-35087 - APC Option Menu B-36088 - Power Amplifier Control Screen B-36

Appendix C–Configuration Tables

Appendix D–Alarm Codes

Appendix E–Setting Frequency SwitchesFigure E-1. Frequency Switch Arrangement........................................................................................... E-2Figure E-2. CM8 Synthesizer Switch Arrangement................................................................................ E-6


Appendix G–CM SNMPFigure G-1. SNMP NMU Front Panel ..................................................................................................... G-2Figure G-2. SNMP NMU Card................................................................................................................ G-3Figure G-3. Typical CM SNMP Network................................................................................................ G-5Figure G-4. Network Interface Ports ....................................................................................................... G-6Figure G-5. Example of setup-ppp Entries .............................................................................................. G-9Figure G-6. Example of Radio Network Connections............................................................................. G-9Figure G-7. CM SNMP MIB Tables...................................................................................................... G-11Figure G-8. CM SNMP Telnet Shell ..................................................................................................... G-14Figure G-9. Main Telnet Display........................................................................................................... G-15

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xxiii

Chapter 1–General InformationTable 1-A. CM7/8 SONET FCC Specifications ....................................................................... 1-4Table 1-B. CM7/8 SONET Sections and Modules ................................................................... 1-6Table 1-C. CM7/8 SONET/SDH Radio Specifications ............................................................ 1-8Table 1-D. General Specifications ............................................................................................ 1-9

Chapter 2–Principles of OperationTable 2-A. RF Shelf Module Requirements.............................................................................. 2-4Table 2-B SP Shelf Module Requirements .............................................................................. 2-6

Chapter 3–Module DescriptionsTable 3-A. CM7/8 SONET/SDH Modules ............................................................................... 3-1


Table 3-1-A. CM SONET\SDH Access Panels......................................................................... 3-1-1Table 3-1-B. 8209302-00 Configuration Switch Settings......................................................... 3-1-8Table 3-1-C. MGN8112 Access Panel Switch Settings ............................................................ 3-1-9Table 3-1-D. SP Backplane Jumper Settings........................................................................... 3-1-10Table 3-1-E. MLN7730 Accessory Kit ................................................................................... 3-1-12


Table 3-2-A. Transmit and Receive Bandpass Filter Options................................................... 3-2-1Table 3-2-B. Waveguide Branching Network Options ............................................................. 3-2-1


Table 3-3-A. TXU Part Numbers .............................................................................................. 3-3-1Table 3-3-B. Tx/Rx Spacing Options........................................................................................ 3-3-1Table 3-3-C. TXU IF BPF/LO Board Jumper Settings............................................................. 3-3-5


Table 3-4-A. RXU Part Numbers .............................................................................................. 3-4-1Table 3-4-B. RXU Control Board MLN7905A Jumper Settings.............................................. 3-4-4




Table 3-7-A. ACU Jumper Settings........................................................................................... 3-7-5

List of Tables

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xxiv

Microwave Networks

Table 3-7-B. ACU DIP Switch Settings.................................................................................... 3-7-6


Table 3-8-A. MOD Part Numbers ............................................................................................. 3-8-1Table 3-8-B. MOD 8000514 Jumper Settings (SONET/SDH) ................................................. 3-8-4


Table 3-9-A. DEMOD Part Numbers........................................................................................ 3-9-1


Table 3-10-A. MUX Part Numbers ........................................................................................... 3-10-1Table 3-10-B. MUX 8000513 Jumper Settings (SONET/SDH) ............................................... 3-10-4


Table 3-11-A. SYNDES Part Numbers ..................................................................................... 3-11-1Table 3-11-B. SYNDES Cabling Operational Parameters........................................................ 3-11-2Table 3-11-C. SYNDES Jumper Settings ................................................................................. 3-11-5


Table 3-12-A. SCU Jumper Settings ......................................................................................... 3-12-4Table 3-12-B. SCU Switch S1 (CH1) and S2 (CH2) Settings For Digital Channels................ 3-12-5


Table 3-13-A. OWU Jumper Settings ....................................................................................... 3-13-6Table 3-13-B. OWU Switch Settings ........................................................................................ 3-13-6


Table 3-14-A MLN7330 WTU Line Coding Jumper Settings................................................. 3-14-5Table 3-14-B MLN7330 WTU Line Buildout Switch Settings ............................................... 3-14-5Table 3-14-C 8000608-00 WTU Equalizer Control / Line Length Select Settings ................. 3-14-6Table 3-14-D 8000608-00 Line Code Select Settings.............................................................. 3-14-7


Table 3-15-A. NMU Jumper Settings........................................................................................ 3-15-3Table 3-15-B. NMU Switch S1 Settings ................................................................................... 3-15-4Table 3-15-C. NMU Switch S2 Settings ................................................................................... 3-15-4

Chapter 4–Equipment InstallationTable 4-A CM Accessory Kits ................................................................................................. 4-2Table 4-B Recommended Minimum Wire Gauge Size ........................................................... 4-5Table 4-C DS1 and Wayside Channel Connections ................................................................ 4-7Table 4-D DS3 and 155-Mbps Connections ............................................................................ 4-8Table 4-E DB15 TTL Interface Connections........................................................................... 4-9

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xxv

Microwave Networks

Table 4-F DB25 Alarm/Control Relay Connections ............................................................... 4-9Table 4-G Modular (RJ11) Interface Connections................................................................. 4-10Table 4-H Network Port Connections .................................................................................... 4-11Table 4-I Local Access Port.................................................................................................. 4-14Table 4-J Modem Data Transfer Communication Requirements ......................................... 4-20Table 4-K DTE-to-DCE Cable Connections.......................................................................... 4-20Table 4-L DTE-to-DTE Cable Connections .......................................................................... 4-20

Chapter 5–AlignmentTable 5-A. RF Shelf Module Requirements (numbers denotes quantities) .............................. 5-2Table 5-B. SP Shelf Module Requirements .............................................................................. 5-2Table 5-C. Fuse Ratings............................................................................................................ 5-9Table 5-D. Recommended Test Equipment ............................................................................ 5-20Table 5-E. Test Equipment Electrical and Functional Specifications .................................... 5-20Table 5-F. Voltage and Alarm Checks ................................................................................... 5-22Table 5-G. Frequency, Transmitter Power, and Monitor Checks ........................................... 5-22Table 5-H. RSL, AGC, and System Gain................................................................................ 5-23Table 5-I. AGC Readings ...................................................................................................... 5-23

Chapter 6–MaintenanceTable 6-A. Recommended Test Equipment .............................................................................. 6-2Table 6-B. Test Equipment Electrical and Functional Specifications ...................................... 6-2Table 6-C. Fuse Ratings............................................................................................................ 6-5Table 6-D. Troubleshooting Flow Chart Matrix ....................................................................... 6-6

Site Engineering–

Appendix A–T/I Curves

Appendix B–QuikLink ScreensTable B-A. Keyboard/keypad Functions ...................................................................................B-3Table B-B. Local Access Port Codes.........................................................................................B-3Table B-C. Local Display Screen Index ....................................................................................B-4Table B-D. Radio Frequency and Capacity .............................................................................B-10

Appendix C–Configuration TablesTable C-A. 8209302-00 Access Panel Configuration Settings..................................................C-2Table C-B. MGN8112 Access Panel Configuration Settings....................................................C-2Table C-C. SP Backplane Jumper Settings................................................................................C-3Table C-D. TXU IF BPF/LO Board Jumper Settings................................................................C-3Table C-E. RXU Control Board MLN7905A Jumper Settings.................................................C-4Table C-F. ACU Jumper Settings..............................................................................................C-4Table C-G. ACU DIP Switch Settings.......................................................................................C-5Table C-H. MOD 8000514-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH) ....................................C-5Table C-I. DEMOD 8000515-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH)...............................C-6

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xxvi

Microwave Networks

Table C-J. MUX 8000513-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH) ....................................C-6Table C-K. SYNDES 8000516-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH)..............................C-6Table C-L. SCU Jumper Settings ..............................................................................................C-6Table C-M. SCU Switch S1 (CH1) and S2 (CH2) Settings .......................................................C-6Table C-N. OWU Jumper Settings ............................................................................................C-7Table C-O. OWU Switch Settings .............................................................................................C-8Table C-P. MLN7330 WTU Jumper Settings ...........................................................................C-8Table C-Q. MLN7330 WTU Switch Settings............................................................................C-8Table C-R. 8000608-00 WTU Equalizer Control / Line Length Select Settings ......................C-8Table C-S. 8000608-00 WTU Line Code Select Settings.........................................................C-9Table C-T. MLN7329 (E1) Jumper Settings .............................................................................C-9Table C-U. MLN7329 (E1) WTU Switch Settings....................................................................C-9Table C-W. NMU Switch S1 Settings ......................................................................................C-10Table C-X. NMU Switch S2 Settings ......................................................................................C-10Table C-V. NMU Jumper Settings...........................................................................................C-10

Appendix D–Alarm CodesTable D-A. Alarm Codes ...........................................................................................................D-1

Appendix E–Setting Frequency SwitchesTable E-A. Synthesizer Oscillator Frequency Ranges............................................................... E-1Table E-B. CM7 Synthesizer Switch Settings in 20-MHz Increments ..................................... E-3Table E-C. Switch Settings, 2 MHz Increments........................................................................E-4Table E-D. Synthesizer Frequency Bands ................................................................................. E-5Table E-E. 20-MHz Synthesizer Switch Settings .....................................................................E-6Table E-F. Synthesizer Frequency Bands ................................................................................. E-7


Appendix G–CM SNMPTable G-A. SNMP Components.................................................................................................G-2Table G-B. Component Descriptions and Part Numbers...........................................................G-2Table G-C. Front Panel Network Interface Components...........................................................G-2Table G-D. SNMP NMU LED Descriptions .............................................................................G-4Table G-E. SNMP NMU Push-button Reset Switch Descriptions............................................G-4Table G-F. SNMP NMU Jumper Descriptions .........................................................................G-4Table G-G. Ethernet Port Pins....................................................................................................G-6Table G-H. SCE Cable Pin Assignments ...................................................................................G-7Table G-I. Local Access Port....................................................................................................G-7Table G-J. MIB Performance Table (perfTable) Variables ....................................................G-11Table G-K. MIB Configuration Table (confTable) Variables .................................................G-12Table G-L. MIB Fault Manager (faultManager) Variables .....................................................G-12Table G-M. MIB Diagnostics (diagnostics) Variables .............................................................G-13Table G-N. Telnet Command Definitions................................................................................G-15

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 1-1

1.0 IntroductionThe CM7/8, 155-Mbps Digital Microwave radio (CM7/8) provides bandwidth-efficient transmission of voice and data for all common carriers, cellular communications, and private network communications. The system is a 155.52-Mbit/second transport radio capable of OC-3 (optical) STM1/STS3 (electrical) selections.

The CM7/8 operates in frequency bands ranging from 7.125 to 8.5 GHz. Figure 1-1 shows the rack-mounted CM7/8 radio.

Major sections in this chapter are:

1. Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

2. CM7/8 Protection Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

3 SONET Optical Data Conversion. . . . . . . . 1-4

4. Channel Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

5. FCC Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

6. Equipment Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

7. Transmission Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

8. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Chapter 1General Information

Figure 1-1. CM7/8 SONET SDH Digital Microwave Radio

Chapter 1 General Information

Page 1-2 8/5/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual

2.0 CM7/8 Protection FeaturesThe CM7/8 155-Mbps radio (CM7/8) delivers as much as 101.5 dB of system gain (typical for 10-

3 BER). The CM7/8 design allows you to easily upgrade from lower capacities, and its protection configurations easily altered or added to in the field. This efficient design serves to make operation, installation, and maintenance easier, while optimizing the CM7/8 performance and reliability.

2.1 Protection

The CM7/8 is a high capacity digital microwave radio available in hot-standby, space diversity, and frequency diversity protected configurations, as well as a non-protected version. The service channels can be configured to be protected or non-protected as desired. This protection availability makes the CM7/8 capacities well-suited for a wide range of communication applications.

Figure 1-2 illustrates protected switching. Other features of the design include:

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (128-QAM)

modulation scheme that improves spectral performance, and meets CTIA requirements for spectral efficiency.

Forward Error Correction (FEC) provides error correction for traffic channels and service channels.

Errorless Space Diversity Switch Errorless receiver switching; may be used as part of a protection configuration.

Reverse Channel Switching protects against silent transmitter failures.

Dispersive Fade Margin radio system is engineered to recover from signal dispersion.

Automatic Power Control (APC) regulates transmitter power output; uses only adequate power for normal operation and increases output power during a severe fade.

APC also extends the life of the radio’s power amplifiers by reducing amplifier power consumption during normal operation.

Complete Front Access to all user interfaces after installation, enabling the user to have easy access to the hardware for desired changes.

Microwave Networks, Inc.


MO

DB

DE

MO

DB

MO

D A

DE

MO

DA

F-1

245a

TX

A

RX

A

RX

B

Ant

enna

Por

tR

F D

ist

Filt

er

RF

Dis

tF

ilter

TX

B

LO LO

SY

NT

HE

SIZ

ER

SY

NT

HE

SIZ

ER

RF

-TX

Onl

ine

Con

trol

MU

X-T

XO

nlin

eC

ontr

olS

CU

A

Tx

Rx

SY

ND

ES

A

SY

ND

ES

B

SC

U B

Rx

Tx

MU

X A

MU

X B

DS

1/D

S3/

OC

-3

Ser

vice

Cha

nnel

s

Rx

Tx

Rx

Tx

Rx

Tx

Rx

Tx

WT

U A

Tx

Rx

WT

U B

Tx

Rx

#1 #2

RF

-Rx

Onl

ine

Con

trol

SC

U/W

TU

Onl

ine

Con

trol

SC

U-R

xO

nlin

eC

ontr

olM

ux-R

XO

nlin

eC

ontr

ol

WT

U-R

XO

nlin

eC

ontr

ol

WT

U-R

XO

nlin

eC

ontr

ol

Way

side

Cha

nnel

Figu

re 1

-2. C

M7/

8 15

5-M

bp

s H

ot S

tan

db

y S

yste

m B

lock

Dia

gram

Not

e: M

UX

and

DE

MU

X fu

nctio

ns a

re p

erfo

rmed

on

the

MU

X b

oard

s. S

YNC

, DE

SYN

C, a

nd b

i-di

rect

iona

l opt

ic to

ele

ctri

cal c

onve

rsio

n fu

ncti

ons

are

perf

orm

ed o

n th

e SY

ND

ES

boar

d.



3.0 SONET Optical Data ConversionWhen configured to process SONET OC-3 data, the CM7/8 radio performs bi-directional data conversion using a conversion transceiver located on the SYNDES board. For OC-3 data entering the CM7/8 radio from a customer router, the OC-3 data is converted and then multiplexed and modulated before being sent to the transmitter and an antenna for RF transmission to a far end SONET radio. For RF data being transmitted and received from the far end SONET radio, the data is first demodulated and demultiplexed before entering the conversion transceiver. The converted RF-to- OC-3 data is then sent to the customer router for SONET data processing and subsequent distribution.

4.0 Channel CapacityTransmission standards evolved from different basic-rate signals in the non-synchronous hierarchy. TDM, Time Division Multiplexing, in North America combines twenty-four 64 kbps channels (DS-0s) into one 1.54 Mbps DS-1 signal. International TDM multiplexes thirty-two 64 kbps channels (E-0s) into one 2.048 Mbps E-1 (CEPT format) signal.

155-Mbps standards accommodate both the 1.5-Mbps and the 2-Mbps non-synchronous hierarchies in a single synchronization standard. SONET specifies a basic transmission rate of 51 Mbps and SDH specifies a basic rate of 155.52 Mbps. SONET and SDH converge at the SDH 155.52-Mbps base level, defined as STM-1 (Synchronous Transport Module-1). The base level for SONET is STS-1 (or OC-1) and is equivalent to 51.84 Mbps. Thus SDH STM-1 is equivalent to SONET STS-3 (3 x 51.84 Mbps = 155.52 Mbps).

The CM7/8 155-Mbps radio transports 155.52 Mbps data, thus carries the equivalent of 2016 voice channels. When equipped with one of the optional Wayside Traffic Units (WTU), the radio can carry an additional DS1 or E1 channel and a 9600-bps asynchronous data channel with no loss of performance.

The radio uses 128 QAM modulation and has a 30 MHz RF channel bandwidth.

5.0 FCC ComplianceTable 1-A lists the CM7/8 SONET FCC specifications. The CM7/8 radio is capable of transmission in the 7.125 to 8.5-GHz band.

Table 1-A. CM7/8 SONET FCC Specifications

ItemCM7/8SONET

FCC Part 101

Radio Frequency Range 7.125 to 8.5 GHz

FCC Identifier LBW-CM7/8HC-OC-3

Frequency Stability 10 ppm

Maximum Transmission Rate

165.85 Mbps

ChannelBandwidth

30 MHz

Emission Designator

30M0D7W



6.0 Equipment DescriptionFigure 1-3 shows a typical CM7/8 radio in protected configuration. The front cover has been removed to show the plug-in modules. The CM7/8 radio includes radio Frequency (RF) and Signal Processing (SP) equipment sections.

The RF section of the radio consists of RF Distribution and the RF shelf containing the RF modules. RF modules include the Transmitter Unit (TXU), the Receive Unit (RXU), and the RF Power Supply Unit (RF PSU). The SP section of the radio cabinet consists of the Access Panel and the SP shelf containing the SP modules. These units are used for IF signal processing, orderwire, and alarm and control.

Figure 1-3. CM7/8 Digital Microwave Radio in Hot-Standby Configuration



The radio front covers are removable, allowing access to the modules before and after installation. With the front and rear covers in place, the CM7/8 radio meets FCC Part 15 regulations for emissions and is also compliant with industry standards regarding radio interference susceptibility from external sources.

The cabinet mechanical design allows for air flow through the radio to maintain proper system temperature, and meets all performance specifications with the covers in place. Always replace the covers after maintenance or repair activity.

All of the standard and optional modules contained in the CM7/8 radio are listed in Table 1-B. See Table 3-A for part numbers associated with these modules. See Chapter 4 for equipment installation instructions before removing or replacing modules.

Table 1-B. CM7/8 SONET Sections and Modules

Section Module

RF Section RF Distribution

Transmitter Unit (TXU)

Receiver Unit (RXU)

RF Power Supply Unit (RF PSU)

SP Section Access Panel

SP Power Supply Unit (SP PSU)

Alarm and Control Unit (ACU)

Modulator (MOD)

Demodulator (DEMOD)

Multiplexer (MUX)

Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES)

Service Channel Unit (SCU) (Optional)

Orderwire Unit (OWU) (Optional)

Wayside Traffic Unit (WTU) (Optional, available on DS3 and higher capacity radios only)

Network Management Unit (NMU) (Optional)



7.0 Transmission EngineeringRF channel separation, radio system gain, and interference considerations may affect the perfor-mance of the radio.

7.1 RF Channel Separation

Typically, at all sites, radio frequencies should be grouped such that each radio transmitter fre-quency is above the radio receiver frequency. The most common T/R frequency separations on a common antenna (same polarization) are 490 and 500 MHz.

7.2 Radio System Gain

The radio system gain is the transmitter power in dBm minus the receiver sensitivity or threshold in dBm for a 10-6 or 10-3 BER. For example, on a high power 7-GHz radio, the maximum transmitter power is +31.0 dBm, and the typical receiver threshold at 10-3 is-70.5 dBm. Therefore, the typical system gain at 10-3 is +31.0 - (-70.5) = 101.5 dB.

7.3 Interference Considerations

The CM7/8 receivers have substantially higher interference immunity than FDM/FM receivers. The interference in an analog system is apparent in the voice channels in direct proportion to the level of the interference relative to the message carrier. In a digital receiver such as the CM7/8, the interference is only apparent when it is of sufficient level such that the T/I ratio of the digital receiver has been violated. For a definition of T/I ratio, refer to Appendix A.

Transmission engineering considerations for hub operations, two-frequency plan repeaters, cross-polarized operation and intersystem coordination must take into account the differential fading that is quite likely to occur between the desired carrier and the interference.

8.0 SpecificationsElectrical and mechanical specifications for the CM7/8 Digital Microwave radio are listed in Tables 1-C and Table 1-D.

These specifications apply to equipment connected back-to-back, unless otherwise stated. Specifi-cations are subject to change without notice. Weights and dimensions are approximate. Power and threshold are guaranteed engineering specifications at 25°C at the antenna flange.

8.1 Transmitter Power

The CM7/8 transmitter has a rated power output as outlined in Table 1-C. The power output is mea-sured at the antenna connection to the radio. No additional branching losses need be added.

8.2 Receiver Sensitivity

The CM7/8 1x1 Hot Standby receiver has a minimum threshold receive signal level (measured at the antenna connection) as outlined in Tables 1-C. No additional branching losses need be added. The receiver dynamic range is also listed in these tables.



* These values are for the A side Tx. B Tx values are 1 dB lower than those listed**These values are for the A side radio. B side hot-standby values are 10 dB higher than those listed. Threshold values are 0.5 dB better on non-protected (NN) radios

Specifications apply to the main side a protected radio connected back-to-back, unless other-wise stated. Specifications are subject to change without notice. Power and threshold are guar-anteed engineering specifications at 25°C at the antenna flange.

Table 1-C. CM7/8 SONET/SDH Radio Specifications

Specification CM7/8 SONET

System (Monitored Hot Standby)

Typical System Gain -- BER =10-3 (APC High)

D-High Power (DHP) 101.5/100.5 dB

High Power (HP) 98.5 dB

Standard Power (SP) 93.5 dB

Modulation Type 128 QAM

Transmission Rate 165.85 Mbps

Channel Bandwidth 30 MHz

Dispersive Fade Margin

10-3 BER 49 dB

10-6 BER 47 dB

Residual BER <10-13

Antenna Waveguide Flange Type CMR112FRequired Antenna VSWR (Return Loss) 1.43:1 (15 dB)

Transmitter Power Output

Standard Power: APC High* 23 dBm

APC Low* 13 dBm

High Power: APC High* 28 dBm

APC Low* 18 dBm

D-High Power: APC High* 31/30 dBm

APC Low 21/20 dBm

Frequency Range (GHz) 7.125 to 8.5

Frequency Stability ±0.001%

Receiver Threshold

10-3 BER: Typical** -70.5 dBm

Guaranteed** -69.5 dBm

10-6 BER: Typical** -68.5 dBm

Guaranteed** -67.5 dBm

Dynamic Range BER = 10-6, Typical 49.5 dB

Forward Error Correction BCH Block Coding

IF 70 MHz

RF Input BER = 10-6, Typical -20 dBm

Maximum RF Input -10 dBm



Table 1-D. General Specifications

Specification ValuePhysical InterfaceSTS-3 155.52 Mbps

75-Ω unbalanced BNC connectorOC-3 155.52 Mbps, 1310 nm, SC connectorMultimode standard, Single mode optionalTransmitter meets SONET OC-3 and ITU G.957 mask patterns. Transmit signal complies with ANSI T1.102-1993; BER threshold per ETSI EN301 785Optical Input Level

Non-Protected SystemHot Standby System

Multimode Single mode-32.5 to -14 dBm -32.5 to -8 dBm-28.5 to -10 dBm -28.5 to -4 dBm

(includes 4dB margin for loss through internal splitter)Output Level

Non-Protected SystemHot Standby System

Multimode Single mode-19 to -14 dBm -14 to -8 dBm -23 to -18 dBm -18 to -12 dBm

(includes 4dB for loss through internal splitter)Digital Service ChannelDigital Interfaces

Quantity 2Maximum Data Rate 19.2 kbps (asynchronous)

Analog Voice FrequencyQuantity 2Frequency Range 300 to 3400 HzInput (Tx) Level -3.5 dBm (-16 dBm option)Output (Rx) Level -3.5 dBm (+7 dBm option)Idle Channel Noise (narrow band) 23 dBrnC

Electrical (MHSB)Input Voltage Range ±20 to ±60 VdcPower Consumption (typical)

Std. Pwr. APC Low/High (Non-protected) 110/120 WStd. Pwr. APC Low/High (Hot Standby) 190/200 WHigh Pwr. APC Low/High (Non-protected) 155/215 WHigh Pwr. APC Low/High (Hot Standby) 270/330 WD-High Pwr. APC Low/High (Non-protected) 170/250 WD-High Pwr. APC Low/High (Hot Standby) 285/345 W

Status/Control/AlarmsExternal Alarm Inputs Quantity (NMU equipped) 4 (8) Type Std. - TTLExternal Control Outputs Quantity 4 Type Form-C Dry Contact (NO, NC, COMM) Contact Rating 0.5 A - 30 Vdc Quantity - NMU equipped 4 Type Std. - TTLRelay Alarm Outputs Quantity 4 Contact Rating 0.5 A - 30 Vdc Type Form-C Dry Contact (NO, NC, COMM)



Specifications apply to the main side a protected radio connected back-to-back, unless other-wise stated. Specifications are subject to change without notice. Power, threshold, and system gain are guaranteed engineering specifications at 25°C at the antenna flange.

Operating EnvironmentAmbient Temperature 0° to +50°C (32° to 122°F)Humidity 95% (no condensation)Altitude AMSL 15,000 ft. (4,500 m)MechanicalHeight 33.25 in. (845 mm) Width 17.25 in. (438 mm)Depth 10.25 in. (260 mm)

Table 1-D. General Specifications (Continued)

Specification Value

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual Page 2-1

1.0 IntroductionThis chapter covers CM7/8 SONET/SDH radio principles of operation including signal flow through the radio, available configurations for switching and loopback, and using the radio features. In addition, this chapter covers:

2.0 RF Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-33.0 Signal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-54.0 Equipment Configurations. . . . . . . Page 2-75.0 Protection Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-116.0 Loopbacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-197.0 Automatic Power Control . . . . . . . Page 2-27

The CM7/8 SONET radio connects two distant points in a communication system by converting the user input signals to a form that can be carried by microwave. The CM7/8 then transmits the converted signal by microwave from one radio to another. After the signal reaches the distant CM7/8 radio, that CM7/8 converts the signal back into its original form.

1.1 Transmitting

This section covers the CM7/8 SONET/SDH radio transmit functions.

Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES) Module - accepts 155.52-Mbit/second optical input from the access panel, sends the signal through line decoding that converts the signal to non-return to zero (NRZ) format, and sends the clock and NRZ data stream to the MUX (multiplexer).

Service Channel Unit (SCU) - receives two voice and two data service channels from the Access Panel. The SCU converts them to four 64 kbps channels which are applied to the Multiplexer.

Multiplexer (MUX) - performs both multiplexer and demultiplexer functions as described in Chapter 1, Paragraph 3.0.

On the transmit side, the MUX receives the NRZ signal from the SYNDES and multiplexes the signal together with:

• four 64 kbps service channels

• other overhead control bits

• two 64 kbps internal overhead channels

• if equipped, two channels (1DS1/1E1 + 9600-bps asynchronous data) from the Way-side Traffic Unit (WTU)

It converts them into a symbol stream suitable for input to the Modulator.

Modulator (MOD) - receives input from the MUX and mixes it with the 70-MHz carrier to generate a multiple level QAM signal. The output of the MOD is 70 MHz and is connected directly to the Transmitter.

Transmitter Unit (TXU) - accepts the modulated 70-MHz transmit signal from the MOD and delivers it to the RF Distribution filter.

Chapter 2Principles of Operation

Chapter 2 Principles of Operation

Page 2-2 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual

Internal to the TXU, the signal goes through a double up-conversion process that utilizes the first on-board local oscillator and RXU frequency synthesizer to provide the second local oscillator. The resultant 6-GHz signal is further amplified and applied to the TXU output.

Three output power configurations are available for the CM7/8 radio: standard power (SP), high power (HP), and D-high power (DHP). The HP and DHP option provides 6.5 dB greater output power for a given capacity and channel bandwidth. DHP provides 9 dB more output power during severe fade conditions. During fades the TXU Automatic Power Control (APC) feature increases output power to maintain the RF link. See“Automatic Power Control” on page 2-27.

1.2 Receiving

This section discusses the receiving functions of the CM7/8 Digital Microwave radio.

Receiver Unit (RXU) - accepts the received 6-GHz signal from the RF Distribution filter and delivers a 70-MHz signal to the DEMOD. Internal to the RXU, the signal goes through a low noise pre-amplification stage and a downconversion process that utilizes the on-board frequency synthesizer to provide a local oscillator. The resultant 70-MHz signal is amplified, filtered, and applied to the DEMOD.

Demodulator (DEMOD) - performs the complementary function to the MOD in the far end transmitter. It accepts a multiple level QAM signal centered at 70 MHz from the Receiver. The DEMOD outputs the recovered data directly to the demultiplexer section of the MUX. Figure 1-3 in Chapter 1 shows the DEMOD electrically connected. An optional baseband ATDE automatically equalizes channel distortions which result from multi-path fading.

Demultiplexer (MUX module) - the Multiplexer performs both multiplexer and demultiplexer functions. On the receive side, the MUX receives the symbol stream from the DEMOD and demultiplexes this signal into the 155.52-Mbit signal, four 64 kbps service channels, two 64 kbps internal overhead channels, and in the case of the 28DS1 or DS3 radio, two signals (1DS1 and 9600 bps) for the WTU. The 155.52-Mbit signal is then sent to the SYNDES module.

Four of the six 64 kbps channels are used in the SCU. Of the remaining two 64 kbps channels, one channel is used for inter-site communications and the other channel is for the Network Management System.

Desynchronizer (SYNDES module) - receives a data stream from the MUX. These signals are clocked into an elastic buffer, the output of which is clocked by a recovered smooth clock provided by a PLL.

The resultant smoothed data and clock are fed to the line decoder for NRZ coding. The resultant 155.52-Mbit signal then connects to the outputs of the SYNDES and routed to the Access Panel for customer connection. The two signals (1DS1/1E1 + 9600 bps) from the optional WTU are also routed to connectors on the Access Panel.

Service Channel (SCU) - receives four 64 kbps channels and converts two to voice frequency and two to data channels. These are routed to the Access Panel for customer connection.

Microwave Networks


2.0 RF ModulesThe following sections provide a brief description of the RF components. The radio cabinet is configured so that the A side modules are on the left, and the B side modules are on the right. The modules can be configured for various protection options by changing the waveguide branching network.

Table 2-A lists RF module requirements for available radio configurations. Figure 2-1 illustrates a protected RF section of the radio cabinet.

2.1 Branching Waveguide

This component provides the interconnection between the antenna waveguide port and the transmit and receive RF filters. Both transmit and the receive signals are in the 6-GHz frequency band.

Five branching network configurations are available: Hot Standby transmitter and Hot Standby receiver (HH), Hot Standby transmitter and Space Diversity receiver (HS), Non-Protected Transmitter and Space Diversity Receiver (NS), Frequency Diversity Transmitter and Frequency Diversity Receiver (FF), and Non-protected transmitter and Non-protected receiver (NN). The waveguide is attached to the back cover of the radio. Simplified block diagrams of the five standard RF configurations are shown in Figures 2-3 to 2-7.

F-1207

RF IN

RXU

AGC MON

RF LPBK

LO FREQADJ

LPBK LO IN

IF OUT

RX ALM

GND

LO MON

TX LO OUT

OFF

RF OUT

TXU

TX MON

TX LO IN

TX ALM

TX POWER ADJ

IF IN

LPBK LO OUT

RF IN

RXU

AGC MON

RF LPBK

LO FREQADJ

LPBK LO IN

IF OUT

RX ALM

GND

LO MON

TX LO OUT

OFF

RF OUT

TXU

TX MON

TX LO IN

TX ALM

TX POWER ADJ

IF IN

LPBK LO OUT

Figure 2-1. RF Shelf; Hot-Standby Tx/Rx and Hot-Standby Tx/Space Diversity Rx



2.2 Transmitter Unit (TXU)

The TXU is a removable plug-in module that comes in three output power options: Standard, High power, and D-high power. The RXU interfaces with the Rx filter using a semi-rigid coaxial cable. It is connected to the Demodulator (DEMOD) at an IF interface using flexible coaxial cable.

2.3 RF Power Supply Unit (RF PSU)

The RF PSU is a removable plug-in module that supplies the power to the TXU and RXU modules. When using a hot-stanby configuration for protection two RF PSUs will be needed, one for the main radio and one for the hot-standby unit. When using a non-protected configuration, only one RF PSU is needed.

When protection is desired for the transmitter or receiver operations, it is possible to establish a configuration on the RF shelf of two transmitters (main and hot-standby transmitters), two receivers (main and hot-standby receivers), and two RF power supply units. See Figure 2-1.

Table 2-A. RF Shelf Module Requirements (numbers denote module quantities)

Configuration TXU RXU RF PSU

Hot Standby Transmitter/Hot Standby Receiver (HH)

2 2 2

Hot Standby Transmitter/Space Diversity Receive (HS)

2 2 2

Non-Protected Transmitter/ Space Diversity Receiver (NS)

1 2 2

Frequency Diversity Transmitter/Frequency Diver-sity Receiver (FF)

2 2 2

Non-Protected Transmitter/Non-protected Receive (NN)

1 1 1

Microwave Networks


3.0 Signal ProcessingThe following sections provide a brief description of the components of the SP section of the radio cabinet. For a detailed description of the Access Panel, refer to individual module descriptions in Chapter 3.

3.1 Access Panel

The CM radio provides the interface for the customer to connect and monitor all signal connections, except the RF signals and battery connections. The Access Panel provides the following features:

• 50-pin TELCO connector for 28 x DS1 signals (not on 155.52-Mbit only version).

• 75-ohm BNC connectors for 3 x DS3 signals, and a 155.52-Mbit electrical interface

• A duplex SC connector for 155.52-Mbit optical signals

• Four fuses for RF PSU A and B, SP PSU A and B.

• DB9 connector to interface with a VT100/VT220 terminal or equivalent computer.

• 4-position, 4-pin modular jack to the orderwire handset.

• Two 6-position, 6-pin modular jacks to interconnect other equipment compatible with NMS software.

• Six 4-position, 4-pin modular jacks for the service channels, the orderwire, and bridge legs.

• 4-position, 4-pin modular jack for the WTU DS1 channel.

• A DB15 and a DB25 connection for connecting signals External Alarm and Auxiliary TTL through the radio to the network management system.

3.2 Signal Processing Modules

These modules are plugged into the area below the Access Panel. They provide the interface between the customer traffic and the RF modules. The shelf is optimized for the protected configuration. The A-side modules are on the left and the B-side modules are on the right. Detailed descriptions of the modules can be found in Chapter 3.

Table 2-B lists SP shelf module requirements for the available configurations. Numbers in the table denote quantities of each module. Figure 2-2 shows the Signal Processing section of the radio shelf in protected configuration.



3.3 ATDE and Dispersive Fade Margin

The ATDE function, incorporated into the DEMOD, is a multiple-tap transversal equalizer that improves dispersive fade margin (DFM)—the receiver’s ability to resist dispersive fading. Digital microwave radios are vulnerable to fading caused by multi-path propagation. In multi-path propagation, microwave signals arriving at the receive site from reflective layers or areas are delayed relative to the direct signal. All signals combine at the receive antenna and can cause amplitude and phase distortion of the direct signal.

Table 2-B SP Shelf Module Requirements

Configuration MOD DEMOD MUX SYNDES SP PSU ACU NMU* SCU OWU* WTU*

Hot Standby/Hot Standby (HH)

2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 or 2* 1 2

Hot Standby/Space Diver-sity (HS)

2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 or 2* 1 2

Non-protected/Space Diver-sity (NS)

1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1

Frequency Diversity/Fre-quency Diver-sity (FF)

2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1

Non-protected/Non-protected (NN)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

* Optional modules. SCU can be protected or non-protected. OWU and NMU are non-pro-tected. The NMU module is installed on the ACU unit. First SCU standard, the protected SCU is optional.

PSU SCU ACU MOD DEMOD MUX SYNDES SYNDESWTU PSUSCUOWUMODDEMODMUX WTU

F-0100A

Radio BRadio A

Figure 2-2. Signal Processing Shelf in Protected Configuration

Microwave Networks


Normally this distortion is minimal and easily handled by the receiver because the direct signal is stronger than the reflected signals. However, under fading conditions the direct signal may be attenuated and the distortion increased to the point where frequency selective notches result and dispersive fading is present. The ATDE equalizes amplitude and delay distortions of microwave links with excessive multi-path activity.

4.0 Equipment ConfigurationsCM7/8 equipment configurations include channel capacities, protection configurations, and repeater arrangements.

4.1 Protection

For standby protection of the radio equipment, traffic is automatically transferred from in-service to standby facilities in the event of malfunction of the in-service equipment. A manual transfer switch is provided as a menu item on the local access port for off-line equipment maintenance of the primary or standby equipment. See Appendix B for local access port menu and screen selection.

The CM7/8 radio operates with Hot Standby, Space Diversity, Frequency Diversity or Non-protected transmitters and receivers.

1. Hot Standby Transmitter, Hot Standby Receiver (HH): In this protection configuration, a single antenna port on the radio connects to the antenna system and the radio is equipped with two of each module; one for primary and one for standby. Figure 2-3 illustrates signal flow in this configuration.

!"#$%$&'( )*++, -

!"#$%$&'( )*++, -

Figure 2-3. Hot Standby Tx/Rx (HH) Signal Flow



2. Hot Standby Transmitter, Space Diversity Receiver (HS): This configuration is similar to the Hot Standby Transmitter/Hot Standby Receiver, except for the addition of a second antenna port for the B Receiver and the ability to perform errorless receiver switching based on differ-ences in the signal quality coming into the two receivers.

Figure 2-4 illustrates signal flow in this configuration.

3. Non-protected Transmitter, Space Diversity Receiver (NS): This configuration is similar to the Hot Standby Transmitter/ Space Diversity Receiver, except that this protection configura-tion offers no RF Unit, receiver redundancy. Figure 2-5 illustrates signal flow in this configu-ration.

4. Frequency Diversity Transmitter, Frequency Diversity Receiver (FF): In this configura-tion both the A and B radios operate on separate frequencies, an option that is used most often in international applications. Figure 2-6 illustrates the FF configuration sig-nal flow.

5. Non-protected Transmitter, Non-protected Receiver (NN): This protection configuration offers no redundancy in the RF Unit. Figure 2-7 illustrates signal flow in this configuration.

FromMOD

A

ToDEMOD

A

F-1133

TX A

RX A

RX B

RF DistFilter

RF DistFilter

TX B

LO

LO

SYNTHESIZER

SYNTHESIZER

RF DistFilter Antenna Port

Antenna Port

FromMOD

B

ToDEMOD

B

± (20 to 60) VDC Power Supply A To TX A / RX A

± (20 to 60) VDC Power Supply B To TX B / RX B

Figure 2-4. Hot-Standby Tx, Space Diversity Rx (HS) Signal Flow

Microwave Networks


ToDEMOD

A

FromMODA

F-1131C

TX A

RX A

RX B

Antenna PorRF DistFilter

RF DistFilter

LO

SYNTHESIZER

SYNTHESIZER

ToDEMOD

B


± (20 to 60) VDC Power Supply B To TX B / RX B

Figure 2-5. Non-Protected Tx, Space Diversity Rx (NS) Signal Flow

!"#$%$&'( )*++, -

!"#$%$&'( )*++, -

Figure 2-6. Frequency Diversity Tx/Rx (FF) Signal Flow



4.2 Repeater Arrangements

Connect two terminals back-to-back at the 155.52-Mbit level to configure the radio as a repeater.

Figure 2-8 shows a back-to-back terminal configuration for the CM7/8 radio.


ToDEMOD

A

FromMOD

A

F-1132b

TX A

RX A

Antenna PortRF DistFilter

RF DistFilter

LO

SYNTHESIZER

Figure 2-7. Non-protected Tx/Rx (NN) Signal Flow

Figure 2-8. Back-to-Back Terminal Configuration

.

.

.

.

.

.

#$/

00 1

00 1

Microwave Networks


5.0 Protection SwitchingThe CM7/8 is available in Hot-Standby or Hot-Standby/Space Diversity configurations with switching protection. The Alarm and Control Unit provides protection switching for both transmitters and receivers.

5.1 Monitored Hot Standby Tx/Rx Switching (HH)

The CM7/8 radio provides various levels of protection (Figure 2-9), although it may also be configured in a non-protected status. The hot standby configuration is often selected because it is easy to configure and a stable method of protection.

In the hot-standby configuration, two radios are set up with identical hardware, so that either radio can function as the primary or standby radio. All performance specifications are met regardless of on-line status.

One radio is designated as the main radio, radio A, and the other radio is designated as the hot-standby radio, or radio B. In the event of an operation failure, operations will switch from radio A to radio B. Performance is unaffected once a switchover has occurred.

To/FromAntenna

F-0715aa

Coupler

TXU

RXU

RXU

TXU

MOD

DEMOD

DEMOD

MOD

TX

RX

RX

TX

TX

RX

TX

RX

RX

TX

RX

TX

SCU/WTU

SCU/WTU

SYNDES

SYNDES MUX

MUX

DS1/DS3/OC-3

WTU/SCU

MUX RXONLINE

CONTROL

WTU/SCURX

CONTROL

WTU/SCUSEL

CONTROL

MUX TXONLINE

CONTROL

RF RXONLINE

CONTROL

RF TXONLINE

CONTROL

1

(Side A)

(Side A)

(SideB)

(SideB)

(SideB)

(SideB)

(Side A)

(Side A)

2

3

(Side A)

(SideB)

(Side A)

(SideB)

(Side A)

(SideB)

Figure 2-9. Monitored Hot Standby Switching Diagram



5.2 Automatic Switching vs. Manual Switching

A switchover between the A and B radios can occur automatically or manually.

Automatic switching occurs when:

a module fails and operations switch automatically to the other unit, or in a space diversity configuration, a fade affects one of the two receive paths more severely than the other.

Manual switching is a user-controlled switchover used for maintenance and testing purposes. Manual switching is available for any level of operations that may be protected by automatic switching.

CAUTION

Prior to manually switching a CM7/8 radio or removing a module, be sureto confirm the online status of the radio. To do this, execute the followingseries of menu selections, beginning at the Main menu: (For a completemenu diagram and full menu screens, see Appendix B.)

1. Select Alarm and Status (020) and press <Enter>.

2. Select System (021) and press <Enter>.

3. Select Show TX and RX Path (040) and press <Enter>.

The screen clearly identifies the on-line status of the radio.

Note: As a shortcut for displaying Screen 040, the user may from anyscreen simply enter “040”and press <Enter.>

Certain modules of the CM7/8, such as the SYNDES, SCU, WTU and MUX contain both transmit and receive signal processing sections.

In modules containing both transmit and receive signal processing, only the portion of the module that fails will switch. A failure in the transmit portion of one of these modules will cause a switching of only the transmit section, while leaving the receive section in its current state.

To provide more efficient protection for transmitting and receiving operations, you can route transmit traffic through the B radio SYNDES and B radio MUX, and route receive traffic through the A radio SYNDES and A radio MUX. Thus, in the event of a failure, you can switch the surviving direction (transmit or receive) off the failed module at a scheduled low usage period, rather than during a high usage period.

5.2.1 What Happens During an A SYNDES Module Failure

If the entire A radio is on-line and the A radio SYNDES module experiences a failure in its transmit section, only the transmit section of the B radio SYNDES and B radio MUX

!

Microwave Networks


switch online. The A radio MOD, A radio DEMOD, A radio TXU, A radio RXU, and A radio SCU remain on-line, as do the receive sections of the A radio SYNDES and A radio MUX.

5.3 Monitored Hot-Standby Transmit Switching

The CM7/8 radio features multiple transmitting and receiving switch levels.

5.3.1 Transmitter Switch Levels

The CM7/8 radio Transmit side contains four switch levels.

1. SYNDES MUX,

2. TXU-MOD,

3. SCU,

4. and WTU.

See Figure 2-10.

To/FromAntenna

F-0715aa

Coupler

TXU

RXU

RXU

TXU

MOD

DEMOD

DEMOD

MOD

TX

RX

RX

TX

TX

RX

TX

RX

RX

TX

RX

TX

SCU/WTU

SCU/WTU

SYNDES

SYNDES MUX

MUX

DS1/DS3/OC-3

WTU/SCU

MUX RXONLINE

CONTROL

WTU/SCURX

CONTROL

WTU/SCUSEL

CONTROL

MUX TXONLINE

CONTROL

RF RXONLINE

CONTROL

RF TXONLINE

CONTROL

1

(Side A)

(Side A)

(SideB)

(SideB)

(SideB)

(SideB)

(Side A)

(Side A)

2

3

(Side A)

(SideB)

(Side A)

(SideB)

(Side A)

(SideB)

Figure 2-10. Monitored Hot Standby Switching



5.4 Transmitter SYNDES-MUX Switch

As shown in Figure 2-10, the 155.52-Mbit signal enters the transmit sections of both A and B radio SYNDES modules. The OUTPUT of the transmit section of the A radio SYNDES goes to the INPUT of the transmit section of the A radio MUX. Similarly, the OUTPUT of the transmit section of the B radio SYNDES goes to the INPUT of the transmit section of the B radio MUX.

In the SYNDES-MUX switch the MUX-TX Online control selects the OUTPUT for the A/B MOD’s INPUT. The MUX and SYNDES are switched together. Thus, the OUTPUTS of both the A and B radio MUX can be switched to be applied to the INPUT of either the A or B radio MOD.

Switchover Example: During a failure of the transmit section of the A radio MUX, the transmit section of the B radio MUX and the B radio SYNDES are placed on-line.

5.5 Transmitter TXU-MOD Switch

The second switch plane on the transmit side is the TXU-MOD switch. The output from the A side MOD goes to the input of the A side TXU. Similarly, the output of the B side MOD goes to the input of the B side TXU. After conversion and amplification in the TXU, the TXU-MOD switch plane is used to determine whether the A or B TXU should be on. In this way, the MOD and TXU switch together. For example, if the A side MOD fails, the B side MOD and B side TXU take over operation.

Switchover Example: During a switchover caused by a failure of the A radio MOD, the switching logic connects to the output of the B radio MOD and the B radio TXU to the antenna.

5.6 Transmitter SCU Switch

The third transmitter switch level is the SCU switch level. This switch level is valid only when protected SCUs are equipped. This level is provided to allow switching of the protected SCUs without impacting the primary traffic on the radio.

Switchover Example: In the event of a failure in the A radio SCU, the B radio SCU is placed on-line.

5.7 Transmit WTU Switch

WTU switch, the fourth transmit switch level, is valid only when protected WTUs are equipped and protected. Protection of the WTU allows switchovers of the WTUs in the event of a failure without impacting the primary traffic on the radio.

Switchover Example: In the event of a failure in the A radio WTU, the B radio WTU is placed online.

5.8 Performing Manual Switchovers

This section provides the necessary steps for performing manual switching. The CM7/8 radio requires the installation of a computer/terminal or modem for monitoring and controlling the system. Instructions for connecting this computer/terminal or modem to the CM7/8 are included in Chapter 4, “Equipment Installation.” Detailed information about the various available screens is found in Appendix B, ” Screens.”

Microwave Networks


5.8.1 Performing a Manual SYNDES-MUX Switchover

Perform the SYNDES-MUX switchover manually from the Main menu, by performing the following steps.

1. Select Control and Maintenance (070) and press <Enter>.

2. Select Path Switching (071) and press <Enter>.

3. Move cursor to MUX-SYNDES.

4. Select whether you want to:

a. switch paths automatically

b. switch radio A on-line

c. switch radio B on-line

d. lock the current selection on-line.

5. Press <Enter>.

For a complete menu diagram and full menu screens see Appendix B.

5.8.2 Performing a Manual TXU-MOD Switchover

To perform the TXU-MOD switch manually from the Main menu, perform the following steps. Select Control and Maintenance (070) and press <Enter>.


2. Move cursor to TXU-MOD.





d lock the current selection on-line.

4. Press <Enter>.


5.8.3 Performing a Manual RXU-DEMOD Switchover

Perform a manual RXU-DEMOD switchover from the Main menu, by following these steps.



3. Move cursor to RXU-DEMOD.

4. Select whether you want to





c. switch radio B on-line,


5. Press <Enter>.

Note: This level of switching is primarily used in space diversity receiver configurations, and as such, is always errorless (no frame errors; no bit errors.)


5.8.4 Performing a Manual SCU Switchover

Perform a manual SCU switchover from the Main menu by following these steps.



3. Move cursor to SCU.






5. Press <Enter>.


5.8.5 Performing the WTU Switch Manually

If the WTU has been configured in a protected state, you can perform the WTU switch manually from the Main menu, perform the following steps.



3. Move cursor to WTU.





d. lock the current selection on-line.Press <Enter>

Microwave Networks


.


5.9 Hot-Standby Protected Receive Switching Levels

The receive side of the radio also has four switching levels:

1. RXU-DEMOD

2. SYNDES-MUX

3. SCU

4. WTU

5.9.1 Receiver RXU-DEMOD Switch

As shown in Figure 2-11, the received signal is split and applied to both RXUs. The first stage in each RXU is the preamplifier. The output is applied to each RXU's downconverter sections.

The A radio RXU then sends its amplified 70-MHz signal to the A radio DEMOD while the B radio RXU sends its amplified 70 MHz signal to the B radio DEMOD. The outputs of the A and B radio DEMOD can switch to either receive section of the A or B side MUX. This level of switching is called the RXU-DEMOD switch level, provided primarily for space diversity configurations.

To/FromAntenna

F-0715aa

Coupler

TXU

RXU

RXU

TXU

MOD

DEMOD

DEMOD

MOD

TX

RX

RX

TX

TX

RX

TX

RX

RX

TX

RX

TX

SCU/WTU

SCU/WTU

SYNDES

SYNDES MUX

MUX

DS1/DS3/OC-3

WTU/SCU

MUX RXONLINE

CONTROL

WTU/SCURX

CONTROL

WTU/SCUSEL

CONTROL

MUX TXONLINE

CONTROL

RF RXONLINE

CONTROL

RF TXONLINE

CONTROL

1

(Side A)

(Side A)

(SideB)

(SideB)

(SideB)

(SideB)

(Side A)

(Side A)

2

3

(Side A)

(SideB)

(Side A)

(SideB)

(Side A)

(SideB)

Figure 2-11. Monitored Hot Standby Switching (Repeated)



5.9.2 Receiver SYNDES-MUX Switch Level

The second switch level on the receive side is the SYNDES-MUX level. The output from the receive section of the A-radio MUX is applied to the input of the receive section of the A-radio SYNDES.

Similarly, the output from the receive section of the B-radio MUX is applied to the input of the receive section of the B-radio SYNDES. The SYNDES-MUX switch level determines whether the output from the receive section of the A-radio SYNDES or B-radio SYNDES is sent to the terminal block. A module failure involving the receiver section of the MUX, SYNDES, or both causes this level of switching.

5.9.3 Receiver SCU Switch

The third receiver switch is the SCU switch. This switch is only valid only when protected SCUs are used. This switch allows switching of the protected SCUs without impacting the primary traffic on the radio. In the event of a failure in the A radio SCU, B radio SCU is placed online.

5.9.4 Receive WTU Switch

The fourth receiver switch is the WTU switch. This switch level is valid only when protected WTUs are equipped. This level is provided to allow switching of the protected WTUs without impacting the primary traffic on the radio.

In the event of a failure in the A radio WTU, the B radio WTU is placed on line.

5.10 Monitored Hot-Standby Transmitter, Space DiversityReceiver Switching (HS)

The CM7/8 Monitored Hot-Standby Transmitter, Space Diversity Receiver (HS) radio configuration is very similar to the Monitored Hot-Standby Transmitter/Receiver (HH) radio configuration. Only the antenna branching network differs between Space Diversity and Hot-Standby radio configurations. For specific Space Diversity signal flow details, refer to Figures 2-4 and 2-12.

Note: The Space Diversity protection switching function is equivalent to the Hot Standby radio configuration.

For details of the protection switching operation, refer to Section 5.1.

Microwave Networks


6.0 LoopbacksThe CM7/8 Loopback modes, shown in Figure 2-14, fall into two general classifications: local and remote.

Local loopback refers to a connection that causes loopback to occur on the local radio and permits observation at the local radio. Remote loopback refers to a connection that causes loopback to occur on the remote radio and permits observation at the local radio.

Loopback modes available on the CM7/8 are:

Loopback is a method of testing and troubleshooting segments of the CM7/8 system transmit and receive functions. Access loopbacks through the Local Access Port on the

RF Local Loopback IF Local Loopback MUX Local Loopback

SYNDES Local Loopback SYNDES Remote Loopback

SCU Local Loopback SCU Remote Loopback

WTU Local Loopback, WTU Remote Loopback

To/FromAntenna

F-0715aa

Coupler

TXU

RXU

RXU

TXU

MOD

DEMOD

DEMOD

MOD

TX

RX

RX

TX

TX

RX

TX

RX

RX

TX

RX

TX

SCU/WTU

SCU/WTU

SYNDES

SYNDES MUX

MUX

DS1/DS3/OC-3

WTU/SCU

MUX RXONLINE

CONTROL

WTU/SCURX

CONTROL

WTU/SCUSEL

CONTROL

MUX TXONLINE

CONTROL

RF RXONLINE

CONTROL

RF TXONLINE

CONTROL

1

(Side A)

(Side A)

(SideB)

(SideB)

(SideB)

(SideB)

(Side A)

(Side A)

2

3

(Side A)

(SideB)

(Side A)

(SideB)

(Side A)

(SideB)

Figure 2-12. Hot Standby Tx, Space Diversity Rx (HS) Switching



front of the Access Panel. This port allows access to a fully menu-driven interface by a VT100 compatible terminal, making it easy to locate the various parameters to monitor or control. Loopbacks on main and standby side of the protected configurations remain independent of each other.

Important: When a remote loopback is requested, the loopback is performed on the far-end radio, and not the radio from which the request was initiated. In a remote loopback, the far end traffic is looped back toward the local radio.

6.1 Traffic Requirements

The transmit and receive traffic may be routed through different parts of the radio. However, if you intend to initiate local loopbacks without interfering with the on-line traffic, be sure that the transmit traffic and the receive traffic are routed through the same part of the off-line radio.

6.2 How to Perform a Loopback

The Loopback for each piece of equipment or function is discussed in each section. The Loopback menus, submenus, and loopback screens are provided in Appendix B.

Important: Before performing any loopbacks, determine the on-line status of the system using screen <40>.

When the radio is in any local loopback mode, the manual LED on the access panel blinks at a one-second interval. This is to alert the user that the system is set up for loopbacks. When any remote loopback mode is in effect, this LED blinks at both the local and remote radios.

To initiate the loopback function perform these steps for each area of equipment you want to test, then follow the remaining procedures shown on screens and in each section of this manual.

On your computer/terminal system monitoring screen:

1. Select <Control and Maintenance (70)> and press <Enter>.

2. Select <Loopback> and press <Enter>.

3. Select the screen number for the equipment you want to test, and <Enter>.

4. Select whether you want to test radio A or B, if you have two units in the configuration.

5. Follow any remaining steps.

6.3 RF Local Loopback

In RF Local Loopback, the TXU monitor port output signal is applied to the adjacent RXU. The RF Local Loopback test helps isolate waveguide, antenna-feed, or path-related problems. A successful loopback ensures that the entire terminal is working normally up to the RF waveguide filters.

Note: The RF Local Loopback test affects all traffic on the selected radio. On protected sys-tems, perform RF Local Loopback on the off-line radio. Figure 2-13 shows the RF loopback circuit setup.

Microwave Networks


6.3.1 Initiating the RF Local Loopback

Perform the following procedure from the Main menu to initiate RF Local Loopback:


2. Set the desired TXU and its adjacent RXU online.

3. Connect the OFFLINE TX MON output from the desired TXU to the RF IN port on its adjacent RXU by using two 20 dB pads and a low-loss coaxial cable.

4. Connect the LPBK LO OUT from the desired TXU to LPBK LO IN port on its adjacent RXU.

5. Flip the RF Loopback switch to the ON position on the RXU being tested.

6. Select Reset Statistics (006) and press <Enter>.

7. Press <Enter> to clear performance counters on radio A, radio B, or both sides.

8. Select number 4, Performance Monitoring, then press <Enter>.

The performance counters should record no errors on the radio under loopback test. The AGC and RSL levels are not accurate when performing loopback testing. Adjustments SHOULD NOT be made based upon these levels.

Note: Items 1, 2, and 3 are not required on a non-protected radio

Figure 2-13. RF Loopback Circuit Setup

.

2(

3

45

3

.

2

.

.

.

65

3.

#$%1

#$78.

$78.

((

((

#$7

. .



6.4 IF Local Loopback

Note: IF Loopback is not supported in 3DS3, SONET/SDH, and 100BaseT radios.

In the IF Local Loopback, the MOD is connected to the DEMOD. As Figure 2-14 shows, a signal is input on the local radio and looped back to be output from the local radio. This aids in determining whether a problem is in the RF section or the SP section of the radio. The A and B radio loopbacks are independent.

Note: The IF Local loopback affects all data and WTU /SCU traffic on the selected radio.

IF Local Loopback can be performed on the on-line radio, off-line radio, or both radios at once. If performed on the off-line radio, the on-line radio can still carry live traffic without interruption.

To establish IF Local Loopback, use an external 50 ohm cable (P/N 3085397H01), and connect it between the Mod and Demod MCX connectors.

Microwave Networks


TX

A

RX

A

RX

B

Ant

enna

Por

t

TX

B

LO LO

RF

-TX

On-

line

Con

trol

RF

Dis

tF

ilterR

F D

ist

Filt

er

SY

NT

HE

SIZ

ER

SY

NT

HE

SIZ

ER

SC

U A

Tx

Rx

SY

ND

ES

A

SY

ND

ES

B

SC

U B

Rx

Tx

MU

X A

MU

X B

DS

1/D

S3

Ser

vice

Cha

nnel

sR

x

Tx

Rx

Tx

Rx

Tx

MO

D B

DE

MO

DB

MO

D A

DE

MO

DA

Rx

Tx

F-1

246

WT

U A

Tx

Rx

WT

U B

Tx

Rx

DAT

A C

H

WT

U L

ocal

Loop

back

WT

U R

emot

eLo

opba

ck

SC

U R

emot

eLo

opba

ck

MU

X L

ocal

Loop

back

IF L

ocal

Loop

back

IF L

ocal

Loop

back

SY

ND

ES

Rem

ote

Loop

back

SC

U R

emot

eLo

opba

ck

WT

U R

emot

eLo

opba

ckW

TU

Loc

alLo

opba

ck

SC

U L

ocal

Loop

back

SY

ND

ES

Loc

alLo

opba

ck

MU

X L

ocal

Loop

back

SY

ND

ES

Rem

ote

Loop

back

SY

ND

ES

Loc

alLo

opba

ck

SC

U L

ocal

Loop

back

RF

Loc

alLo

opba

ck

DS

1/D

S3/

OC

-3

Figu

re 2

-14.

R

F L

oop

bac

k C

ircu

it S

etu

p



6.5 MUX Local Loopback

In the MUX Local Loopback , the transmit and receive sides of the MUX are connected together. See Figure 2-14. A signal, input on the local radio, goes to the Transmit side of the MUX. It then loops back through the receive side of the MUX to the output of the local radio. This determines whether a problem occurs within or after the MUX/SYNDES section.

The MUX Local Loopback can be performed on the on-line radio, off-line radio, or both radios at once. If it is performed on the off-line radio, the on-line radio still carries live traffic without interruption.

To initiate the MUX Local Loopback, perform the following procedure from the Loopback menu.

1. Select MUX Local Loopback (083) and press <Enter>.

2. Select whether you want to the A radio or the B radio, and press <Enter>.

6.6 SYNDES Loopback

6.6.1 Local Loopback

The SYNDES local loopback identifies wiring problems between the SYNDES and the customer cross-connect point. In SYNDES local loopback (Figure 2-14), the transmit and receive sides of the SYNDES connect. A 155.52-Mbit signal is input on the local radio and sent to the SYNDES transmit side.

The SYNDES local loopback can be performed on the on-line radio, but any tributary you loopback will disrupt traffic normally carried on that channel.

To initiate the SYNDES local loopback, perform the following procedure from the loopback menu, screen (081).

1. Select SYNDES Loopbacks (084) and press <Enter>.

2. Select Local online, and press <Enter>.

3. Select the tributary you want to loop and press <Enter>.

6.7 Remote Loopback

In SYNDES remote loopback, the receive and transmit sides of the remote SYNDES are connected together. As shown in Figure 2-14, a signal from the local radio access panel and sent through the microwave link to the receive side of the remote SYNDES. It then loops back through the transmit side of the remote SYNDES, back through the microwave link, to be output from the local radio. Remote loopback adds the ability to check the far-end and local radio RF sections for problems.

It is important to note that when a remote loopback is requested, the loopback is performed on the far end radio and not the radio from which the request was initiated. In a remote loopback, the far end traffic is looped back toward the local radio.

To initiate the SYNDES remote loopback, perform the following procedure from the loopback screen (081).

1. Select SYNDES Loopbacks (084) and press <Enter>.

2. Select Remote and press <Enter>.

Microwave Networks


3. Select the tributary you want to loop, or enter 99 for all tributaries, and press <Enter>.

6.8 Service Channel Unit Loopback


In the SCU Local Loopback, the transmit and receive sides of the SCU are connected together. As shown in Figure 2-14, a signal is input on the local radio and sent to the transmit side of the SCU. It is then looped back through the receive side of the SCU to be output of the local radio. This aids in identifying problems with wiring between the SCU and external equipment. The A and B radio loopbacks are independent.

The SCU Local Loopback can be performed on the on-line radio, off-line radio, or both radios at once. To initiate the SCU Local Loopback, perform the following procedure from the Loopback screen menu.

1. Select SCU Loopbacks (085) and press <Enter>.

2. Select Local Side A or Local Side B and press <Enter>.

Note: The MUX must be installed in the SP shelf to perform the Local Loopback.

6.8.2 Remote Loopback

In the SCU Remote Loopback, the transmit and receive sides of the SCU are connected together. As shown in Figure 2-14, a signal is input on the local radio and sent to the receive side of the remote SCU. It then loops back through the tansmit side of the remote SCU to be output from the local radio. This enables you to test far end and local radio SCU, MUX, MOD, DEMOD, and RF sections for problems without interrupting data tributaries.

Note: When a remote loopback is performed, be sure that the radio to be is on-line. The remote SCU’s Tx and Rx path must not be crossed when performing an SCU remote loop-back. The VF receive output signal is about 3 dB higher than the through path loss.

It is important to note that when a remote loopback is requested, the loopback is performed on the far end radio and not the radio from which the request was initiated. In a remote loopback the far end traffic is looped back toward the local radio.

To initiate the SCU Remote Loopback, perform the following procedure from the Loopback screen menu.

1. Select SCU Loopbacks (085) and press <Enter>.

2. Select Remote Loopback, Digital or Analog, and press <Enter>.

6.9 WTU Loopback


In WTU Local Loopback, the transmit and receive sides of the WTU are connected together. As shown in Figure 2-14, a signal is input on the local radio and sent to the Transmit side of the WTU. It is then looped back through the Receive side of the WTU to be output from the local radio. This aids in identifying problems with wiring between the WTU and external equipment.



WTU Local Loopback can be performed on the on-line radio, off-line radio, or both radios at once. To initiate WTU Local Loopback, perform the following procedure from the Loopback screen menu.

1. Select WTU Loopbacks (086) and press <Enter>.

2. Move the cursor to Local Side A or Local Side B.

3. Choose whether you want to:

a. turn the loopback off

b. set the local loopback on the DS1 Channel

c. Set the local loopback on the Data channel

4. Press <Enter>.

6.9.2 Remote Loopback

In WTU Remote Loopback, transmit and receive sides of the WTU are connected together. As shown in Figure 2-14, a signal is input on the local radio and sent to the Receive side of the remote WTU. It is then looped back through the Transmit side of the remote WTU to be output from the local radio. This provides the ability to far-end WTU for problems.

Note: The remote WTU Tx and Rx path must not be crossed when performing a WTU re-mote loopback.

Important: When a remote loopback is requested, the loopback is performed on the far-end radio, and the far end traffic is looped back toward the local radio.

To initiate the WTU Local Loopback, perform the following procedure from the Main menu.


2. Select Loopback/Monitoring (081) and press <Enter>.

3. Select WTU Loopbacks (086) and press <Enter>.

4. Move the cursor to Remote Loopback.

5. Choose whether you want to:

a. turn the loopback off

b. set the remote loopback on the DS1 channel

c. set the remote loopback on the 9600-baud data channel

6. Press <Enter>.

Microwave Networks


7.0 Automatic Power ControlAutomatic Power Control (APC) is used in the CM7/8 radio to minimize power consumption, maximize equipment reliability, ease coordination of the product into areas with other similar equipment, provide protection against fades, and continue to deliver high overall, on-demand system gain.

For example, the SONET radio normally operates at +13 dBm power output, but in cases of severe fade the radio automatically adjusts to +23 dBm. In a CM7/8 radio with Automatic Power Control, the transmit power is held 10 dB lower than maximum for the majority of the time.

During a fade, however, the transmitter can increase its output power by 10 dB with the DHP option (Page 2-2), to reduce the effects of that fade. Holding the transmitter power lower allows the power amplifiers to run cooler and, therefore, extend their lives. It also reduces the input power consumption and eases frequency coordination. The latter is due to the fact that the CM7/8 “APC low” transmitter power is used for interference analysis while the “APC high” transmitter power is used for path calculation of reliability. Note that the DHP option operates only in the APC high mode.

In the CM7/8 SONET radio, APC is normally automatic and requires no user intervention. The two criteria used to determine when to set APC high are BER performance and RSL. The BER must be worse than 10-11 and the RSL must be within 15 dB of the specified threshold before APC turns on. This prevents APC from coming on due to module failures or selective fading. APC stays on as long as the fade exists. APC goes low when the fade condition stops.

The APC function can be enabled and disabled with the APC Option switch (Switch 3, Rocker 8) on the Alarm and Control Unit (ACU).

7.1 Manually Activating the Automatic Power Control for Loopback

If you wish to manually activate the APC, in order to check radio or path performance, follow these steps from the Main menu:


2. Select APC (087) and press <Enter>.

3. Select manual APC and set time from 1 - 15 minutes.

4. After time-out of when finished tests, return APC to AUTO mode.

You can force the APC to be turned on for an indefinite period. This can be done in one of two ways:

From the Main menu (002):



3. Select Manual APC and set for “99 = Forever.”



Using the above method will result in APC always being turned on until you choose to turn it either off or back to the Auto Mode, via Screen 87. However if the radio or ACU power is cycled, the APC will default back to the Auto Mode and the transmitter power will decrease by 10 dB. To avoid this, set the radio to APC always ON, even after a power cycle or ACU reset. To set APC always on:

1. Verify on the ACU that switch 3-rocker 8 is set to the closed position (APC option enabled.)

2. On the ACU, set switch 2-rocker 7 to the open position (Enable APC Manual ON at power up.)

Note: Setting the APC to “Manual ON” or “Manual OFF,” (as is done in all of the above steps) causes the “Manual” status LED on the Access Panel to light.


1.0 IntroductionRadio modules and their part numbers are listed in Table 3-A. The table also lists the section in this chapter that describes each module.

Table 3-A. CM7/8 SONET/SDH Modules

Section # Module Part Number

3-1 Radio Cabinet MHN6126

Access Panel, optical & electrical 28DS1/3DS3,/155-Mbit

MGN8112

Access Panel, optical only 8209190-00

Access Panel, optical, SNMP option 8209296-00

Access Panel, electrical, SNMP option 8209296-01

SP Backplane 0185509F06

RF Backplane 0185520K02

Equipment Rack 8209119-xx

Accessory Kit MLN7730

3-2 RF Distribution See Section 3-2

3-3 Transmitter Unit (TXU), Std. Pwr. MTL850x (7GHz)MTL853x (8GHz)

Transmitter Unit (TXU), High Pwr. MTL851x (7GHz)MTL854x (8GHz)

Transmitter Unit (TXN), DHP Pwr. MTL852x (7GHz)MTL855x (8GHz)

3-4 Receiver Unit (RXU), Band 7-1 MRL8166

Receiver Unit (RXU), Band 7-2 MRL8167







3-5 Radio Frequency Power Supply Unit (RF PSU) MPN8187

3-6 Signal Processing Power Supply Unit (SP PSU) MPN6050

3-7 Alarm and Control Unit (ACU) MLN7195

ACU Software MVN4025

3-8 Modulator (MOD) 8000514-00

3-9 Demodulator (DEMOD) 8000515-00

Chapter 3Module Descriptions

Chapter 3 Module Descriptions


Each section divides into three subsections:

1. General Information describes the module's purpose and its application in the radio, as well as any optional versions of the module.

2. Description of Function contains a block diagram and description of the module's operation.

3. Front Panel Functions illustrates and describes all front panel functions related to that module which can be controlled by the user, including jumper and switch locations and settings.

Note: The first drawing in each section is representative and does not contain all of the module components.

3-10 Multiplexer (MUX) – DS1 WTU Operation 8000513-00

Multiplexer (MUX) – E1 WTU Operation 8000513-01

3-11 Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES): Optical Multi-mode (MM) Operation

8000516-01

Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES):Electrical Operation

8000516-02

Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES): Enables Optical Single-mode (SM) Operation

8000516-03

Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES) Optical Multi-mode (MM) Dual Output

8000516-04

Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES) Optical Single-mode (SM) Dual Output

8000516-05

3-12 Service Channel Unit (SCU) Optional MLN7876

3-13 Orderwire Unit (OWU) Optional MLN7201

3-14 Wayside Traffic Unit (WTU): Optional, Enables DS1 Operation

MLN7330

Wayside Traffic Unit (WTU): Optional, Enables E1 Operation

MLN7329

3-15 Network Management Unit (NMU) Optional MLN1532

Table 3-A. CM7/8 SONET/SDH Modules (Continued)

Section # Module Part Number

CM SONET/SDH 2/27/04 Page 3-1-1

1.0 Introduction

The CM 155-Mbps digital microwave radio cabinet includes the access panel, RF distribution, signal processing (SP), and radio frequency (RF) sections.

2.0 Access PanelThe access panel is located at the top of the radio cabinet. The panel contains:

• operator controls

• alarm indicators

• office battery power distribution with four fuses

• Sub-D connectors for the local access port

• Connector panels for 155 Mbps data (optical and electrical)

• RJ11 jacks for service channels, orderwire, wayside traffic, and status/control extender

• Sub-D connectors for customer interface

Table 3-1-A. lists the Access Panel part numbers.

See Figure 3-1-1 to Figure 3-1-4 for the location of terminal blocks and other interface connectors.

Table 3-1-A. CM SONET\SDH Access Panels

Part Number Capacity Version

8209302-00 28DS1, 3DS3, 100BaseT,OC3/STM (155 Mbps)

NMS interface is included with optional NMU. Optical or 100BaseT Ethernet interfaces are installed as purchased.

MGN8112B 28xDS1,1-3DS3, 155 Mbps Optical Wayside on TELCO connectors,TTL and Relay I/O on DB connectors.

8209120-00 155-Mbps Optical/Electrical8209296-00 155 Mbps Optical SNMP option8209296-01 155 Mbps Electrical SNMP option

Section 3-1Radio Cabinet

Chapter 3 Radio Cabinet

Page 3-1-2 2/27/04 CM SONET/SDH

Figure 3-1-1 8209309-00 – Universal Access Panel for 28DS1, 3DS3, 100BaseT and SONET\SDH

Microwave Networks


Figure 3-1-2 MGN8112 Early-Model Access Panel for 28xDS1, 3xDS3 and SONET/SDH

Figure 3-1-3 8209120-00 – Access Panel for SONET/SDH Optical & Electrical



2.1 Principles of Operation

The access panel provides front access to indicators, controls, connections, and fuses required to operate the radio. The fuses, Figure 3-1-5, protect the radio against power surge.

The access panel also has a Local Access Port that interfaces the radio to a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT). The LMT displays system status and alarms, and accepts commands for control and configuration of the radio and individual modules. The Local Access Port also provides access, through the LMT, to an event log and up to 7-days of performance statistics. Statistics include Bit Error Rate (BER), Errored Seconds (ES), and severely Errored Seconds (SES).

Figure 3-1-4 8209296-00 – Access Panel for SONET/SDH Optical & Electrical and SNMP NMS

Battery A

Battery B

Power Distribution

RF A

SP A

RFB

SP B

P9

TB1 TB1

RFA

SPA

RFB

SPB

0780-0494

Figure 3-1-5 Power Distribution Diagram

Microwave Networks


2.2 Access Panel Features

Figure 3-1-6 shows the radio indicators, controls, and test points that the text below describes. See Chapter 4, Installation, for connector pin designations and Appendix G for SNMP connection.

INOUTHANDSET WTU LOCAL ACCESS

STATUS

20 - 28

11 - 19

+CH 25-28

WAYSIDE

CH 13-24

CH 1-12

28 DS1 I/O

MANUAL

INOUTOC-3 3DS3/SONET SYNDES

DS3 CH1 DS3 CH2 DS3 CH3

SYNDES

ACO

SONETSONET

MON OUT IN

SONET

AA

14V248V

NORMAL

05

ARF

TTL I/O

ALARM/CONTROL RELAYS

MINOR

FAILSECTION

DTE DCE

A53A

MAJOR

A5A3

AA5

10

RFAPS BSPB

4V284 V

NETWORK

251

26

26

1

1

J23 50

25

J22 50

25

26 J21 50

EASTWEST

16

5

9

25

15

13

8

14

9

1

1OUT

IN

1 32

VF 1

VF 2

SPKRDGTL CH2

1 32 SCEDGTL CH1

HANDSET WTU LOCAL ACCESS

STATUS

20 - 28

11 - 19

MANUAL

OUT3DS3/SONET SYNDES

DS3 CH1

SYNDES

ACO

SONETSONET

MON OUT IN

SONET

AA

14V248V

NORMAL

05

ARF

TTL I/O


MINOR

FAILSECTION

DTE DCE

A53A

MAJOR

A5A3

AA5

10

RFAPS BSPB

4V284 V

NETWORK

EASTWEST

16

5

9

25

15

13

8

14

9

1

1OUT

IN

1 32

VF 1

VF 2

SPKRDGTL CH2

1 32 SCEDGTL CH1

MLN8112B

8209120

INOUT

INOC-3

DS3 CH2 DS3 CH3

8209296

8

15

1

9

113

1425

all modules installed

3 5 8 9

12131415

18

19

1 2 4 6 7

1017

without modules installed

16 11

18

8209309-00

251

26 50

251

26 50

251

26 50

251

26 50

251

26 50

251

26 50

Figure 3-1-6 Access Panel Features



The 8209302-00 access panel is the latest model for universal use on DS1, DS3, SONET, and 100BaseT radios. The factory installs an NMS interface with the optional Network Management Unit (NMU). OC-3 and 100BaseT Ethernet interfaces get installed to match radio capacity. The following are the interface kits for the access panel. The accessory kit includes cable, hardware, and assembly instructions. P4 NMU Kit8708191-01

• SNMP NMU Kit 8708262-01• 100BaseT Kit, Non-Protected 8708262-02• 100BaseT Kit, Protected 8708262-03• Access Panel Accessory Kit 8708220-xx

Table 3-1-B. lists configuration switch settings for the 8209302-00 access panel. Table 3-1-C. list configuration switch settings for the early-model MGN8112.

1. DS1 Connectors – J21, J22, & J23. 50-pin TELCO connectors for 100-Ω balanced DS1 line signals. J23 Includes wayside channel connections for the optional WTU. Jumpers on the Line I/O board behind the access panel route the out-of-band wayside for use on data channel 1 I/O pins (Chapter 4). This is not available on the 155-Mbps electrical access panel.s.

2. DS3 and SONET Electrical Connectors – 50-Ω BNC connectors for DS3 or 155-Mbps data I/O. Jumpers on the rear of the access panel set DS3 configuration.

8209120 & 8209296 – SONET electrical signals enter and leave the top-row connectors as labeled. Bottom-row connectors remain unused.

3. Network Ports – For P4 (MNI proprietary) Network: Two modular jacks that connect propri-etary network management data between co-located radios and to Telescan network manage-ment system. Uni- or omni-directional configuration requires an associated Network Management Unit (NMU) and the configuration of the Network Bridge Interface.

Network Ports – For SNMP: Two modular jacks connect radio support data to an Ethernet net-work. The LINK indicator lights when the radio is connected to an Ethernet network. The blink-ing ACTY, activity, indicator shows data transfer. For more SNMP network information, see Appendix G.

4. LED Indicators

Jumpers E3, E4, E5, E61-2 Wayside Channel2-3 DS1 CHNL 1 (for 4, 8, 12DS1 configurations)

Jumpers E1 & E2

1-2 for 1DS3 2-3 for 3DS3

East West Port Configuration

E4 (in) E10 (in) ACU/NMU—Master/SlaveE5 E12 East/West—Omni-directional

MAJ LED Red LED indicates a service-affecting alarm. MIN LED Yellow LED indicates a non-service-affecting alarm.SECTION FAIL Red LED indicates an upstream or downstream major alarm.

Microwave Networks


5. Fuses – Four telecommunications type fuses (GMT) for A Radio RF, A Radio SP, B Radio RF, B Radio SP.

6. VF Connectors – VF1, VF2. Each VF channel has three four-position, four-pin modular jacks used for orderwire VF bridge connections.

7. DGTL CHn Jack – DGTL CH1, CH2. Four-position, four-pin modular jack used for digital channel connections. These channels accommodate 150 bps to 19.2 kbps asynchronous data at RS232 levels. Set data rates with jumpers on the SCU.

8. SCE Jack – Four-position, four-pin modular jack used for Status and Control Extender (SCE) connections. The SCE extends the Alarm/Control relays to provide system alarm, status, and performance information to, and controls from third-party remote alarm monitoring equipment. See the SCE Operation Manual, order P/N 6885104E05.

9. TTL I/O – DB15 for TTL input and output to the NMU.

10. ALARM/CONTROL RELAY - DB25 connector provides system alarm, status, and perfor-mance information to, and controls from third-party remote alarm monitoring equipment.

11. SPKR Jack – Four-position, four-pin modular jack used for external speaker connections.

12. DTE/DCE Switch – Place in DCE, Local Access port connects to a DCE with a 1-to-1 cable. Place in DTE, Local Access port connects to a DTE with a 1-to-1 cable.

13. LOCAL ACCESS Port – DB9 connector for cable interface with the Local Maintenance Ter-minal (LMT), a VT100/VT220 or compatible terminal, or computer for local access of radio control and monitoring.

14. WTU Jack – WTU Channel 1 connector.

15. HANDSET Jack – Four-position, four-pin modular telephone jack for the orderwire handset provided with the optional OWU.

16. SYNDES Connectors – SYNDES connections on 28xDS1 radios.

17. SYNDES Connector – SYNDES connections on 3xDS3 and SONET/SDH electrical radios.

18. OC-3 In/Out Connectors - SC type duplex connections for 155-Mbit optical data.

19. LAN A/B Connectors–RJ45 jacks for up-link (MDI) and down-link (MDI-X) Ethernet connec-tion

ACO (Alarm Cut Off) Switch and LED

Switch turns audible major and minor alarm relays (and optionally, the visual major and minor alarm relays) off. Green LED lights when ACO activates.

MANUAL LED Yellow LED indicates a protection switch not in AUTO. LED blinks at one-second intervals during active loopbacks.

NORM LED Green LED indicates normal radio operation.

Supply Power A Side B Side48V 5 Amp 3 Amp24V 10 Amp 5 Amp

MAJ LED Red LED indicates a service-affecting alarm.



Table 3-1-B. 8209302-00 Configuration Switch Settings

SWITCH 1DS3 3DS3 28DS1100BaseT

+ 1DS3SONET

ElectricalSONETOptical

S3-1 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS3-2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS3-3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS3-4 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS3-5 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS3-6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS3-7 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS3-8 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS4-1 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS4-2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS4-3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS4-4 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS4-5 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFFS4-6 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFFS4-7 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFFS4-8 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS5-1 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS5-2 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS5-3 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS5-4 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS5-5 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFFS5-6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS6 P1 P2 P2 P1 P2 P2

Microwave Networks


Table 3-1-C. MGN8112 Access Panel Switch Settings

Rocker Setting Function Enabled Rocker Setting Function Enabled

DS1 Line (rear of the access panel)

1 On DS1 line 1 unequipped 15 On DS1 line 15 unequippedOff DS1 line 1 equipped Off DS1 line 15 equipped














Network Bridge Interface Jumpers

West East Port Configuration West East Port ConfigurationE4 (in) E10 (in) ACU/NMU—Master/Slave E5 E12 East/West—Omni-direc-

tional

See Appendix G for SNMP network management.



3.0 SP Shelf BackplaneThe SP Backplane is the interface between the SP modules. Each module plugs directly into the SP Backplane.

3.1 Jumpers

The SP Backplane contains 11 jumpers that determine capacity configuration for the radio. Only two jumpers are needed to configure the radio for desired capacity. Jumper E1 is always installed. The second jumper needs to be installed according to the radio capacity.

For example, if a 4 DS1 terminal configuration is desired, set the jumpers as follows:

E1 strapped to enable terminal operation.E7 strapped to enable 28xDS1 operation.

These jumpers are manipulated from the front of the SP Backplane. Front presentation of these jumpers ensures that configurations can be changed without requiring rear access to an installed radio. Refer to Figure 3-1-5 for jumper locations.

To access the jumpers, remove the A PSU from the SP section of the shelf. Reaching through the front of the shelf, set each jumper as either strapped or unstrapped, according to Table 3-1-C.

Table 3-1-D. SP Backplane Jumper Settings

Jumper Setting Function Enabled

E1 Strapped Enables Terminal operation

E2 Not used

E3 Not used

Figure 3-1-7. SP Backplane Jumper Locations (as viewed through the chassis)

E4E5E6E7E8E9

E10E17

E1E2E3J1

J2 J3

J4

J6

J5

J7

J8

J10 J12 J14 J16

J9J11 J13

J15

J17J18

J19

J20J21

J22

J23

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

F-0699a

Microwave Networks


4.0 RF Shelf BackplaneThe RF Backplane is the interface between the Transmitter Units, Receiver Units, and RF Power Supply Units. Each of these modules plugs directly into the RF Backplane. Figure 3-1-6 illustrates connector placement on the RF Backplane.

E4 Strapped* Enables 4 DS1/4DS1N operation

E5 Strapped* Enables 8 DS1 operation

E6 Strapped* Enables 12 DS1/8DS1N operation

E7 Strapped* Enables 28DS1/1DS3/3DS3/SONET operation

E8 Not used

E9 Not used

E10 Not used

E17 Not used

*Select only one jumper according to desired channel capacity.

Table 3-1-D. SP Backplane Jumper Settings (Continued)


TXU A

J6

RXU A

J5

RF PSU A

J4 J3

RXU B

J2

TXU B

J1

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

F-1238

. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .

RF PSU B

Figure 3-1-8 RF Shelf Backplane (viewed through chassis from front of the cabinet)



5.0 Equipment RackThe standard radio rack (2 meter) can accommodate two protected radios.

5.1 Installing Auxiliary Equipment in the Rack

Auxiliary equipment should be installed two-rack units below the radio cabinet to allow ease of cable routing and to provide sufficient thermal air flow from the radio. For dual- protected radio configurations two rack units are required between the radio cabinets.

If you wish to add a trim fuse pad to the rack, install it 1 rack unit above the radio cabinet.

Note: The only auxiliary equipment mounted above the rack is a trim fuse panel, which is mounted 1 rack unit above the radio cabinet.

6.0 Installation KitsTable 3-1-D lists the contents of the installation kit packed with the radio.

Table 3-1-E. MLN7730 Accessory Kit

Item Quantity

Spare GMT fuse, 3 Amp 2



Tuning tool 1

5/16 wrench 1

Wrist strap - static control 1

BNC Cable assembly 1

CM7/8 System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 3-2-1

1.0 General InformationRF Distribution components of the CM7/8 radio are the transmit filter, receive filter(s), and a waveguide branching network.

The transmit filter and receive filter(s) use a five-cavity waveguide filter design. Each TXU and RXU connect to these waveguide filters through semi-rigid coaxial cables. The transmit and receive bandpass filters are center-tuned to customer-specific frequencies. Configuration options are determined by the waveguide branching network. Configuration options are:

• Transmit Hot Standby, Receive Hot Standby (HH)

• Transmit Hot Standby, Receive Space Diversity (HS)

• Transmit Non-protected, Space Diversity (NS)

• Transmit Frequency Diversity, Receive Frequency Diversity (FF)

• Transmit Non-protected, Receive Non-protected (NN)

Table 3-2-A lists available frequency bands of the transmit and receive bandpass waveguide filters.

Table 3-2-B lists available versions of the branching network.

Table 3-2-A. Transmit and Receive Bandpass Filter Options

Frequency Band (MHz) Transmit Filter Part Number Receive Filter Part Number

HH/HS NN/FF/NS HH NN/HS/FF/NS

7100 - 7450 MFL8201 MFL8191 MFL8221 MFL8211

7450 - 7800 MFL8202 MFL8192 MFL8222 MFL8212

7800 - 8150 MFL8203 MFL8193 MFL8223 MFL8213

8150 - 8500 MFL8204 MFL8194 MFL8224 MFL8214

Table 3-2-B. Waveguide Branching Network Options

Part Number Version

MLL8177A Transmit Hot Standby, Receive Hot Standby (HH)

MLL8178A Transmit Hot Standby, Receive Space Diversity (HS)

Transmit Non-protected, Receive Space Diversity (NS)

MLL8180A Transmit Frequency Diversity, Receive Frequency Diversity (FF)

MLL8179A Transmit Non-protected, Receive Non-protected (NN)

Section 3-2RF Distribution

Chapter 3 RF Distribution

Page 3-2-2 8/5/03 CM7/8 System User’s Manual

2.0 Description of FunctionFor each configuration (HH, HS, NS, FF, NN), the RF Distribution routes signals differently.

Figure 3-2-1 shows a functional block diagram of the RF Distribution for the Hot Standby Transmitter and Hot Standby Receiver (HH) configuration. The RF Distribution routes signals from the transmitters in the RF section to the common antenna connection, and from the common antenna connection to the receivers in the RF section. A circulator connects both portions to a common antenna.

See Figures 3-2-2 through 3-2-5 for signal flow in the other configuration options..

Figure 3-2-2 shows a functional block diagram of the RF Distribution for the Hot Standby Transmitter and Space Diversity Receiver (HS) configuration.

Figure 3-2-3 shows a functional block diagram of the RF Distribution for the Non-protected Trans-mitter and Space Diversity Receiver (NS) configuration.

Figure 3-2-4 shows a functional block diagram of the RF Distribution for the Frequency Diversity Transmitter and Frequency Diversity Receiver (FF) configuration.

Figure 3-2-5 shows a functional block diagram of the RF Distribution for the Non-protected Transmitter and Non-protected Receiver (NN) configuration

TX A

RX A

F-1135

To / FromAntenna

TX B

RX B

ON-LINE MON

Figure 3-2-1. RF Distribution Block; TX/RX Hot Standby (HH)

Microwave Networks


Figure 3-2-2. RF Distribution Block; TX Hot Standby, RX Space Diversity (HS)

TX A

RX A

F-1134B

From Space DiversAntenna

To / FromAntenna

RX B

ON-LINE MON

TX A

RX A

F-1134B

From Space DiversAntenna

To / FromAntenna

RX B

ON-LINE MON

Figure 3-2-3. RF Distribution Block; TX Non-Protected, RX Space Diversity (NS)



TX A MON

TX A

TX B MON

TX B

RX A MON

RX A

RX B MON

RX B

To/FromAntenna

Figure 3-2-4. RF Distribution Block; TX/RX Frequency Diversity (FF)

Figure 3-2-5. RF Distribution Block; TX/RX Non-protected (NN)

TX A MON

TX A

RX B MON

RX B

To/FromAntenna

Microwave Networks


2.1 Transmit Section

For all configurations, the output from the Transmitter Unit (TXU) is fed through a coaxial cable directly into the transmit filter.

2.2 Receive Section

For all configurations, the receive signal is sent directly from the receive filter through a coaxial cable to the Receiver Unit (RXU).



3.0 User OperationFor troubleshooting and monitoring purposes, you should be aware of the RF Distribution’s front panel functions and wiring and cable connections.

3.1 Front Panel Functions (HH)

Refer to Figure 3-2-6 for the locations of the following components for the Hot Standby/Hot Standby version of the branching network.

1. RF IN - Transmit filter input port that feeds the signal from Transmitter Unit A (TXU A) to the branching network.

2. On-line MON-coupled transmit signal sets the online transmitter power level.

3. RF IN - Transmit filter input port that feeds the signal from Transmitter Unit B (TXU B) to the branching network.

4. RF OUT - Receive filter output port which sends the signal to Receiver Unit A (RXU A).

5. RF OUT - Receive filter output port which sends the signal to Receiver Unit B (RXU B) This signal is 10 dB lower than the signal sent to RXU A.

dB

ON LINE

MON

RXTX dB

ON LINE

MON

RXTX

Figure 3-2-6. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (HH)

RFIN

31

2

4 5

RFOUT

RFIN

RFOUT

Microwave Networks


3.2 Front Panel Functions (HS)

Refer to Figure 3-2-7 for the locations of the following components for the Hot Standby/Space Diversity version of the branching network.




4. RF OUT - Receive filter output port which sends the signal to Receiver Unit B (RXU B).

5. On-line MON-coupled transmit signal used to set the online transmitter power level.

Figure 3-2-7. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (HS)

5

3 4

1 2



3.3 Front Panel Functions (NS)






Figure 3-2-8. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (NS)

TX

RF OUT RF INRF IN

RX RX

1

4 2 3

Microwave Networks


3.4 Front Panel Functions (FF)








4 6

21

5 3

Figure 3-2-9. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (FF)



3.5 Front Panel Functions (NN)

Refer to Figure 3-2-10 for the locations of the following components for the Non-protected/Non-protected version of the branching network.


2. On-line MON-coupled transmit signal used to set the online transmitter power level.

3. RF OUT- Receive filter output port which sends the signal to Receiver Unit A (RXU A).

Figure 3-2-10. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (NN)

32

1

CM7/8 System Users Manual Page 3-3-1

1.0 Physical DescriptionThe Transmitter Unit (TXU) receives an IF signal and converts it to a regulated RF signal at the Tx frequency. The Transmitter Unit resides in the RF shelf of the radio. Figure 3-3-1 shows the TXU. Table 3-3-A lists the TXU part numbers. The “x” in the TXU part number varies with the Tx/Rx spacing option as set by the TX IF BPF/LO board. See Table 3-3-B.

Table 3-3-A. TXU Part Numbers

Part Number Output Power Tx Frequency (GHz)

CM7 CM8 CM7 CM8MTL850x MTL853x Standard 7.1 to 7.9 7.7 to 8.5MTL851x MTL854x High 7.1 to 7.9 7.7 to 8.5MTL852x MTL855x DHP 7.1 to 7.9 7.7 to 8.5

Table 3-3-B. Tx/Rx Spacing OptionsX in TXU P/N T/R Spacing (MHz)

0 119, 1261 150, 151.614, 154,160,1612 175, 1823 1964 2455 300

Figure 3-3-1. Transmitter Unit

Section 3-3Transmitter Unit (TXU)

Chapter 3 Transmitter Unit

Page 3-3-2 CM7/8 System Users Manual

2.0 Functional Description The Transmitter unit accepts the modulated 70 MHz signal from the Modulator, prepares the signal for transmission, and delivers it for RF Distribution. While moving through the Transmitter, the signal goes through a conversion process performed by the first on-board local oscillator and RXU frequency synthesizer, then the second local oscillator. The resultant RF signal is further amplified and sent to the output.

Figure 3-3-2 shows a functional block diagram of the Transmitter Unit.

3.0 Front Panel FunctionsRefer to Figure 3-3-3 for the locations of the following indicators, controls, and test points:

1. RF OUT Connector - Sends the regulated signal to the RF Distribution Tray.

2. TX MON Connector - A switched sample of the regulated signal used for RF local loopback and off-line TXU monitoring.

3. TX LO IN Connector - Receives the LO signal from the synthesizer on the adjacent RXU.

4. TX ALM - Red LED that indicates the TXU is in alarm. This LED is controlled by the ACU.

5. TX PWR ADJ - Potentiometer that adjusts the TXU power level.

F-1137

To Switch

TX Alarm

RF OUT

MUX Out

BPF

TX Power Adjust

Switch Confirm

APC

IF In

IF Loopback LO

LO Input from RXU

PLL AlarmSwitch Control

+12.3 VDC

-6 VDCGround

TX Alarm Control

+11 VDC REG

+5 VDC REG

-5 VDC REG

Pre-distorter

BPF

Active BiasActive Bias

APC

MUXTX Power Mon

APC Confirm

TX Power Alarm

TX MON

+ +

+

+

Fan Alarm

PREDISTORTER

Figure 3-3-2. TXU Block Diagram


Microwave Networks

6. IF IN Connector - Receives 70 MHz IF signal from the MOD.

7. LPBK LO OUT Connector - Sends the first conversion LO signal to the adjacent RXU for RF local loopback testing. Also used for measuring the first conversion LO frequency.

Figure 3-3-3. Transmitter Unit Front Panel



4.0 Setting TXU Boards

4.1 TXU Alarm/Control Board MLN8146 and MLN8147

The Alarm/Control board used in the standard and high power radio, MLN8146, and the Alarm/Control board (Figure 3-3-4) used in the DHP radio, MLN8147, does not have user-configuration jumpers. The TXU senses the operating band and output power configuration from a circuit in the power amplifier.

Figure 3-3-4. TXU Alarm/Control Board


Microwave Networks

4.2 TX IF BPF/LO Board Jumpers

The IF BPF/LO board has up to three configurable jumpers and two jumpers for factory test. Figure 3-3-5 shows the jumper locations and Table 3-3-C lists the Tx/Rx frequency spacing options, board part numbers, and jumper settings. Settings not listed indicate that the jumper is not on the board.

Jumper E3 is for factory test only. Always set 1 to 2 for normal operation.

Table 3-3-C. TXU IF BPF/LO Board Jumper Settings

T/R Spacing SP/HP DHP E6 E5 E4

119 MHz MLN8175 MLN8175 1-2

126 MHz MLN8175 MLN8175 2-3

150 MHz MLN8110 MLN8110 1-2 1-2 1-2

151.614 MHz MLN8110 MLN8110 1-2 1-2 2-3

154 MHz MLN8110 MLN8110 1-2 2-3 2-3

160 MHz MLN8110 MLN8110 2-3 1-2 1-2

161 MHz MLN8110 MLN8110 2-3 1-2 2-3

168 MHz MLN8108 MLN8209 1-2

175 MHz MLN8108 MLN8208 1-2 1-2

182 MHz MLN8108 MLN8108 2-3 2-3

196 MHz MLN8107 MLN8107 1-2

245 MHz MLN8106 MLN8106 1-2 1-2

266 MHz MLN8106 MLN8206 2-3 2-3

300 MHZ MLN8176 MLN8176 2-3 1-2

305.56 MHz MLN8176 MLN8276 2-3 2-3

311.32 MHz MLN8176 MLN8276 1-2 1-2

IF BPF/LO Board

E5E4 E6

E3

R89

R88

DHPconfiguration

only

Vary withconfiguration

Figure 3-3-5. TX IF BPF/LO Board Jumper Locations


1.0 General InformationThe Receiver Unit (RXU) accepts an input signal at the Rx frequency and converts it to an IF signal. The Receiver Unit resides in the RF shelf of the radio. Figure 3-4-1 shows the RXU. RXU part numbers are listed in Table 3-4-A.

The RXU has two frequency setting switches, S1 and S2. See Appendix E, Frequency Switch Settings, for instructions on how to change the frequency of your system.

Table 3-4-A. RXU Part Numbers

RXU Part Number LO Band Rx LO Frequency (GHz)

SynthesizerPart Number

CM7 CM8 CM7 CM8 CM7 CM8 CM7 CM8

MRL8166 MRL8170 7-1 8-1 7030-7235 7850-8030 MLL8156A MLL8160A

MRL8167 MRL8171 7-2 8-2 7235-7440 8030-8210 MLL8157A MLL8161A

MRL8168 MRL8172 7-3 8-3 7440-7645 8210-8390 MLL8158A MLL8162A

MRL8169 MRL8173 7-4 8-4 7645-7850 8390-8570 MLL8159A MLL8163A

Figure 3-4-1. Receiver Unit (RXU)

F-1243

Section 3-4Receiver Unit (RXU)

Chapter 3 Receiver Unit


2.0 Description of FunctionThe Receiver Unit accepts the received 7/8-GHz RF signal from the RF Distribution filter and delivers a 70-MHz signal to the Demodulator. Internal to the receiver, the signal goes through a pre-amplification stage and a downconversion process that utilizes the on-board frequency synthesizer to provide a local oscillator. The resultant 70-MHz signal is amplified and applied to the Demodulator.

Figure 3-4-2 is a functional block diagram of the Receiver Unit.


1. RF IN Connector - Accepts input signal between -77 dBm and -25 dBm at the Rx frequency.

2. LO FREQ ADJ DIP Switch - Coarse-adjusts the LO frequency. This switch may be used to increase the range of the LO FREQ ADJ capacitor.

3. LO FREQ ADJ Capacitor- Fine-adjusts the LO frequency, and therefore, the receive frequency.

4. IF OUT Connector - Supplies 70-MHz IF signal at -10 dBm.

RF Loopback LO

F-1138

RX Alarm

LO Alarm

MAN

RSL Setpoint 1

RF In

RFLoopback

Switch

LO MON

+12.3 VDC

-6 VDCGround

RX Alarm Control

+11 VDC REG

+5 VDC REG

-5 VDC REG

Linearizer

MUX

234

Active Bias

AGC Alarm

AGC MON

GroundDip Switches

SynthesizedOscillator

PLL Alarm

LO Output for TXURF<LO RF>LO

LO FREQ SET

LOFREQ

ADJ

IF OUTBPF

MUX Out

AGC MON

+ +

+

+

Figure 3-4-2. Receiver Functional Block

Microwave Networks


5. LPBK LO IN Connector - Receives the first conversion LO signal from the adjacent TXU for RF local loopback testing.

6. AGC MON - Test point that measures AGC voltage (RSL).

7. RX ALM - Red LED that indicates the RXU is in alarm. This LED is controlled by the ACU.

8. GND - Ground connection for test points on the RXU.

9. LO MON Connector - Samples the LO signal for frequency checking and status. The level of this signal is typically -5 dBm, and will not exceed +5 dBm. The LO frequency is equal to either the RX frequency minus 70 MHz or the RX frequency plus 70 MHz.

10. TX LO OUT Connector - Sends the LO signal from the synthesizer to the adjacent TXU.

11. RF LPBK Switch - Used to configure the RXU for RF local loopback operation.

F-1162

RF IN

RXU

AGC MON

RF LPBK

LO FREQADJ

LPBK LO IN

IF OUT

RX ALM

GND

LO MON

TX LO OUT

OFF

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

11

9

10

Figure 3-4-3. Front Panel Functions of the RXU

Chapter 3 Receiver Unit


3.1 RXU Control Board MLN7905A Jumpers

The Receiver Unit Control board, located on the left side of the RXU, contains four jumpers. Figure 3-4-4 shows jumper locations. Table 3-4-B lists jumper settings.

Table 3-4-B. RXU Control Board MLN7905A Jumper Settings

Jumper Setting Label Function

E1 1-2 RF<LO2-3 RF>LO

Sideband Option Sets unit for upper or lower sideband. Depends on band-width option.

E2 2-3 AUTO MAN/AUTO Factory test and adjustment.

E3, E4 2-3 1DS1/DS3 (10 MHz)1-2 3DS3 (30 MHz)

Bandwidth Option Sets appropriate channel bandwidth for system capac-ity.

3

3DS3

E3

1

MDS1/DS3

RF>LO

E1

F-1250

AUTO

1

E2

MAN

DS1

S1

LBCK

LBCKLO IN

IF OUT

J4

J3

RF<LO

3

1 3

3

3DS3

E4

1

MDS1/DS3

Figure 3-4-4. Jumper Locations for MLN7905

CM System User’s Manual 02/20/02 Page 3-5-1

1.0 General InformationThe RF Power Supply Unit (RF PSU) mounts in the RF shelf. This section describes the power supply features and operation.

The RF PSU, P/N MPN8187A, is a two output, 156-watt supply that converts battery power into regulated voltages to power the RF units. Figure 3-5-1 shows the power supply. This supply replaced the 125-watt MPN7160.

rfpsu

Figure 3-5-1. RF Power Supply Unit

Section 3-5RF Power Supply Unit (RF PSU)

Chapter 3 RF Power Supply Unit

Page 3-5-2 02/20/02 CM System User’s Manual

2.0 Functional DescriptionEach side of a protected RF shelf (A and B) has its own power supply. The regulated voltages are low in order to minimize power consumption. This single unit can accept either positive or negative primary voltage from -20 to -60 Vdc or +20 to +60 Vdc.

Figure 3-5-2 is a functional block diagram of the RF PSU.

Figure 3-5-2. RF PSU Block Diagram

3

Filter

Filter

8

Filter

Filter

DC/DCConverter

ACUInterface

P. S.Alarm

Input -BAT

-BAT Test Point

Input +BAT

+BAT Test Point

Alarm ControlFrom ACU

MonitoredSignals

ControlSignals

+12.3 VDC

+12.3 VDC Test Point

-6 VDC

-6 VDC Test Point

F-0700-0594

Microwave Networks


3.0 RF PSU Board FeaturesThere are no user configuration jumpers on the RF Power Supply board as Figure 3-5-3 shows. Access the alarm and test points from the front panel. The following text describes these features.

1. ALM LED – Indicates the RF Power Supply is in alarm. ACU controls this red alarm LED.

2. GND Test Point – Ground connection for all test points on the RF PSU

3. +12.3 V Test Point – Voltage test point.

4. -6 V Test Point – Volt-age test point.

5. +BATT – Positive bat-tery test point.

6. -BATT – Negative test point.

Figure 3-5-3. RF Power Supply Board

Chapter 3 RF Power Supply Unit


CM System User’s Manual Page 3-6-1

1.0 General InformationThe Signal Processing Power Supply Unit (SP PSU) converts battery voltage into regulated outputs that supply power to the SP shelf of the radio. The SP PSU, part number MPN6050, is located in the SP shelf of the radio. Figure 3-6-1 shows the SP PSU.

F-0777-0

Figure 3-6-1. SP Power Supply Unit

Section 3-6SP Power Supply Unit (SP PSU)

Chapter 3 SP Power Supply Unit

Page 3-6-2 CM System User’s Manual

2.0 Functional DescriptionEach side of a protected signal processing shelf (A and B) has its own power supply. The regulated voltages are low in order to minimize power consumption. This single unit can accept either positive or negative primary voltage from -20 to -60 Vdc or +20 to +60 Vdc.

Figure 3-6-2 is a functional block diagram of the SP PSU.

3 3

Window Comparator

3

Alarm

GND

+5.4V

-6V

+6V

DC/DCConverter

InputFilter

+BAT In

-BAT In

Out to ACU3

10

ACUInterface& MUX

From ACU

OutputFilter

OutputFilter

OutputFilter

+6V Test Point

-6V Test Point

+5.4V Test Point

GND Test Point

+BAT Test Point

-BAT Test Point

Figure 3-6-2. SP PSU Block Diagram

Microwave Networks


3.0 Front Panel FunctionsNote: In order to achieve proper operation of the power supply, a minimum of 25% maximum load must be applied to each output voltage supply.

Refer to Figure 3-6-3 for the locations of the following indicators, controls, and test points:

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Figure 3-6-3. Front Panel Functions of the SP PSU

1. ALM LED - Red LED that, when lit, indicates the SP Power Supply is in alarm. The alarm may be due to external fuse failure or internal failure. This LED is controlled by the ACU.

2. GND Test Point — Ground point for all testequipment.

3. +5.4 V Test Point — Measuring point for +5.4 V output voltage.

4. +6.0 V Test Point — Measuring point for +6.0 V output voltage.

5. -6.0 V Test Point — Measuring point for -6.0 V output voltage.

6. +BAT — The battery supply voltage; measures between 6 and 7

7. -BAT — see #6 above.

Chapter 3 SP Power Supply Unit



1.0 Physical DescriptionThe Alarm and Control Unit (ACU) supervises the operation of the CM6 radio system. It collects alarm and status information from each module in the system and, based on this input, performs protection switching and initiates alarms, sets, and starts. The ACU maintains an alarm log and statistical history of radio operation. It also interfaces with the Status and Control Extender (SCE), and the Network Management System (NMS). The ACU, part number MLN7195 revision E or later, resides in the SP shelf of the radio. Figure 3-7-1 shows the ACU.

The optional Network Management Unit (NMU) is mounted onto the ACU. See Section 3-15 in this chapter for details on NMU operation.

The ACU software part number is MVN4025. The programmed IC is installed at location U29 on the ACU module.

F-0327-r0494

OptionalNMU

Figure 3-7-1. Alarm and Control Unit

Section 3-7Alarm and Control Unit

Chapter 3 Alarm and Control Unit (ACU)


2.0 Functional DescriptionThe ACU collects performance signals from other modules in the radio. These signals are digitized by an Analog to Digital converter on the ACU. The ACU compares the digitized value with stored limits. Any signal that is out of limit is logged as an alarm.

The ACU also collects digital alarm signals from modules in the radio. When the ACU detects a digital signal in the alarm state, the alarm is logged.

When an analog or digital alarm occurs, the ACU sends a signal to the module in alarm to light its ALM LED. The ACU also performs protection switching, as appropriate, based on the alarms.

The ACU contains counters that monitor FEC and parity error signals from the MUX. The ACU uses these counts in its decision process during automatic power control activation and protection switching, and to calculate bit error rate.

The ACU maintains a 512 event history (which in the NMS software is referred to as the Alarm Log) and a 7-day count of performance statistics. All access to the ACU's performance log, event history, and manual controls are made via the Local Access Port on the Access Panel. See Appendix B for Local Maintenance Screens.

Figure 3-7-2 is a functional block diagram of the ACU.

Microwave Networks


Control Communications Channel

ADC

P I/O

P I/O

Counter

S I/O

S I/O

S I/O

S I/O

S I/O

S I/O

ACUProcessor

Analog from all Modules

Alarms from all Modules

LED Control to all Modules

Parity ErrorsFEC Errors

ACU-ACU Communications Channel

Local Display Unit RS232

EEPROM Channel

Status and Control Extender PanelRS 232

Comm. Channel to NMS Processor

ADC = Analog to Digital ConverterP I/O = Parallel Input / OutputS I/O = Serial Input / Output

Figure 3-7-2. ACU Block Diagram



3.0 Front Panel FunctionsRefer to Figure 3-7-3 for the location of the following indicator:

3.1 Jumpers and Switches

The ACU contains six jumpers and four switches; two push switches and two DIP switches. Refer to Figure 3-7-4 for jumper and switch locations. Table 3-7-A lists jumper settings. Jumper E4 selects the function of the Alarm Cut-off switch. Jumper E5 selects the type of alarm to be displayed in the event of an ACU failure. Table 3-7-B lists switch settings for DIP switches S2 and S3. Switch S1 is for factory test only. Switch S4 is for resetting the system software

1

F-0774-0494

2

Figure 3-7-3. Front Panel Functions of the ACU

1. ALM LED(ACU) — Red LED, indicates that the ACU needs to be checked and possibly replaced after checking that the NMU is functioning and not causing a false alarm reading on the ACU. First, ver-ify that the NMU is properly inserted by pulling and reinserting the NMU module. Then verify that the ACU is properly inserted by pulling its module and reinserting.

2. ALM LED (NMU)— Red LED, indicates that the NMU needs to be checked along with the ACU and possibly replaced. Verify the NMU is properly insert-ed by pulling the module and then reinserting it.

!IMPORTANT: When switch S4 is pressed, all user defined system

are replaced with default configurations. Re-enter systemconfiguration if default configurations are not usable.configurations

Microwave Networks


Table 3-7-A. ACU Jumper Settings


E1 1-2 Normal operation

2-3 Factory test


2-3 Factory test


2-3 Factory test

E4 1-2 ACO disables audible and visual

2-3 ACO disables audible only

E5 1-2 ACU fail causes minor alarm only

2-3 ACU fail causes major and minor alarm

E6 1-2 4-Port NMU (NMU Rev C or later)

2-3 Normal NMU (NMU Rev A or B)

Figure 3-7-4. ACU Jumper and Switch Locations



Table 3-7-B. ACU DIP Switch Settings

Switch Rocker Setting Function Enabled

NOTE: Switches can be marked OPEN or DOWN. OPEN/DOWN is OFF as labeled on the board

S2 1 Closed Service channel not equipped

Open Service channel equipped

2 Closed Service channel non-protected

Open Service channel protected

3 Closed WTU non-protected

Open WTU protected

4 Closed ATDE not equipped

Open ATDE equipped

5 Closed Orderwire not equipped

Open Orderwire equipped

6 Closed WTU not equipped

Open WTU equipped

7 Closed*Open

APC On at Power Up Mode – DisabledAPC ON at Power Up Mode – Enable

8 Closed Status and Control Extender not equipped

Open Status and Control Extender equipped

S3 1, 2, 3 Closed, Closed, Closed TX Hot Standby; RX Hot Standby

Closed, Closed, Open TX Hot Standby; RX Space Diversity

Closed, Open, Closed TX Space Diversity; RX Space Diversity

Closed, Open, Open TX Non-protected; RX Non-protected

Open, Closed, Closed TX Non-protected; RX Space Diversity

Open, Closed, Open TX Frequency Diversity; RX Frequency Diversity

4, 5 Closed, Closed 2 GHz

Closed, Open 6 and 11 GHz (CM)

Open, Closed 10 GHz

Open, Open 7/8 GHz

6,7 Closed, Closed 48 Vdc battery

Open, Closed 24 Vdc battery

8 Closed APC option enabled

Open APC option disabled

* Set S3, 8 to Closed for feature to work. With current radio firmware: Manual LED will not light. Screen 087 (Appendix B) is disabled.

CM SONET/SDH Page 3-8-1

1.0 General InformationThe Modulator (MOD), shown in Figure 3-8-1, generates the modulated IF signal of the CM radio.

2.0 Description2.1 Physical

The MOD resides in the SP shelf of the radio. Table 3-8-A lists the MOD part number..Table 3-8-A. MOD Part Numbers

Part Number Version

8000514-00 155 Mbps

Figure 3-8-1. Modulator

Section 3-8Modulator (MOD)

Chapter 3 Modulator

Page 3-8-2 CM SONET/SDH

2.2 Functional

The MOD (modulator) accepts parallel data from the MUX (multiplexer), converts the data to an analog signal, then mixes the signal with a 70-MHz carrier to generate a QAM signal. This signal goes to the RF shelf for upconversion and transmission.

Figure 3-8-2 shows the MOD functional block diagram.

To/FromACU

TXBase Band

Filter

70 MHzXTAL OSC

DAC

CLKPLL

DataCLK

ACU Select

TXBase Band

FilterDAC

A & BSelectMUX

IFFilter

Loop BackBuffer

IF OutputBuffer

MixerSumming

Amp.

Data &CLK From

MUX A

"Q"Data

Diff. Amp.

Diff. Amp."I"

Data

0 Degree

90 DegreeHybrid

-90 Degree

MonitoredSignals

+6V-5V Reg.

-6VACU

Interface

Data &CLK From

MUX B

ControlSignals

+5V Reg.

Loop BackControl

ToDEMOD

ToDEMOD

70 MHzIF Out

To RF Shelf

Figure 3-8-2. MOD Block Diagram

Microwave Networks


3.0 Front Access FunctionsFor monitoring and troubleshooting the MOD use the indicators, controls, and test points shown in Figure 3-8-3.

Note: The I and Q Base Band outputs of the MOD are root-raised cosine signals. In order to get a clear EYE pattern, these signals should be sent through the root-raised cosine filter on the DEMOD.

1

2

3

F-0150-O

Figure 3-8-3. Front Panel Functions of the MOD

1. MCX Connector - IF ouput to the RF shelf(50 ohms).

2. ALM LED - Red LED that indicates the module is in an alarm condition. Controlled by the ACU.

3. I Base Band Out - Analog Base Band output. 75ohms

4. Q Base Band Out - Analog Base Band output. 75 ohms.

5. Test Point. Pin 1 is the 70-MHz frequency monitor. Pin 2 is ground (50 ohms).

Chapter 3 Modulator


4.0 8000514 MOD Jumpers (SONET/SDH)Modulator 8000514 contains 5 jumpers, but no user combination settings. Refer to to Figure 3-8-4. Table 3-8-B lists the factory default settings of these jumpers.

Figure 3-8-4. MOD 8000514 Jumper Locations (SONET/SDH)

Table 3-8-B. MOD 8000514 Jumper Settings (SONET/SDH)


E1 Open For factory tests

E2 Not a jumper I Base Band Out connector

E3 Not a jumper Q Base Band Out connector

E4 Not a jumper 70-MHz Monitor connector

E5 Not a jumper Clk OUT connector

C B A1

MONITOR

NULL

I CARRIER

NULLQ CARRIER

70 MHZ Q PWRADJ

ADJI PWR

DLY ADJI/Q CLK

VC

O

ST

RE

SS

GND

GND

PWA 8000514- REVQAM MODULATOR

TADIRAN MICROWAVE NETWORKSMADE IN U.S.A.

32

SERIAL NO.

GND

GND

+5V

-5V

+3V3

GNDGND

ABC

NORM NORM

P1

CW W

CC

W

R75

CW W

CC

W

R67

CW

W

CCW

R137

CW

W

CCW

R95

CW

W

CCW

R133

TP1

TP

2

TP3

U8

U6

U9

U5

U14

Y1

U17 U18

J1

TP4

+5V4

TP5TP6

TP7

D5

MH3

E9E8E7E6

E4

E1

MH

4

I BB OUT

Q BB OUT

CLK OUT

GND

GND

GND

E3

E2

E5

IF OUTTO RF

Microwave Networks


E6 Open For factory test

E7 Installed Connects Q DAC to Base Band filter

E8 Open For factory test

E9 Installed Connects I DAC to Base Band filter

Table 3-8-B. MOD 8000514 Jumper Settings (SONET/SDH) (Continued)


Chapter 3 Modulator



1.0 General InformationThe DEMOD, shown in Figure 3-9-1 resides in the SP shelf of the radio. Strapping options on the SP Backplane set the DEMOD to operate in 128 QAM mode.

Note: Your actual DEMOD board may look different than the one shown in Figure 3-9-1.

Table 3-9-A lists the DEMOD part number.

Table 3-9-A. DEMOD Part Numbers

Part Number Version

8000515-00 155 Mbps

$900

Figure 3-9-1. Typical Demodulator

Section 3-9Demodulator (DEMOD)

Chapter 3 DEMOD


2.0 Functional DescriptionThe DEMOD (demodulator) accepts a QAM signal centered at 70 MHz from the RXU, then outputs data and an associated clock directly to the demultiplexer section of the MUX.

Built-in amplitude slope equalization provides first order multipath compensation. The Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer (ATDE) function provides higher order compensation.

Figure 3-9-2 shows a Demodulator functional block diagram for the SONET/SDH board.

Microwave Networks


Figure 3-9-2. DEMOD Block Diagram (SONET/SDH)

QU

AD

RA

TUR

ED

EMO

DU

LAT

OR

Sheet 1

70 MH

z IF IN

FRO

M R

XU

Q B

AS

EBA

ND

FIL

T.

Sheet 1

I BA

SEB

AN

D F

ILT

.S

heet 1

I B/B

INP

UT

JP12

Q B

/B IN

PU

TJP

21S

heet 1

SLO

PE E

QU

ALIZE

R A

ND

CO

AR

SE AG

C A

MPS

Slope S

tressJP

17

I Slope Eq

DiasableJP

9

Q Slope E

qD

iasableJP

23

Sheet 2

AD

APT

IVE

TIM

ED

OM

AIN

EQU

AL

IZER

IAG

CO

UT

QA

GC

OU

T

CO

AR

SEA

GC

DET

ECTO

R

Sheet 4

I and Q M

ON

ITOR

I EY

EJP

15Q

EY

EJP

16

I_AG

C, Q

_AG

C

Q A

/DS

heet 1

I0-I3

Q0-Q

3

DEC

ISION

CO

RR

ELA

TOR

S

ATD

EC

ON

FIG A

ND

CO

NTR

OL L

OO

PS

AT

DE D

isableS

1-3

B/B

INP

UT

EN

AB

LE

JP11

Sheet 2

I Eye Q

ualityJP

15Q

Eye Q

ualityJP

16

VC

XO

Mon.

TP

15/JP24

SY

MB

OL

CL

OC

K

BU

S D

RIV

ER

SS

heet 3

TO

MU

XE

SS

ymbol C

lockJP

14

I and Q F

ine AG

Cand O

FFS

ET

Sheet 3

I and Q A

/DR

eference Voltages

Sheet 1

I Offset

JP3

I Gain

JP4

Q G

ain

Q O

ffset

CA

RR

IER A

ND

QU

AD

RA

TUR

EC

ON

TRO

LV

OL

TAG

ES

Sheet 2

VC

O T

uneJP

5

70 MH

z Monitor

JP10

External V

CO

JP

8

Quad C

ontrol

JP6

MU

XSE

LEC

T

Sheet 2

FLN

ER

RO

RS

FRO

MM

UX

ES

AC

U B

US

AC

UIN

TER

FAC

E

AN

AL

OG

BU

S

STR

ESS V

OL

TA

GE

S

Sheet 2

LIN

EA

R R

EG

.

Sheet 3

GN

D+

6V-6

V

+5V

-5V

TP

1T

P4

TP

8T

P10

TP

13T

P14

I AG

CT

P5

Q A

GC

TP

15

VC

O

Sheet 1

VC

XO

Sheet 2

I A/D

Sheet 1

DIR

EC

TED FP

GA

SW

ITC

H R

EG

.S

heet 3

GN

D5V

4

3V3

2V5

PREFILTERS AND TIMING EST.

INTE

GR

AT

OR

Sheet 2

ATD

E CO

NTR

OL

DA

TA

FRO

M A

TDE

I and Q A

/DInput O

ffset Voltages

Sheet 1

JP2

JP1

Chapter 3 DEMOD



Figure 3-9-3. Front Panel Functions of the DEMOD

1. I EYE Test Point — I axis eye pattern monitor port (50 ohms), and ground associated with the IEYE Test Point.

2. ALM LED — Red LED that indicates that the Demodulatoris in alarm due to an internal fault or a fault in the RXU or MUX. This LED is controlled by the ACU.

3. CLK Test Point — Symbol rate clock monitor to synchronize eye pattern monitoring (50 ohms), and ground associated with CLK test point.

4. MCX Connector — IF input from the RXU (50 ohms).

5. QEYE Test Point — Q axis eye pattern monitor port(50 ohms), and ground associated with QEYE Test Point (item 7).

Microwave Networks


3.1 8000515 DEMOD Jumper (SONET/SDH)

Refer to to Figure 3-9-4. Demodulator 8000515 has no jumpers.

Figure 3-9-4. DEMOD 8000515 Jumper Locations (SONET/SDH)

1

TADIRAN MICROWAVE NETWORKS DEMODULATOR

PW

A8000515-

RE

V

SE

RIA

LN

O.

I_C

OA

RS

E

AG

C

AG

C

Q_EYE

I_EYE

INJECT_BB INJECT_I_BB

DISABLE

I_SLOPE_

DIS

AB

LE

Q_S

LO

PE

_

INJECT_Q_BB

70MHZ_MON

IF INPUT

TO DEMOD

VCO_TUNE

I_FINE_GAIN

I_FINE_OFF

Q_FINE_OFF

Q_FINE_GAIN

EXT_LO

QUAD_CONTROL

I_E

YE

_Q

UA

LIT

Y

Q_E

YE

_Q

UA

LIT

Y

SLO

PE

_S

TR

SYM_CLK

SPARE

GND

GND

1

I_OTR

Q_OTR

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

MCLK

3

2 1

1

1

1

2

2

1

2

1

2 2

WC

CW

CW

W

CW

CC

W

W

CW

CC

W

W

WI_

OF

FS

ET

Q_O

FF

SE

TS

LO

PE

DE

T.

JP8

R312

CW

CC

W

R359

CW

W

CC

WR

249

TP12

TP8

TP4

TP13

TP3

TP1

TP5

TP10

TP14

TP9

TP2

TP7

TP11

S1J1

JP21

JP3

JP2

JP1

JP5

JP6

JP

15

JP

16

JP9

JP17

JP23

JP11 JP12

JP20

JP7

JP13

JP14

JP4

JP10

JP

24

CW

R427

R428

TP15

D11

P1

Chapter 3 DEMOD



1.0 General InformationThe Multiplexer (MUX) multiplexes/demultiplexes several low-bit-rate channels into/from a high speed data stream. The MUX, shown in Figure 3-10-1, resides in the SP shelf of the radio. Table 3-10-A lists the MUX part numbers.

Table 3-10-A. MUX Part Numbers

Part Number Version

8000513-00 155 Mbps with DS1 WTU

8000513-01 155 Mbps with E1 WTU

$$/:

Note: Your actual MUX board may look different than the one pictured in Figure 3-10-1.

Figure 3-10-1. Typical Multiplexer

Section 3-10Multiplexer (MUX)

Chapter 3 Multiplexer


2.0 Functional DescriptionOn the transmit side, the MUX receives NRZ data and clock signals from the SYNDES unit, multiplexes these signals together with the four 64 kbps service channels and the two (fast channel and NMS) 64 kbps internal overhead channels, and creates a symbol stream suitable for the input to the MOD.

On the receive side, the MUX receives the symbol stream from the DEMOD, demultiplexes this signal into NRZ data and clock signals, which it sends to the SYNDES. Figure 3-10-2 shows a MUX functional block diagram

.

FromServiceChannel

SCSDElasticBuffer

CH1-CH4

FromSYNDES

GapBuffer

ToModulator

A

To/FromACU

BitMultiplexer

Scram-bler FEC

TD

FrameGenerator

ACUInterface

BitDemultiplexer

RCDe-

scramblerFECCKT

Err

orle

ssS

witc

h

Framer

DTPhase

Resolve

PhaseResolve

FromDemodulator

A

FromDemodulator

B

ToServiceChannel

FIFO

DT

ToSYNDES

TC

ToModulator

B

FromACU

TimingGenerator

CK

TXCKControl &Monitored

Signals

Loopback Control

RD

SYNC

CK

DT

CK

ToACU

SD SC DT CKPhase Info

FramerPhase Info

PLLRXCK

Frame Sync

F-1251

Bit LineRotator

MUXLoopback

Figure 3-10-2. MUX Operations Block Diagram

Microwave Networks


3.0 Front Panel FunctionsRefer to Figure 3-10-3 for the Alarm LED location on the Multiplexer module Front Panel.

1.ALM LED — Red LED that indicates the Multiplexer is in alarm. This alarm may be due to a fault within the MUX or a fault in the associated SYNDES, MOD, or DEMOD. This LED is controlled by the ACU.

Figure 3-10-3. ALM LED on the Front Panel

1

Chapter 3 Multiplexer


4.0 8000513 MUX Jumpers (SONET/SDH)Refer to Figure 3-10-4 for jumper locations. Table 3-10-B lists default jumper settings.

Figure 3-10-4. MUX 8000513 Jumper Locations (SONET/SDH)

Table 3-10-B. MUX 8000513 Jumper Settings (SONET/SDH)


JP4 1-2 FEC Enabled, normal operation

2-3 FEC Disabled

X13

FO

RH

AN

DLIN

G/P

AC

KA

GIN

G

ELE

CT

RO

STA

TIC

SE

NS

ITIV

E

DE

VIC

ES

OB

SE

RV

EP

RE

CA

UT

ION

S

DS1

JP4

TP1

GND4

GND2

GND3

GND1

TP6 TP7 TP8

U1

U10

U11

U12

U13

U14

U15

U16

U18

U2

U21

U22

U23

U25

U26U28

U3 U4

U5

U6

U7

U8

U9

Y1

P1

P2

U29

RN6

RN3

RN1

RN2

RN4

RN5

U30

JP2

MADE IN U.S.A.

SO

NE

TM

ULT

IPLE

XE

R/

DE

MU

LT

IPLE

XE

R

PW

A8

00

05

13

-R

EV

FECONOFF

1

111

10

20

15

5

25

30

5

10

15

20

25

30

11C B A

1

TADIRAN MICROWAVE NETWORKS

PECRXCK

VCOCLK

TXCK

FECTXCK

ABC


1.0 General Information

The SYNDES (synchronizer/desynchronizer) module is the interface between asynchronous signal inputs and outputs at the 155 Mbps connections, and the synchronized signal traffic to and from the MUX. The SYNDES module is bidirectional; that is, it has circuitry that handles data on the radio transmission and reception directions. From the radio perspective, transmission takes place with incoming signals from the customer—they are transmitted. Reception takes place with radio signals that are then returned to the customer—they are received. Subsection 2.0 of this Section describes module description. Subsection 4.0 discusses configuring your SYNDES module with jumpers and switches. Figure 3-11-1 illustrates a typical SYNDES module.

Table 3-11-A lists the SYNDES module part numbers.

Table 3-11-A. SYNDES Part Numbers

Part Number Version

8000516-01 Optical, Multi-mode (MM)8000516-02 Electrical mode8000516-03 Optical, Single-mode (SM)8000516-04 Optical Multi-mode (MM) Dual Output8000516-05 Optical Single Mode (SM) Dual Output

$#0

Figure 3-11-1. Typical SYNDES Module

Section 3-11Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES)

Chapter 3 SYNDES


2.0 Functional Description

The SYNDES plugs into the signal processing shelf. It takes customer signal traffic and formats it into radio transportable data. Signal preparation and conversion functions that the SYNDES performs include:

• CMI encoding/decoding

• Monitors the transmitting/receiving process (AIS)

• Maintains a synchronized signal flow

• Line status control—controls which lines turn on and off

Each SYNDES board supports either an optical or electrical interface as shown in Table 3-11-A. Table 3-11-B lists the SYNDES optical and electrical interface cabling, and their operational parameters.

2.1 Transmit

For optical signals the transceiver (Figure 3-11-2) recovers 155.52-MHz clock from the data and converts the serial data into a data nibble at one-forth the incoming rate. For electrical input the transformer coupled interface signals are CMI encoded. The transceiver conditions the CMI data stream, and generates a recovered clock and data stream. Recovered clock is converted to all zeros for the optical operation, or all ones for the electrical operation for insertion into the data stream.

The data is then clocked out of the transceiver to a MUX interface. The transceiver transforms the recovered clock and data stream at 155.52 MHz and converts it to a 38.88-MHz data stream. The MUX receives the 4-bit nibble interface data and clock.

2.2 Receive

A MUX interface inputs 4-bit nibbles of data to the SYNDES using a clock line and a gap line. The interface validates the data and moves the data to a FIFO. As the FIFO data is shifted into the SYN-DES module, the VCXO crystal frequency adjusts to a rate required to keep the FIFO half full. With no optical signal, or when the CPU determines that the radio is inoperative, the MUX inter-face sends an alarm indication signal (AIS) of all zeros into the data stream to the transceiver. AIS means dark fiber for NRZ optical signals, and all 1’s for the electrical CMI coder.

The transceiver takes the 4-bit data nibble and the clock and creates a 155.52 MHz clock and data stream for the optic and electrical interfaces. Code mark inversion (CMI) coding is used for electrical signals, while non return to zero (NRZ) coding and decoding is used for optical interface.

Table 3-11-B. SYNDES Cabling Operational Parameters

Part Number(s)*

* Dual Output Only: Both A & B SYNDES simultaneously have active TX's

Conductor Inside / Outside Fiber Size

Optical Frequency

8000516-01/04 (MM) 62.5 / 125 micron 1310 Nm, 1261 Nm min. 1360 Nm max.

8000516-02 75-ohm BNC

8000516-03/05 (SM) 9 / 125 micron 1310 nm, 1261 Nm min. 1360 Nm max.

Microwave Networks


The optical transceiver takes the serial differential 155.52 MHz data and turns it into light for the multimode SC connector fiber. The electrical interface is transformer-coupled levels with CMI code with a nominal 1-volt level into 75 ohms.

The monitor port provides an exact copy of the electrical output for monitoring performance of the output drive signal.

RXNibble

fromMUX

TXNibbleto

MUX

MUX

Clock Recovery

Op

ticT

ran

sce

ive

r

VCXO38.88MHz

FIFO

HALF FULL

Reduce Jitter

ACU Control

and StatusElectricalInterface

OR

ACUNibble

Figure 3-11-2. SYNDES Block Diagram

Chapter 3 SYNDES


3.0 SYNDES Front Access

The SYNDES has an alarm LED that lights in an alarm condition. The alarm LED, illustrated in Figure 3-11-3, is controlled by the ACU. An example of a SYNDES alarm would be when the AIS detects the absence of clock data when transmitting. The AIS sends a message of all one’s to the ACU to initiate an alarm. The LED lights up to indicate the alarm condition.

.

1.ALM LED -Red LED that indicates the SYNDES is in alarm. This LED is controlled by the ACU.

1

Figure 3-11-3. SYNDES Front Panel LED Alarm Function

Microwave Networks


4.0 SYNDES Jumpers

Refer to Figure 3-11-4 for jumper locations. Table 3-11-C lists the jumper settings.

Table 3-11-C. SYNDES Jumper Settings


JP3 1-2 Normal

2-3 Reports customer input data ‘PRESENT’ to the ACU. No ALARM will be reported even without input. Useful during installing when you know that the no input exists and do not want the input alarm.

Figure 3-11-4. Jumper Locations for SYNDES Module

FOR HANDLING/PACKAGING

ELECTROSTATIC

SENSITIVE

DEVICES

OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS

L1

LD1

T1

T2

T3

U9

U4

U8

U10

U3

U11

P2

P1X

12

U1

U5

U6

U2

R2

R3

R4

C1

C2

U13

Y1

TP1

TP3

TP2

TP4

U12

JP3

TADIRAN MICROWAVE NETWORKS

PWA 8000516- REVMADE IN U.S.A.

CM SONET SYNDES

C B A

C AB

+ + +

GN

D

TD

+

TD

-

+5

+5

SD

RD

-

RD

+

GN

D

OUT IN

5

10

15

20

25

30

5

10

15

20

25

30

1

1

1

C

1

EQ

UIP

NONEQUIP

50 ohm

Test line for:

Chapter 3 SYNDES



1.0 General InformationThe Service Channel Unit (SCU) provides two VF channels that operate from 300 Hz to 3400 Hz, and two 19.2 kbps data channels using an RS232C/RS423 electrical interface. The MLN7876 SCU, shown in Figure 3-12-1, resides in the SP shelf of the radio.

F-1240

Figure 3-12-1. Service Channel Unit

Section 3-12Service Channel Unit (SCU)

Chapter 3 Service Channel Unit


2.0 Functional DescriptionThe SCU can be used in a 1x1 protection configuration, or it can be used unprotected by plugging the SCU into the A radio side of the SP shelf. The four 64 kbps channels on the SCU provide two VF (PCM) channels and two data ports. The two VF channels operate from 0.3 to 3.4 kHz.

The other two channels are presented as data channels which can accommodate up to 19.2 kbps asynchronous data each. The interface to the data channels is a three-wire (TX,RX,GND) RS232C/RS423-type connection at the Access Panel. See the Installation chapter of this manual for connector and pin designations.

Figure 3-12-2 shows a functional block diagram of the SCU.

On LineRelay

On LineRelay

SwitchControl

3 StateDrivers

HS PLL

PCMCODEC

PassThru

PCMCODEC

PassThru

+ 4

MUX

+ 4

DE-MUX

ACUInterface

PassThru

FRAME TX

CLOCK TX

CLOCK RX

FRAME RX

DATATX

DATARX

To/From ACU

From Clock Monitors

TIP1RING1

TIP1RING1

TIP2RING2

TIP2RING2

VF Interface

VF Interface

DATA1

DATA2

DATA1DATA2

AlarmRED LED

D2

To/FromMUX

ASYNC/SYNC

F-1244

Figure 3-12-2. SCU Block Diagram

Microwave Networks


3.0 Front Panel FunctionsRefer to Figure 3-12-3 for the location of the following indicators:

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

F-1241

1. CH1 INPUT GAIN — Sets input channel 1 signal level by measuring TP5 voltage at 1.46 ± 0.01 V peak-to-peak with -3.5 dBm, 1 kHz sine wave input. Note: Do not adjust. This is a factory setting.

2. CH2 INPUT GAIN — Sets input channel 2 signal level by measuring TP6 voltage at 1.46 ± 0.01 V peak-to-peak with -3.5 dBm, 1 kHz sine wave input. Note: Do not adjust. This is a factory setting.

3. CH1 OUTPUT GAIN — Sets output channel 1 signal lev-el by putting in -3.5 dBm, 1 kHz sine wave input, and ad-justing to -3.5 dBm output gain. Note: Do not adjust. This is a factory setting.

4. CH2 OUTPUT GAIN — Sets output channel 2 signal lev-el by putting in -3.5 dBm, 1 kHz sine wave input, and ad-justing to -3.5 dBm output gain. Note: Do not adjust. This is a factory setting.

5. ALM LED — Red LED that indicates the Service Channel Unit is in alarm. The alarm may be caused by an internal fault or a failure of the MUX module. This LED is controlled by the ACU.

6. Switch S1 — DIP switch used for asynchronous data in-put 1. See Table 3-12-B for switch setting information.

7. Switch S2 — DIP switch used for asynchronous data input 2. See Table 3-12-B for switch setting information.

Figure 3-12-3. Front Panel Functions of the SCU



4.0 Configuring the SCUThe Service Channel Unit contains three jumpers and two DIP switches. Jumpers set voice fre-quency channels and the DIP switches configure the data channels. Refer to Figure 3-12-4 for jumper locations. Table 3-12-A lists jumper settings, and Table 3-12-B lists S1 and S2 switch settings.

Table 3-12-A. SCU Jumper Settings


J1 1-2 High gain (23 dB) on VF Channel 2, -16 dBm input, +7 dBm output

2-3 Low gain (0 dB) on VF Channel 2, -3.5 dBm input, -3.5 dBm output

J2 1-2 High gain (23 dB) on VF Channel 1, -16 dBm input, +7 dBm output

2-3 Low gain (0 dB) on VF Channel 1, -3.5 dBm input, -3.5 dBm output

J4 1-2 Oscillator test

2-3 Oscillator enabled

See Table 3-13-B on the following page for S1 & S2 DIP-switch settings.

Figure 3-12-4. SCU Jumper Locations and Dip Switch Settings

Microwave Networks


Table 3-12-B. SCU Switch S1 (CH1) and S2 (CH2) Settings For Digital Channels

DIP-Switch Position

SettingSwitch logic: ON=closed; OFF=open

Channel Configuration

Factory defaults in bold: Not used, Normal, 2 stop bits, 1 parity bit, 8 data bits, 9.6 kbps

1 OFF Not used

2 ON Bypass data channel *

OFF Normal data channel operation

3 ON 1 stop bit

OFF 2 stop bits

4 ON No parity bit

OFF 1 parity bit

5 ON 7 bit data

OFF 8 bit data

6, 7, 8 ON, ON, ON 19.2 kbps data rate

ON, ON, OFF 9.6 kbps data rate

ON, OFF, ON 4.8 kbps data rate

ON, OFF, OFF 2.4 kbps data rate

OFF, ON, ON 1.2 kbps data rate

OFF, ON, OFF 0.6 kbps data rate

OFF, OFF, ON 0.3 kbps data rate

OFF, OFF, OFF 0.15 kbps data rate

* Bypass mode lets the SCU automatically adjust to the pattern and format of incoming data, but is not recommended for use above 2.4 kbps. In Normal operation SCU DIP-switch settings must match the pattern and format of incoming data.


1.0 General InformationThe optional Orderwire Unit (OWU) works in conjunction with the Service Channel Unit (SCU) and an external handset to provide orderwire service over properly equipped radio links. The OWU, part number MLN7201, resides in the SP shelf of the radio. Figure 3-13-1 shows the OWU.

F-0119-O

Figure 3-13-1. Orderwire Unit

Section 3-13Orderwire Unit (OWU)

Chapter 3 OWU


2.0 Description of FunctionThe OWU, when used in conjunction with the SCU, provides a full-featured DTMF signaling orderwire. It also provides two 4-way/4-wire bridges which can be used for either two 3 kHz channels, intended for VF communications, or one 7 kHz channel designed to accommodate split-band type alarm reporting systems, selectable station calling employing DTMF signaling, and bridging circuits to interconnect multiple radio links at junctions and repeater sites.

Orderwire service utilizes VF Channel 1 on the Service Channel Unit. In a repeater configuration you can set VF Channel 1 on the Service Channel Unit in the “through” mode with the LDU to eliminate the unnecessary digitized noise generated from the PCM coding/decoding process. This “through” mode is interrupted when the off-hook situation of the handset is detected.

The OWU works in either a protected or unprotected radio configuration, interfacing with single or redundant SCU modules. The OWU itself is not protected.

The levels of Channel 13 and Channel 23 of the VF bridges are adjusted using jumper J1.

The Orderwire handset connects to the Orderwire Handset Jack on the Access Panel. When not in use, the handset hangs from a hook on the right side of the radio.

To make a call using the Orderwire Handset, set the switch on the handle to the Talk position. With the handset keypad, dial the three digits of the station you wish to call. Speak into the microphone in the keypad.

To call all stations at once press the * key. To terminate a call press the # key.

Figure 3-13-2 is a functional block diagram of the Orderwire Unit

Microwave Networks


Sum &Output

Amplifier

T

R

Sum &Output

Amplifier

T

R

Sum &Output

Amplifier

T

R

Sum &Output

Amplifier

T

R

SumAmplifier

TR

Auxiliary OutputAmplifier

TR

Handset OutputAmplifier

Sum &Output

Amplifier

T

R

DTMF Decoder& Processor

AddressSwitches

PowerSupplyAlarm

Off-HookControl

HookSwitch

InputAmplifier

TR

+5-5-6

Buzzer

Sum &Output

Amplifier

T

R

Sum &Output

Amplifier

T

R

Sum &Output

Amplifier

T

RInputAmplifier

TR

InputAmplifier

TR

InputAmplifier

TR

InputAmplifier

TR

InputAmplifier

TR

InputAmplifier

TR

InputAmplifier

TR

InputAmplifier

TR

From Hook Switch(From Handset)

Handset VF Input-16 dBm/600 Ohm

(From Interface Panel)

SC 1 Input-3.5 dBm/600 Ohm

(From SCU)

VF 11 Input-3.5 dBm/600 Ohm(From Fuse Panel)


VF 13 Input-16 or -3.5 dBm/600 Ohm

(From Fuse Panel)

SC 2 Input-3.5 dBm/600 Ohm

(From SCU)



VF 23 Input-16 or -3.5 dBm/600 Ohm

(From Fuse Panel)

Alarm Output (To ACU) Station Address Output(To ACU)

Off-Hook Out(To SCU/ACU)

Handset VF Output+7 dBm/600 Ohm(To Interface Panel)

Auxiliary VF Output-3.5 or +7 dBm/600 Ohm(To Fuse Panel)

SC 1 Output-3.5 dBm/600 Ohm(To SCU)

VF 11 Output-3.5 dBm/600 Ohm(To Fuse Panel)


VF 13 Output-3.5 or +7 dBm/600 Ohm(To Fuse Panel)

SC 2 Output-3.5 dBm/600 Ohm(To SCU)



VF 23 Output-3.5 or +7dBm/600 Ohm(To Fuse Panel)

Gain Set

Gain Set

Low PassFilter

Gain Set

Figure 3-13-2. Order Wire Unit Operations

Order Wire Unit Block Diagram

Chapter 3 OWU


3.0 Front Panel FunctionsRefer to Figure 3-13-3 for the location of the following indicator:

4.0 Handset Functions

4.1 Handset Functions

The Orderwire Unit comes with a handset which plugs into the Access Panel. Refer to Figure 3-13-4 for the locations of the following handset components.

1. Talk Switch — Activates or deactivates the handset. When the handset is not in use, set the switch to Off. This allows the buzzer to sound if that particular station is called. When the handset is in use, move the switch to the Talk position, thus dis-abling the buzzer. Note, however, that an “all call” signal activates the buzzer regardless of the switch setting.

2. Handset Keypad — Keypad for dialing other stations. The * key calls all stations. The # key terminates a call.

Note: The part number for the Handset is MLN7324A

Figure 3-13-3. Front Panel Functions of the OWU

1. ALM LED — Red LED that indicates the Orderwire Unit is in alarm. This LED is controlled by the ACU.1

Microwave Networks


.

4.2 Jumpers and Switches

The OWU contains two jumpers and three rotary switches. Refer to Figure 3-13-5 for jumper and switch locations. Table 3-13-A lists jumper settings. Table 3-13-B listsswitch settings.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7

*

8

0

9

#

Talk

Off

1

2

handset.cdr

Figure 3-13-4. Functions of the Orderwire Handset (MLN7324A)

E1

K1 K

2 K3

J12

1

40

39

F-0118-O

Figure 3-13-5. OWU Jumper and Switch Locations

Chapter 3 OWU


1 Select one ring duration

2 Select one ring tone

3 Select one ring rate

4 Select one VF channel 23 gain adjust

5 Select one VF channel 13 gain adjust

6 Select one AUX out enable

7 Select one handset out enable

8 Select one AUX output level

Table 3-13-A. OWU Jumper Settings


E1 1-2 Factory setting

J1 1-2 Not used

3-4 Ring duration 4 seconds1


7-8 Ring duration continuous1

9-10 Ring tone 2.5 KHz2


13-14 Ring rate 2.2 Hz3


17-18 VF channel 23 gain adjust (-3.5 dB In; -3.5 dB Out)4

19-20 VF channel 23 gain adjust (-16 dB In; +7 dB Out)4



25-26 AUX out enable on-hook (controlled by off-hook switch)6

27-28 AUX out enable continuous (AUX output always On)6

29-30 Handset out enable off-hook (controlled by off-hook switch)7

31-32 Handset out enable continuous (speaker always On)7

33-34 AUX output level -3.5 dBm (to hook up external speaker)8

35-36 AUX output level +7 dBm (to hook up external speaker)8

37-38 Not used

39-40 Not used

Table 3-13-B. OWU Switch Settings

Switch Function Enabled

K1 Sets third digit of the station ID

K2 Sets second digit of the station ID

K3 Sets first digit of the station ID

Microwave Networks


5.0 Orderwire, Service Channel, and BridgeConfiguration

When the Orderwire Unit is used with the SCU set up for dual narrow band VF, each SCU VF channel of the host radio is connected to one of the two VF bridges. This leaves three bridge legs available on each VF channel for connecting other radio SCUs or external equipment such as alarm systems. In the example shown in Figure 3-13-6, the two SCU VF channels and their associated VF bridges are completely isolated from one another.

Figure 3-13-7 shows the Orderwire used with the SCU set up for single wide band VF. The connection shown between VF13 and VF23 links the two bridges together to effectively provide four bridge legs available for connecting other radio SCUs or external equipment such as alarm systems. In this example, the second SCU VF channel is not applicable, though the bridge leg labeled SCU #2 is not available for other usage.

Figure 3-13-6. Orderwire When Used with SCU Set Up for Dual Narrow Band VF

OWU

SCU-A

VF#1

VF#2

SCU-B (protected)

VF#1

VF#2

Internal

VF

11

VF12VF13

SCU

1

VF 23

VF 22

VF 21

SCU 2

Chapter 3 OWU


Note: The VF13 to VF23 connection is made externally at the terminal block and could be any two available bridge legs.

Figure 3-13-7. Orderwire When Used with SCU Set Up for Single Wide Band VF

OWU

SCU-A

VF#1

VF#2

SCU-B (protected)

VF#1

VF#2

Internal

VF

11

VF12VF13

SCU

1

VF 23

VF 22

VF 21

SCU 2


1.0 General InformationThe optional Wayside Traffic Unit (WTU) is available with high-capacity CM radios. It provides an extra DS1 channel in addition to the data lines. The WTU, part number 8000608-00, or the earlier MLN7330, operates in the signal processing shelf. Figure 3-14-1 shows the current WTU.

The WTU receives one DS1 channel and, on the MLN7330, one asynchronous data channel and presents them to the MUX. It also receives data from the MUX and outputs one DS1 channel and the asynchronous data channel on the MLN7330. Using the WTU does not increase required bandwidth nor does it reduce radio performance. The WTU also meets DS1 pulse mask requirements of ANSI T1.403-1995.

Figure 3-14-1. Wayside Traffic Unit

Section 3-14Wayside Traffic Unit (WTU)

Chapter 3 Wayside Traffic Unit


2.0 Description of FunctionIn the radio transmit direction (from customer into radio), the wayside DS1 signal enters from the access panel as Figure 3-14-2 shows. The signal goes to a line interface chip that equalizes (filters) the bipolar signal. Equalizer gain is set by configuration switch settings. The line interface recovers the clock and data.

The recovered signal goes to a loss of signal (LOS) circuit that detects a dead line. LOS occurs when there are no transitions on the incoming line.

Recovered clock and data then pass a decoder that converts the data from three level format (+, 0, –) to a single non-return to zero (NRZ) data line. The decoder uses either B8Z3 or AMI coding as set by the configuration switch. Bipolar violations are also detected in this circuit.

Decoded data and clock go to an AIS detector and out to the output buffer. The detection of the AIS signal occurs when three or more zeros are received in 2048 bit periods. An output buffer then sends the signal to the main and standby MUX.

On the radio receive side, the WTU accepts clock and NRZ data signals from the MUX. The module converts the clock signal and NRZ data signal into a DS1 format and, on the MLN7330, a second NRZ data signal into RS423 format. These signals route to the access panel for customer use. The module includes a 1x1 protection switch required for system maintenance. Wayside traffic switches independent of customer data.

In the receive direction, the MUX cards send gapped clock and data to a buffer in the WTU. Clock signals go to activity detectors. If the clocks have a gap that exceeds five clock periods, the detectors generate an alarm. The alarm can indicate a missing or failed MUX or signal path.

Clock and data from each MUX goes to a selector that delivers clock and data from the active (on-line) path to the WTU. A circuit checks the clock frequency to ensure the WTU is used with the correct radio configuration. If the DS1 WTU is placed in a radio with the International E-rate MUX (2.048 MHz,) the circuit generates a PLL alarm.

The selected clock and data also go to the AIS Generator that either passes the selected clock and data on or activates an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). The AIS data pattern is all ones and the clock is the 1.544 MHz reference clock. The output of the AIS generator is sent to a line interface.

As the data enters the line interface chip, it passes through what the chip calls the remote loopback (RLB) switch. This switch, when selected, switches in data from the T1 line to implement local loopback for the system. Note: The local loopback function on the WTU board is the line interface chip's remote loopback and vise versa.

After the RLB switch, the data goes through a jitter attenuator that removes the jitter (gapped clocks) that comes from the MUX. The smoothed clock and data then goes to the B8ZS or AMI encoder. The encoded data goes to a predistorter pulse shaping circuit specified by SW1, 2, 3, and 4. It then proceeds through the line drivers and leaves the line interface chip.

Encoded data leaves the line interface chip to three places. The main output of the online WTU goes through a transformer to the DS1 wayside port on the access panel. When the WTU is offline, the signal goes to a 100-Ω dummy load. The dummy load matches line impedance on the additional destinations of the encoded data signal.

The encoded data also goes to a unity-gain amplifier that buffers the signal that then goes through a transformer and out to the DS1 monitor port at the access panel. The monitor port is a buffered output used for troubleshooting; it does not meet pulse waveform specifications.

Microwave Networks


The encoded data from the line interface also goes to an activity detection circuit that alarms if one of the lines is stuck high or low. This provides an output driver monitor function.

DS1 Input

F-0133-O

LineInterfaceTransmit

De-Jitter AMI/B8ZSDecoder

3-StateDrivers

XFMR

NRZ Data

NRZ CLK

To MUX

ClkRecovery PLL

LineInterfaceReceive

LineCoder FIFO 3-State

Buffers

NRZ Data

NRZ CLK

FR CLK

From MUX

CodeSelect

ModuleFail

ACU Data

ACU ADDR

ACU R/W

To/From ACU

47.879MHzOSC

Thru/Cross Sel

Los

AIS ControlLB Select

XFMR

DS1Output

Alarmand

ControlInterface

ActivityDetector

Access Panel

Figure 3-14-2. Functional Blocks of the Wayside Traffic Unit



3.0 Front Panel FeaturesRefer to Figure 3-14-3 for the location of the Alarm LED.

4.0 MLN7330 Jumpers and Configuration SwitchThe early-model MLN7330 WTU has five jumpers and a configuration switch. Figure 3-14-4 shows jumper and switch locations. Table 3-14-A lists jumper settings, and Table 3-14-B lists switch settings.

1

F-0044-O

1. ALM LED — Red LED; indicates the WTU is in alarm. This LED is controlled by the ACU

Figure 3-14-3. WTU Alarm LED Location

Figure 3-14-4. MLN7330 WTU Jumper and Switch Locations

Microwave Networks


Use a flat-head screw driver to change the rotary switch setting by turning the rotary dial till the marking line is even with the selected configuration setting for line buildout.

Table 3-14-A MLN7330 WTU Line Coding Jumper Settings*

Jumper Setting Function EnabledE1 1-2 Normal operation

1-3, 2-4, 3-4 Factory testE3 1-2 DS1 channel equipped

2-3 DS1 channel not equippedE6 1-2 Normal operation

1-3, 3-4 Factory testE8 1-2 DS1 channel - AMI line code

2-3 DS1 channel - B8ZS line codeE10 1-2 Asynchronous data channel receiver enabled

2-3 Asynchronous data channel receiver disabled* Jumpers not listed are not used

Table 3-14-B MLN7330 WTU Line Buildout Switch Settings

Switch Setting Function EnabledK2 0—8 not used

1 Channel Not Equipped9 DS1 line buildout 1 to 131 feetA DS1 line buildout 131 to 262 feetB DS1 line buildout 262 to 393 feetC DS1 line buildout 393 to 524 feetD DS1 line buildout 524 to 655 feet



5.0 8000608-00 Configuration SwitchThe current WTU has one eight-position configuration switch that Figure 3-14-5 shows. Table 3-14-C lists line buildout (length) settings, and Table 3-14-D listsline code settings. SW1-position 6 must stay on (closed) to enable WTU output.

BOLD SHOWS DEFAULT SETTINGS

Table 3-14-C 8000608-00 WTU Equalizer Control / Line Length Select Settings

Line Interface Unit Equalizer Control / Line Length Select0 = OFF (OPEN) I = ON (CLOSED)

SW1-1 SW1-2 SW1-3 SW1-4DS1 / T1Function

Pulse /Line Length Gain

1 1 0 1 SHORT HAUL 0-100 FT 0.6 dB 12 dB0 0 1 1 SHORT HAUL 133 – 266 FT / 1.2 dB 12 dB1 0 1 1 SHORT HAUL 266 – 399 FT / 1.8 dB 12 dB0 1 1 1 SHORT HAUL 399 – 533 FT / 2.4 dB 12 dB1 1 1 1 SHORT HAUL 533 – 655 FT / 3.0 dB 12 dB0 0 0 0 LONG HAUL 0.0 dB PULSE 36 dB0 1 0 0 LONG HAUL -7.5 dB PULSE 36 dB0 0 1 0 LONG HAUL -15.0 dB PULSE 36 dB0 1 1 0 LONG HAUL -22.5 dB PULSE 36 dB1 0 0 0 LONG HAUL 0.0 dB PULSE 26 dB1 1 0 0 LONG HAUL -7.5 dB PULSE 26 dB1 0 1 0 LONG HAUL -15.0 dB PULSE 26 dB1 1 1 0 LONG HAUL -22.5 dB PULSE 26 dB

SW1

Figure 3-14-5. 8000608-00 WTU Configuration Switch Location

Microwave Networks


Table 3-14-D 8000608-00 Line Code Select Settings

Line Code (SW1–5)

OFF (OPEN) B8ZSON (CLOSED) AMI

CM System User Manual Page 3-15-1

1.0 General InformationThe Network Management unit (NMU, MLN7481B and C) supervises and monitors the communication equipment and acts as a network element in the Telescan network management system (NMS). The NMU board mounts on the ACU (Section 3-7). The MLN7481B normally ships as a option kit with its associated hardware (MLN1532A). NMU MLN7481C, or later, ships with systems that will be elements in a loop-protected network.

NOTE: For a description of the SNMP NMU see Appendix G.

2.0 Description of FunctionFigure 3-15-1 is a block diagram of the Network Management unit. The firmware, which controls the communication equipment from the microprocessor, is downloaded into an EEPROM via the network from the Telescan NMS operation and maintenance center or mediation device. Embedded OS is a real time multitasking operating system, which resides on the NMU in an EPROM. Embedded OS permits the application firmware to perform multiple tasks in real-time on the NMU.

The NMU performs the following functions:

• Collects node summary status information from the communication equipment, time and date stamps it, and forwards it to the NMS master.

• Monitors parity error counts and calculates BER and errored seconds.

• Allows local access with a laptop PC or modem, through an RS-232 port at 9.6 kbps with a data format of eight data bits, one start bit, one stop bit, and no parity.

• Communicates with the NMS through a digital bridge using four wire RS-485 or an RS-422 interface. The data is required to be driven asynchronously at 19.2 k with data format of eight data bits, one start bit, one stop bit, and odd parity.

• Supports downloading of application programs through the NMS to the NMU.

• Permits access of NMS over the embedded overhead without sacrificing system performance.

• Continuously monitors power and performance of the NMU.

• Controls the communication bridge, which enables access of CPU and embedded overhead channel to the NMS.

The network port on the access panel connects network management data to co-located radios and the Telescan network management system. Early-model and 4/8/12DS1 access panels only accept a uni-directional (RS485) connection. The unidirectional connection involves setting S2 on the NMU in a master/slave (3-port bridge) configuration. The high-capacity access panel—MGN8112A—accepts a unidirectional or omni-directional (RS-422) connection. The omni-directional connection is only available on the MLN 7487C, or later, NMU and involves setting S2 to a West/East (4-port bridge) configuration. Jumpers on the Network Bridge Interface set the access panel as a unidirectional or omni-directional interface (Page 3-1-2).

The NMU board has seven jumpers and two DIP switches. Figure 3-15-2 shows jumper and DIP switch locations.

Section 3-15Network Management Unit (NMU)

Chapter 3 Network Management Unit

Page 3-15-2 CM System User‘s Manual

UART

F-0242-r0594

TXD

RXD

188XLµP

ControlBus

AddressBus

DataBus

XRESET

DRAM

FLASH(Optional)

IntrController

#2

IntrController

#1

EPROM(BIOS)

(Emb. DOS)(Appl.)

RealTime Clock

CNT

GlueLogic

NMS Bridge

WDT

DATA BUS

RX

TX

RX

TX

NMSNMS

RS-485 INF.

CNT

Radio Service Channel

ParallelOUT

ParallelIN

UART

ExternalUserI/O

A/D

Control Bus

Address Bus

RFU RSL

TTLOutputs

TTLInputs

RS-232

DRV/Rcvr

LocalAccessRS-232

TXRX

RXS

13/Conf Sw

4

4

TXS

NMU Control

Timer/Counters

MRIU Control

MRIU

DRVRSBuffer

Buffer

Access PanelTB1

UART

UART

ACUComm

Figure 3-15-1. Network Management Unit Block Diagram

Microwave Networks


2.1 Jumpers

Figure 3-15-2 illustrates jumper locations. Refer to Table 3-15-A to determine NMU jumper settings.

Note: When upgrading to NMU capabilities, the U4 PROM p/n is MLN1532. When ordering a replacement for the U4 PROM, order MLN7481 and MVN4018A.

* Default settings

Table 3-15-A. NMU Jumper Settings


E1 1-2* Oscillator enabled

2-3 RTC test enabled

E2 1-2 Test enabled

2-3* Com port oscillator enabled

E3 1-2* Watchdog timer enabled

2-3 Watchdog timer disabled

E9 Jumper installed Normal operation

E10 Jumper installed Normal operation

E2E1

OP

EN

OP

EN

U3

F-0235c

CA

UT

ION

STA

TIC

SE

NS

ITIV

E

11

1E3

U4

S2

CLO

SE

D

S1

CLO

SE

D

E9 E10

Figure 3-15-2. Jumpers on the Network Management Unit (NMU)

Chapter 3 Network Management Unit

Page 3-15-4 CM System User‘s Manual

2.2 DIP Switches

The network site address must be set for the NMU. The address, a binary number assigned to the NMU reflecting its network site, is set using dip switch Set S1.

When the dip switches are set to open or closed (See Figure 3-15-3), a numeric value is established that the system can read. Set the rockers open or closed so that the sum represented by their numeric values equals the NMU address.

For example, to set the site address for site 26, set rockers 2, 4, and 5 to the Open position; all others should be set to Closed. The sum of the values for rockers 2, 4, and 5 is: 2 + 8 + 16 = 26

When the dip switch is set to Open, the address values are added to equal the site number. When the dip switch is set to Closed, the address values are not added.

The dip switch settings for Switch Set S1 are listed in Table 3-15-B.

DIP Switch Set S2 settings are listed in Table 3-15-C. S2 dip switch positions 5, 7, and 8 are used to configure NMU for 3-port or 4-port bridge configuration.

Table 3-15-B. NMU Switch S1 Settings

Rocker Function Open Closed

1 Site Address 1 Added Ignored








Table 3-15-C. NMU Switch S2 Settings

Function

Rocker Positions

1-4 5 6 7 8

Site Master Open Closed Open Closed Closed

Slave Open Open Open Closed Closed

4-Port Bridge* Open Open Open Open Open

* On NMU part number MLN7481C only

F-0793-0594

Open

Closed

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128Values

Open

Closed

Figure 3-15-3. DIP Switch S1 Values

CM System User’s Manual 2/27/04 Page 4-1

1.0 IntroductionChapter 4, “Equipment Installation,” describes radio equipment installation in the following stages:

1. Preparing the installation site

2. Unpacking the radio

3. Securing the radio rack or cabinet

4. Making any necessary connections to other equipment

5. Installing a computer/terminal to use for monitoring the system

6. Putting the equipment into operation

Other than this Introduction, major sections in this chapter are:

2.0 Preparing for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4-13.0 Rack Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4-24.0 Access Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4-65.0 Connecting Performance Monitoring Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4-136.0 Antenna Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4-21

2.0 Preparing for InstallationProper planning for the installation includes: locating an appropriate site, correctly unpacking the radio, and safely securing the radio rack or cabinet. Following the guidelines presented in this section will assure trouble-free use of your CM radio.

2.1 Location Considerations

When selecting a new site:

1. Locate the equipment in a controlled environment.

2. Ensure adequate overhead loading and floor support.

3. Provide sufficient light for installation and maintenance.

Chapter 4Equipment Installation

Chapter 4 Installation

Page 4-2 2/27/04 CM System User’s Manual

2.2 Unpacking the Equipment

CAUTION!

Disassemble the crate carefully to prevent damage to the radio

The CM radio and its accessory kit are shipped in one box with all plug-in modules mounted in their proper slots. Table 4-A lists the content of the radio kits:

Rack-mounted radio equipment is shipped in a special packing crate to minimize the effect of normal shocks received in shipment.

The crate should remain intact and sheltered until arrival at the installation site. However, the crate should be checked as soon as it is received for any signs of damage caused by shipping. Claims for damage during shipment should be made immediately to the responsible transportation company.

When more than one rack-mounted radio is delivered to a site, each rack-mounted radio is identifiable by the sales order attached to the rack. After you have carefully unpacked each crate in your order you may proceed to the rack-mounted radio installation process.

3.0 Rack InstallationNote: If the radio is to be installed into an area where no rear access is available, connect DC power as described in the External Connections section prior to securing the rack.

Once the rack-mounted radio is unpacked it must be secured, by being bolted to the floor. The rack-mounted radio comes installed in a self-supported or overhead-supported relay rack. An overhead-supported rack requires support to be provided at the top of the relay rack as well as being bolted onto the floor.

Table 4-A CM Accessory Kits

Item P/N Quantity

ACCESSORY, 24V/48V MLN7730FUSE, GMT, 120V, FAST BLO, 3 AMP 3110017-09 2FUSE, GMT, 120V, FAST BLO, 5 AMP 3110017-12 2FUSE, GMT, 120V, FAST BLO, 10 AMP 3110017-14 2TUNING TOOL ACCESSORY & INSTALLATION 6685389E36 1WRENCH, OPEN END, 1/4 x 5/16 INCH 6685389E37 1WRIST STRAP, STATIC CONTROL 6684760P01 1CABLE ASSY, BNC, 2PIN HDR, 72", 70MHz 3085465H03 1CABLE ASSY, DS3, PCB-BACKPLANE 3085397H01 2

Note: This cable is used for IF loopback testing. IF Loopback is not supported on 3DS3 or higher capacity radios.

RF LOOPBACK KIT MLN7898 1CABLE ASSY,COAX, BB AMP TO TX CONV, 9.50" 3085571J01 1CABLE ASSY,SMA(M)-SMA(M),.141 CONF, 7.50" 8108615-75 1ATTENUATOR, FIXED, 20dB, SMA, 12.5GHz, 2W 2180011-20 2

!

Microwave Networks


Two wires should be run from both the A and B batteries to connect to TB1. For a single battery source and a protected system, add jumpers using 12 or 14 AWG stranded wires across +V of A to +V of B, and -V of A to -V of B terminals on TB1.

Figure 4-1 illustrates connecting the DC power to the back of the radio. Figure 4-2 illustrates the recommended connection for DC Power when two batteries are used. Figure 4-3 illustrates a battery source connection method with a single battery. It is recommended that you avoid using the connection method illustrated in Figure 4-4.

F-0738a

TB

1

A B

+V -V +V -V

Back of Radio

Top View

Figure 4-1 Customer DC Power Connections

TB1

A

B

+V

-V

+V

-V

F-0873a

BATT+

-

*Earth ground

Positive or Negative Voltagemay be Connected to Ground

CM-HC

G

*

*

Earth ground

BATT+

-

*

*

*

Figure 4-2 Recommended DC Power Connection for Dual Battery Source



IMPORTANT: Figure 4-4 illustrates battery source connection NOT RECOMMENDED for DC power.

;'

'

;'

'

$9:#

;

<=>*7

?>?'>,1(@72*7

(7

2

<

<

=>*7

<

Figure 4-3 DC Power Connection for a Single Battery Source

!

;'

'

;'

'

$9:/

;

<

=>*7

?>?'>

1=(2*7)77,*++,

(7$

2

<

<

<A

Figure 4-4 NOT RECOMMENDED DC Power Connection for Battery Source(s)

Microwave Networks


3.1 Rack Ground Bar

Attached to the left front of the rack is a ground bar. This assembly accepts up to 6 AWG stranded grounding wire which has been hooked up to your 48-volt power cable. See Figure 4-5.

3.2 Power Cable Considerations

Cable size for power applications is determined by loop length of a power run, allowable voltage drop over that run, and the current to be carried. Current drains for the radio can be derived from the specifications in Chapter 1.

See Table 4-B for recommended minimum wire gauge sizes.

Table 4-B Recommended Minimum Wire Gauge Size

Loop Length ft. (m) Current (amps)

Feet Meters 10 20

20 6.1 14 AWG 14 AWG

40 12.2 14 AWG 10 AWG

60 18.3 10 AWG 8 AWG

80 24.4 10 AWG 8 AWG

100 30.5 10 AWG 6 AWG

Figure 4-5 Rack Ground Wiring

Ground Bus

Compression Clampfor # 6 AWG

OfficeGround

Front



4.0 Access Panels

4.1 General Description

Access panels for the CM 155-Mbps radio, Figure 4-6, have connections for 10/100BaseT, DS1, and DS3 lines; and 155-Mbps optical and electrical connections. Some of these connections do not apply to your application. Sub-D connections provide access to auxiliary alarm and relay controls. Modular connectors interface:

• voice frequency (VF) and data service channels• orderwire and audio bridge• alarm outputs• control outputs• external alarm inputs• ACU bridge connections• Network connections• auxiliary equipment connections• SCE connections

INOUT HANDSET WTU LOCAL ACCESS

STATUS

20 - 28

11 - 19

+CH 25-28

WAYSIDE

CH 13-24

CH 1-12

28 DS1 I/O

MANUAL


3DS3 CH1 3DS3 CH2 3DS3 CH3

SYNDES

ACO

SONETSONETMON OUT IN

SONETAA

14V248V

NORMAL

05

ARF

TTL I/O


MINOR

FAILSECTION

DTE DCE

A53A

MAJOR

A5A3

AA5

10

SAPS BSPBP

4V284 V

NETWORK

251

26

26

1

1

J23 50

25

J22 50

25

26 J21 50EASTWEST

16

5

9

25

15

13

8

14

9

1

1OUT

IN

1 32

VF 1

VF 2

SPKRDGTL CH2

1 32 SCEDGTL CH1

INOUT HANDSET WTU LOCAL ACCESS

STATUS

20 - 28

11 - 19

MANUAL


1DS1 2DS3 3DS3

SYNDES

ACO


SONETAA

14V248V

NORMAL

05

ARF

TTL I/O


MINOR

FAILSECTION

DTE DCE

A53A

MAJOR

A5A3

AA5

10

SAPS BSPBP

4V284 V

NETWORK

EASTWEST

16

5

9

25

15

13

8

14

9

1

1OUT

IN

1 32

VF 1

VF 2

SPKRDGTL CH2

1 32 SCEDGTL CH1

MLN8112

8209120

8209296

8209309

251

26

26

1

1

50

25

50

25

26 J21 50

Figure 4-6 155-Mbit/s Access Panels

Microwave Networks


4.2 Access Panel Connections

Table 4-C lists the pin designations for the 50-pin DS1 and wayside channel connectors, J21 - J23. The DS3 and 155-Mbps electrical connections are 75-ohm BNC female connectors as Table 4-D lists. For 28 x DS1 or 1x DS3 set jumpers E1 and E2 on the back of the Access Panel to 1-2, but for 3DS3 set the jumpers to 2-3.

Table 4-E lists pin designations for the DB15 connector for TTL input and output. Table 4-F lists the pin designations for the DB25 connector for auxiliary alarm relays (Form C). See Table 4-G for pin designations of the RJ11 4-position 4-pin connectors; these include VF Channels, SCE, Digital Channels, AUX Interface, and speaker. See Table 4-H for pinouts of the Network Management port.

Table 4-C DS1 and Wayside Channel Connections

Connector Input Pins Output Pin

J21 J22 J23

Channel Tip Ring Tip Ring

1 13 25 39 14 26 1

2 14 26 40 15 27 2

3 15 27 41 16 28 3

4 16 28 42 17 29 4

5 17 W1* 43 18 30 5

6 18 44 19 31 6

7 19 45 20 32 7

8 20 46 21 33 8

9 21 47 22 34 9

10 22 48 23 35 10

11 23 49 224 36 11

12 24 50 25 37 12

GND 38 13

* Wayside channel

+CH 25-28

WAYSIDE

CH 13-24

CH 1-12

28 DS1 I/O

251

26

26

1

1

J23 50

25

J22 50

25

26 J21 50



Table 4-D DS3 and 155-Mbps Connections

Connection Description

Optical Connections

OC-3 IN SC Duplex adapter, per ANSI X3T9.3 SC

OC-3 OUT

DS3 / 155Mbps Electrical Connections

DS3 CH1/SONET MON

75-ohm BNC femaleSONET MON repeats the output signal for monitoring

DS3 CH2/SONET OUT

DS3 CH3/SONET IN

DS3 CH 1 DS3 CH 2 DS3 CH 3


SONET

OUT

IN

Microwave Networks


Table 4-E DB15 TTL Interface Connections

Pin Signal

1 *TTL output 1

2 *TTL output 3

3 *TTL input 1

4 *TTL input 3

5 TTL Input 5

6 TTL Input 7

7 GND (ground)

8 GND

9 *TTL Output 2

10 *TTL output 4

11 *TTL Input 2

12 *TTL Input 4

13 TTL Input 6

14 TTL Input 8

15 GND

* Requires optional NMU Card.

Table 4-F DB25 Alarm/Control Relay Connections

Signal GND Normally Open(NO)

Common Normally Closed(NC)

Output 1 1 14 2

Output 2 15 3 16

Output 3 4 17 5

Output 4 18 6 19

Major Audio 7 20 8

Major Visual 21 9 22

Minor Audio 10 23 11

Minor Visual 24 12 25

GND 13

15

8

9

1

25

13

14

1



Table 4-G Modular (RJ11) Interface Connections

Pin Signal Pin Signal

VF1 Branch 1 Digital Channel 1

1 INPUT VF #1 TIP 1 RS232/423 INPUT #12 INPUT VF #1 RING 2 GND3 OUTPUT VF#1 TIP 3 GND4 OUTPUT VF #1 RING 4 RS232/423 OUTPUT #1

VF1 Branch 2 Digital Channel 2

1 INPUT VF #1 TIP 1 RS232/423 INPUT #12 INPUT VF #1 RING 2 GND3 OUTPUT VF#1 TIP 3 GND4 OUTPUT VF #1 RING 4 RS232/423 OUTPUT #1

VF1 Branch 3 OW Handset (PTT)

1 INPUT VF #1 TIP 1 IN MIC22 INPUT VF #1 RING 2 OUT SPK23 OUTPUT VF#1 TIP 3 OUT SPK14 OUTPUT VF #1 RING 4 IN MIC1

VF2 Branch 1 OW Speaker

1 INPUT VF #2 TIP 1 SPEAKER TIP2 INPUT VF #2 RING 2 SPEAKER RING3 OUTPUT VF#2 TIP 3 N/C4 OUTPUT VF #2 RING 4 N/C

VF2 Branch 2 SCE

1 INPUT VF #2 TIP 1 DATA INPUT (RD)2 INPUT VF #2 RING 2 GND3 OUTPUT VF#2 TIP 3 GND4 OUTPUT VF #2 RING 4 DATA OUTPUT

VF2 Branch 3 WAYSIDE WTU

1 INPUT VF #2 TIP 1 E1/DS1 OUT Tip2 INPUT VF #2 RING 2 E1/DS1 OUT Ring3 OUTPUT VF #2 TIP 3 E1/DS1 IN Tip4 OUTPUT VF #2 RING 4 E1/DS1 IN Ring

HAN DSET W TU

1 32

VF 1

VF 2

SPKRDGTL CH2

1 32 SCEDGTL CH1

Pin 1 is located at the top of the jack.

Microwave Networks


4.3 Network Management Port Connections

This section discusses the network port for the proprietary P4 network. See Appendix G for the SNMP option connections.

The network port (Table 4-H) connects network management data to co-located radios and the network management system. The access panel accepts a uni- or omni-directional (RS-422) connection. The omni-directional connection involves setting the NMU to a 4-port bridge element. Jumpers on the Network Bridge Interface (Table 4-H) behind the front panel set the network connector as uni- (E4 and E10 in) or omni-directional (E5 and E12 in) while NMU jumpers set the bridge configuration.

Table 4-H lists the network connection pinning. Tx refers to signals out of the radio, Rx to signals to the radio. Master/Slave and West/East labels refer to network (NMS) configurations discussed above. To bridge NMS between radios use the connections that Figure 4-7 illustrates.

Table 4-H Network Port Connections

3-Port Bridge (unidirectional) Interface 4-Port Bridge (omni-directional)

Master Radio Slave Radio East and West

(on separate terminals) (on one terminal)

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal

2 TX+ 2 RX+ 2 TX-

3 TX- 3 RX- 3 TX+

4 RX+ 4 TX+ 4 RX+

5 RX- 5 TX- 5 RX-

Pin 1 is at the left of the jacks.

NET WO RK

EASTWEST

2 1

MNI IN

12

MNI OUT

122 1

ACU/NMU MSACU/NMU SL

1

12

212

FUTURE ACU68K

12

12

12

MNI IN

11

E1

11

12

MNI OUT

1112

E2

122

ACU/NMU MS

1

1112

E312

E411

ACU/NMU SL

1112111212 11

E7

E1

E8E9E10

1

11

22 1

FUTURE

121112

E6 E5

ACU68K

111212 11

J1

1920

E12

E6

E11

cablingports

Front Panel Network Port Network Interface Card behind panel



Figure 4-7 Network Connections Between Radios and the Telescan NMS

Microwave Networks


5.0 Connecting Performance Monitoring DevicesThe CM radio requires a VT100/VT220, ANSI, or equivalent computer terminal to verify proper operation during installation, monitor the operation status screens for radio performance, maintenance, and system status and diagnostics. For this you can use the MLN8003A Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT), any VT100/VT220, ANSI, or equivalent computer or terminal, or remotely via modem.

Section 5.1 explains the installation and configuration for the Local Maintenance Terminal. Section 5.3 explains the installation and configuration process for a computer or terminal. Section 5.4 explains the installation and configuration of a modem.

5.1 Connecting the MLN8003 Local Maintenance Terminal

The MLN8003 Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) is available as an option for use with the CM radio. Connect the LMT to the Local Access port (located on the radio’s access panel) with the supplied serial cable as indicated in the product manual of the LMT device. Cable connections are as indicated in Section 5.3.

5.2 Configuring the LMT for VT-100 Operation

5.2.1 Before Beginning

Before beginning the set-up process, go to Section 1 of the computer’s Quick Start Guide for instructions on installing the main and backup batteries. Then follow the procedures below to begin the set-up process.

1. Install the main and back-up batteries.

2. Next you will want to adjust the display contrast.

3. Go to the Computer User’s Manual for instructions on setting the date and time.

4. Refer also to the manual for detailed instructions on setting the display intensity and the audio volume.

5. Turn ON the LMT and become familiar with the keyboard and the application keys.

Go to the next section to configure your LMT for use with the series VT-100 Operation. Refer to the Computer User’s Manual for detailed information.

5.2.2 Configuring the LMT

Follow the steps below to configure your LMT for use with the CM Series of Radios.

1. Enter <8C> to start the Dichotomy Application.

2. Press menu, C, and S to display the configuration choices.

3. Use the TAB key to cycle between the choices. Select the following:Baud rate - 9600 Interface - Come 1 Parity - None Data bits - 8Stop bits-1

4. Once you have made these selections, press F10.

We recommend that you save the configuration in a file to access the required configuration easily.



To save the current configuration settings in a file:

1. In DataComm select < Menu, O S F-8>.

2. Enter <VT 100>. The file will appear in the C:\_DAT directory, unless you specify a different directory.

3. Enter <F10, F10 > to save the settings in your new file, and then return to Datacomm’s opening display.

4. When you are ready to look at the screens on a radio, turn the computer ON and connect the serial cable to the radio’s Local Access Port.

5. Enter <8 C> to select the Datacomm application.

6. Enter <Menu OS, F7>.

7. Tab to the Files List box. Select < VT100-DCF> and then press Enter.

8. Press <F10>. The radio’s screen should appear.

5.3 Connecting a Computer or Terminal

The computer or terminal serial communications port has either a DB9, 9-pin, D-shell connector, or DB25 connector. The local access port on the radio access panel has a female DB9 connector that carries three RS-232 compatible signals (Table 4-I). Connect the terminal using the steps that follow.

Table 4-I Local Access Port

Pin Signal

12 INPUT (RX)3 OUTPUT (TX)45 GND6 TTL Input 778 GND9For IBM-compatible computers, that have a DB9 connector, Pins 7 and 8, and 4 and 6, should be connected together at DB9 on the com-puter

LOCAL ACC ESS

DT E DC E1

6

5

9

Microwave Networks


1. Locate the Serial Communications Port. Refer to the operating manual for your computer.

2. Refer to Figure 4-8 and Figure 4-9 for specific cable construction and wiring detail between the radio Local Access Port and the computer serial port.

3. On the computer/terminal Serial Communications Port:

a. set as DTE (Data Terminal Equipment.)

b. set the data format as 9600 bps, 8-bit-long word, 1-stop bit and no parity.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT set XON/XOFF, hardware flow control, or hardware modem control signals.

Once communication is established between the CM radio and your computer/terminal, your computer screen will display the radio frequency band, system software part number, and revision level.

Refer to Appendix B for a detailed list of available radio screen information.



Computer/Terminal

CM Radio

DB25

Comm Port

DTE

5 3 2

Local Access

DB9

DTE

5 3 2

7 3 2

DB9-DB25

Null Modem Cable

(DTE-DTE)

DB9-DB9

Null Modem Cable

(DTE-DTE)

5 3 2

5 3 2

DB9

Comm Port

DTE

DTE

5 3 2

Local Access

DB9

Computer/Terminal

CM Radio

Figure 4-8 Terminal to Radio Connection; DTE-to-DTE

Microwave Networks


CM Radio

Computer/Terminal

DB25

Comm Port

DTE

5 3 2

Local Access

DB9

DTEDTE

5 3 2

Local Access

DB9

DB9-DB9

Null Modem

Adapter

5 3 2

5 3 2

DB9

Comm Port

DTEComputer/Terminal

CM Radio

DB9-DB9

Cable

(DTE-DCE)

5 3 2

5 3 2

DB9-DB9

Null Modem

Adapter

5 3 2

5 3 2

5 3 2

7 3 2

DB9-DB25

Cable

(DTE-DCE)

Figure 4-9 Terminal to Radio Connection; DTE-to-DCE and Null-Modem



5.3.1 Verifying Operation

1. Check voltage across pins 3 and 5 of the Local Access Port (DB9 connector) of the radio. The top row of the connector consists of pins 1 through 5, with pin 1 located on the right side. The radio and the access panel is considered normal if the measured voltage value reads between 8 and 12 volts.

2. Check voltage across pins 3 and 5 of the computer/terminal communication port (DB9 connector). If equipped with a DB25 connector, measure voltage across pins 2 and 7. The measured voltage should be between 8 and 12 volts.

3. Perform a communication port verification test to verify the port assignment and configuration. Refer to the instructions in the computer manual.

4. Perform a local and remote modem loopback from the computer to verify modem and computer operation.

5. Check that the selected cable is an appropriate type for the computer/terminal and modems as described in Figure 4-8 and Figure 4-9.

6. Check cable continuity with an ohm-meter.

Microwave Networks


5.4 Connecting a Modem

The CM radio can be monitored and controlled remotely by the use of a dedicated Hayes compatible modem connected to the local access port of the radio access panel. Connect a modem to the local access port using an appropriate cable as illustrated in Figure 4-10 and as listed in Table 4-I.

Refer to Section 5.5 ”Connection Diagrams,” for additional illustrations of DTE to DCE cabling.

Table 4-J lists modem data transfer requirements, and Table 4-K and Table 4-L describe DTE-to-DCE and DTE-to-DTE internal cable connections, respectively.

Figure 4-10 Modem Connection to Radio Access Panel, Local Access Port



Note: Consult the modem manufacturer and/or the modem operation manual for detailed instruc-tions on configuring the modem..

If communication is established between the CM radio and computer via modem, the computer screen will display the radio frequency band, system software part number, and revision level. Refer to Appendix B for available radio detailed screen information.

If communication is not established between the radio and computer via modem, troubleshoot as indicated in the Computer/Terminal section’s verification procedure.

Table 4-J Modem Data Transfer Communication Requirements

Function Setting

Baud Rate 9600

Parity None

Data Bits 8

Stop Bits 1

Terminal Emulation VT100/220 or ANSI

Flow Control None

Asynchronous Echo Off

Results Codes Disabled

Answer on Ring # 1

Table 4-K DTE-to-DCE Cable Connections

DTE (CM Radios,Most Computer terminals)

DCE (Most MODEMS)

Function DB-9 DB-25 Function DB-9 DB-25

TX Out 3 2 Rx In 3 2

Rx In 2 3 Tx Out 2 3

GND 5 7 GND 5 7

Table 4-L DTE-to-DTE Cable Connections

DTE DTE

Function DB-9 Function DB-9 DB-25

Tx Out 3 Rx In 3 2

Rx In 2 Tx Out 3 2

GND 5 GND 5 7

Microwave Networks


5.5 Connection Diagrams

The diagrams in this section (Figure 4-11) represent DTE and DCE wiring configurations for various TX, RX, and GND Signals.

6.0 Antenna ConnectionsThe radio antenna connection(s) are made at the top of the branching network located on the rear of the radio. Allow an additional 4-3/16 inches (106 mm) of radio cabinet depth for the waveguide branching network.

CAUTION!

Ensure antenna alignment is complete prior to connecting to the radio.

The CM6 radio has CMR137F waveguide flanges for the antenna connection; the CM7/8 radio has CMR112F waveguide flanges, and the CM11 radio has UG39/U type flanges. Installing the flex waveguide between the radio antenna port and the antenna feed alleviates antenna feed placement relative to the radio rack, and minimizes waveguide damage due to vibration. For CM6 radios use E.I.A. WR137 waveguide, for CM7/8 radios use WR112 waveguide, and for CM11 radios use WR90 waveguide.

DB9 DTE

DB9 DCE

5

5

3

3

2

2

DB9 DTE

DB25 DCE

5

7

3

3

2

2

DB9 DTE

DB9 DTE

5

5

3

3

2

2

DB9 DTE

DB25 DTE

5

7

3

3

2

2

DB25 DTE

DB25 DTE

7

7

3

3

2

2

DB25 DTE

DB25 DCE

7

7

3

3

2

2

DB25 DTE

DB9 DCE

7

5

3

3

2

2

DB9 DCE

DB9 DCE

5

5

3

3

2

2

DB9 DCE

DB25 DCE

5

7

3

3

2

2

DB25 DCE

DB25 DCE

7

7

3

3

2

2

Figure 4-11 Various DTE-to-DTE and DTE-to-DCE Wiring Configurations

!



6.1 Installing the Waveguide

IMPORTANT: When installing the waveguide components, be careful not to drop any of the small screws used to connect waveguide together, or any other obstruction, down into the waveguide run from the radio.

1. Install the waveguide branching network at the top rear of the radio, allowing an additional 4-3/16 inches of radio cabinet depth for the branching network.

2. Attach the waveguide flange using 6-32 standard screws, only.

3. If the radio is to be installed into an area where no rear access is available, connect DC power as described in the section in this chapter titled External Connections prior to securing the rack.

4. Replace the metal covers on the back of the radio. Proceed to Chapter 5, Alignment.

Figure 4-12 and Figure 4-13 show the antenna port connections for various configurations.

Figure 4-12 Antenna Port Connections for NN or HH Radios

Microwave Networks


Figure 4-13 Antenna Port Connections for Space Diversity Radio

Diversity flangePrimary flange


1.0 IntroductionThis chapter describes alignment procedures for the CM7/8 SONET/SDH radio. Major sections of this chapter are:

1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12. Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13. Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84. Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105. Recommended Test Equipment . . 5-206. Test Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Perform the procedures described in Sections 2.0 and 3.0 on both primary and standby equipment. Compare initial alignment results and measurements with factory test data (supplied with the equipment), and correct substantial differences before the equipment is used.

CAUTION!

Wear an ESD wrist strap/cord set grounded to the frame whenworking on or removing modules. Whenever modules are not in theradio, place them in ESD protective bags.

2.0 InspectionYour radio was shipped fully tested and configured per the customer sales order from the factory.

2.1 Visual Inspection

Start by first removing the radio front cover, inspect the individual module seating and cable connections. The SMA type connectors must be secured with a 5/16 inch wrench using 7-10 inch-pounds of torque. Refer to Appendix C, Configuration Tables if it is necessary to change jumpers and/or switches to desired settings.

The radio is available in five protection configurations: Hot Standby Transmitter/Hot Standby Receiver, Hot Standby Transmitter/Space Diversity Receiver, Non-protected Transmitter/Space Diversity Receiver, Frequency Diversity Transmitter/Frequency Diversity Receiver, and Non-protected Transmitter/Non-protected Receiver.

!

Chapter 5Alignment

Chapter 5 Alignment


Refer to Figures 5-1 through 5-10 and Tables 5-A and 5-B for various radio configurations.

Note: In Table 5-A, when one TXU, RXU, or RF PSU is listed for a particular configuration, place those modules into the A radio slots of the RF section of the shelf.

Table 5-B lists SP module requirements for the available configurations.

Note: In Table 5-B below, when one MOD, DEMOD, MUX, SYNDES, SP PSU, or SCU is listed, place those modules in the A-side (primary) slots of the SP section of the shelf.

Table 5-A. RF Shelf Module Requirements (numbers denotes quantities)

Configuration TXU RXU RF PSU

Hot Standby/Hot Standby (HH) 2 2 2

Hot Standby/Space Diversity (HS) 2 2 2

Non-protected/Space Diversity (NS) 1 2 2

Frequency Diversity/Frequency Diversity (FF) 2 2 2

Non-protected/Non-protected (NN) 1 1 1

Table 5-B. SP Shelf Module Requirements

Configuration MOD DEMOD MUX SYNDES SP PSU ACU NMU* SCU OWU* WTU* ATDE**

Hot Standby/Hot Standby (HH)

2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 or 2* 1 2 2

Hot Standby/Space Diversity (HS)

2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 or 2* 1 2 2

Non-protected/Space Diversity (NS)

1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2

Frequency Diversity/Fre-quency Diversity (FF)

2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 or 2* 1 2 2

Non-protected/Non-protected (NN)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

* Optional modules. Primary SCU standard, protected SCU is optional. OWU and NMU are non-protected. The NMU module is installed on the ACU unit. The optional WTU is available only on the 28DS1, 1DS3, and 3DS3 radios.

** ATDE is available for 28DS1 and DS3 only. Implemented on DEMOD for 3DS3 radio.

Microwave Networks


Figure 5-1 shows the RF Distribution and RF shelf in Hot Standby/Hot Standby (HH) configuration. Figure 5-2 shows the SP shelf in HH configuration.

C

C

C

C

C

C

dB

TX MON

C

TX dB

ON LINE

MON

RX

dB

TX MON

C

Figure 5-1. RF Section and RF Distribution in HH Configuration

Figure 5-2. SP Section in HH Configuration


F-0100A

Radio BRadio A

Chapter 5 Alignment


Figure 5-3 shows the RF Section and RF Distribution in HS configuration. Figure 5-4 shows the SP Section in HS configuration.

dB

TX MON

TX MON

ON LINE

dB RX

dB

TX MON

C

RX

Figure 5-3. RF Section and RF Distribution in HS Configuration

Figure 5-4. SP Section in HS Configuration


F-0100A

Radio BRadio A

Microwave Networks


Figure 5-5 shows the RF Section and RF Distribution in NS configuration. Figure 5-6 shows the SP Section in NS configuration.

dB

TX MON

TX RX RX

Figure 5-5. RF Section and RF Distribution in NS Configuration

. (. (. . 6. .(.6.. 6.

$$$

77

Figure 5-6. SP Section in NS Configuration

Chapter 5 Alignment


Figure 5-7 shows the RF Section and RF Distribution in FF configuration. Figure 5-8 shows the SP Section in FF configuration.

Figure 5-7. RF Section and RF Distribution in FF Configuration

Figure 5-8. SP Section in FF Configuration


F-0100A

Radio BRadio A

Microwave Networks


Figure 5-9 shows the RF Distribution and RF section in Non-protected/Non-protected (NN) configuration. Figure 5-10 shows the SP section in NN configuration.

Figure 5-9. RF Distribution and RF Section in Non-protected/Non-protected Configuration

Figure 5-10. SP Section in NN Configuration

. (. (. . 6. .(.6.. 6.

7 7

$:

Chapter 5 Alignment


2.2 IF Cabling

The IF cables are shipped attached to the RF and SP modules. Refer to Figure 5-11 for typical connections. Verify that the IF input of the A TXU is connected to the IF output of the A MOD, and the IF input of the B TXU is connected to the IF output of the B MOD with these coax cables. Also verify that the output of the A RXU is connected to the input of the A DEMOD. Repeat for the B radio.

2.3 RF Cables

All RF module cables are shipped attached to the modules. If necessary, connections should be made between modules (TX A, TX B, RX A and RX B) and filters using semi-rigid RF cables with SMA connectors.

Refer to Figures 5-1, 5-3, 5-5, 5-7 and 5-9 to determine cable placement between RF modules and filters.

3.0 VerificationAccurate alignment and test measurements require a one hour equipment warm-up period with covers in place. It is assumed that a computer/terminal is configured correctly and attached to the radio at the Local Access Port. The BER test set is connected to the Access Panel. It is also assumed that the distant terminal BER test set is set to the same test pattern as the local terminal BER test sets. Refer to Chapter 4 for computer/terminal set-up and Appendix B for computer/terminal screen displays.

T X A L M

dB

TX MON

TX ALM

dB

TX MON

INOUTHANDSET WTU LOCAL ACCESS

STATUS

20 - 28

11 - 19

+CH 25-28

WAYSIDE

CH 13-24

CH 1-12

28 DS1 I/O

MANUAL


1DS1 2DS3 3DS3

SYNDES

ACO

SONETSONET

MON OUT IN

SONET

AA

14V248V

NORMAL

05

ARF

TTL I/O


MINOR

FAILSECTION

DTE DCE

A53A

MAJOR

A5A3

AA5

10

SAPS BSPBP

4V284 V

NETWORK

251

26

26

1

1

J23 50

25

J22 50

25

26 J21 50

EASTWEST

16

5

9

25

15

13

8

14

9

1

1OUT

IN

1 32

VF 1

VF 2

SPKRDGTL CH2

1 32 SCEDGTL CH1

1. IF in from Receiver

2. IF out to Transmitter

3. RF into Receiver

4. RF out to Transmitter

5. IF out to DEMOD

6. TX LO from Receiver

7. IF in from MOD

Figure 5-11. IF Cabling

Microwave Networks


3.1 Preliminary Checks

After installation and prior to applying power, make the following checks to verify proper installation and power protection.

1. Verify with an ohm meter that no shorts exist between the rack ground and battery leads.

2. Verify that all SMA cable connectors are snug (7-10 inch-pound). Do not over tighten.

3. Verify that the power feeds are connected to the proper terminal lug. Battery leads of battery A must be connected to terminal lug A (+,-), and battery leads of battery B to terminal lug B (+,-) on TB1.

3.2 Jumper and DIP Switch Settings

Several modules in the CM7/8 radio have jumpers and/or DIP switches that have different settings depending on the configuration. Using Appendix C and Chapter 3 for detailed module descriptions if necessary, check and set all jumpers and switches correctly.

The modules come from the factory configured according to the customer sales order and generally do not need to be changed. However, customer defined settings such as battery voltage, orderwire station number, enabled lines, and DS1 cable setting for the SYNDES (28xDS1 radio only), must be checked and verified if necessary.

Note: Enabled DS1 or DS3 channels must have signals attached or the radio produces an alarm.

Following the check on the jumpers and DIP switch settings, ensure all modules seat properly in the chassis and all cables are connected correctly.

3.3 DC Voltages

Insert fuses while monitoring primary (line) voltage. If fuses blow, check for reversed battery connections, incorrect fuse value, faulty power supply unit or power harness cable/connections. Table 5-C lists which fuses to use, depending on whether you are using a 24 V or ±48 V battery. Check primary and secondary voltages at the test points on the front of the RF PSU and SP PSU. Record the values in Table 5-G on Page 5-22. The module fail LED on the PSU must be off, indicating normal operation. Replace the radio covers and allow an hour for the radio to warm up.

3.4 System Configuration

Connect the computer/terminal to the Local Access Port. Reset the ACU module by either removing and reinserting it, or by pressing ACU switch S4, located near the front of the ACU. The ACU module fail LED blinks for several seconds and then extinguishes to indicate normal operation. The computer screen displays the radio frequency band, system software part number, and software revision. Press the <Escape> key to go to the main menu. Refer to Appendix B for CM7/8 screen displays.

Table 5-C. Fuse Ratings

Battery RF PSU Fuse SP PSU Fuse

±24 V 10A 5A

±48 V 5A 3A

Chapter 5 Alignment


Check and verify system parameters of the local CM7/8 Radio terminal using the Configuration menu on the computer by selecting item 3, Configuration. The System Configuration menu (Screen 50) is now displayed. Select item 1, Module Parameters (Screen 51,) and check that the parameters displayed agree with the required system configuration. If there are any discrepancies, check that the modules are seated correctly and that all jumpers and/or DIP switches are set correctly.

Return to the main menu(002) by pressing the <Escape> key twice. The radio is now ready for verification.

3.5 SP Verification

Press the <Escape> key to go to the main menu (Screen 002) display. Select 4, Control and Maintenance (Screen 70) then select 1, Path Switching (Screen 71). For a protected system, set the TX and RX path of all modules to A and force their states to “Lock”. Press <Escape> to go back to the Control and Maintenance menu and select 2, Loopback. Press 1, IF Loopback and set local “loopback on” on A side (A & B sides on protected systems).

Note: IF Loopback testing not supported on 3DS3 or higher capacity radios.

Verify that the DS1, DS3, or (voice and data channels, or orderwire calling number, if equipped) passes error-free and there is no alarm on the SP modules. If the test is successful, perform the above procedure with B side on-line for protected system. If any of the above tests fail, check external test equipment and troubleshoot the SP modules by using the troubleshooting flow charts in Chapter 6 and the alarm menu on the computer.

Upon completion of SP verification, remove all loopbacks and set Path Switching (071) to “Auto.”

4.0 AlignmentThis section describes tests to be performed on the radio at initial turn-up. Record data compiled in the following tests in Tables 5-G through 5-J, located at the end of this chapter.

4.1 Modulator Frequency (IF)

Using the provided test connector, check the 70 MHz test point on the Modulator board for MOD frequency and record the value in Table 5-H on Page 5-22.

4.2 Local Oscillator Frequency

The CM7/8 RF operating frequencies (transmit and receive) are based on the LO frequency produced by the synthesizer module on the RXU. The actual LO frequency is the Rx frequency plus or minus 70 MHz. The LO frequency should be adjusted at initial installation and checked periodically to ensure that the LO has not drifted.

4.3 Transmitter Carrier Frequency/Receiver LO Frequency

The actual transmitter carrier frequency of the CM7/8 radio is the difference between the IF frequency (70 MHz) from the MOD and the first conversion LO frequency (measured at the TXU Loopback LO OUT connector,) added or subtracted from the TXU's LO frequency. The TXU LO frequency is read from the LO MON port on the RXU.

1. Calculate the transmitter carrier frequency by taking the difference between the IF fre-quency (70 MHz) measured in Section 4.1 of this chapter and the first conversion LO frequency (measured at the transmit unit’s LPBK LO OUT connector,) and then adding or subtracting from the TXU LO frequency.

Microwave Networks


2. Record this value in Table 5-H on Page 5-22.

3. Use the LO FREQ adjustment on the front of each RXU to trim the frequency to within 200 Hz of the desired LO frequency.If the adjustment is outside of range, toggle the RXU front panel LO Frequency. Adjust the dip switch and repeat the adjustment pro-cess.

4.4 Transmitter Output Power

Transmitter output power should be adjusted at initial installation and again whenever a TXU is replaced.

Note: 1.The adjusting of transmitter output power must be done with the TXU switched on-line as outlined in Chapter 2. Also, the radio must be set to “APC Manual: OFF mode,” as outlined in Chapter 2, Section 10.0 Automatic Power Control.

To adjust transmitter output power on the A unit TXU:

1. Verify the A TXU is switched on (screen 071) and the APC is set to OFF (screen 87.) On non-protected systems, the RF LPBK switch on the adjacent RXU must be set to the ON position to force the TXU off-line.

2. Attach a power meter to the Online Mon connector on the TX filter in the RF distribu-tion section.

3. Note the specified Tx (APC Low) output power for the radio you are installing (see Chapter 1 for specifications) and subtract from that number the value written near the on-line MON port. Note the result.

4. Adjust the Tx output power using the potentiometer on the A TXU labeled TX PWR ADJ, until the measured power matches the result of step 3.

5. Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 for the B radio TXU, after switching Tx B on-line.

For example, with Tx output power of +18 dBm switch the A radio on-line. If the label near the on-line MON port is 24.5 dB, subtract that from 18 dBm. The result is -6.5 dBm. Adjust the TX PWR ADJ until you measure -6.5 dBm at the on-line MON port. Now put the B radio on-line and repeat the procedure.

4.5 Access Panel and Module Fail LEDs

Once traffic across the hop is established, verify that the Major and Minor LEDs on the Access Panel are not lit. Also verify that the Alarm LED on each module is extinguished. Check off the Module Fail LEDs box in Table 5-G on Page 5-21.

4.6 End-to-End 155-Mbit/s Data Check

For a protected system, set A side on-line and lock the state of all modules (TX and RX direction). Connect the 155Mb output of the BERT to the SONET/OC3 input connector on the local terminal Access Panel (optical or electrical). Connect the 155Mb input of the BERT (using the same data pattern as at the local side BERT) to the SONET/OC3 output on the Access Panel of the distant terminal. Verify end-to-end error-free traffic. There should be no alarm present in the TX direction of the local terminal and RX direction of the distant terminal. Refer to Figure 5-12.

Chapter 5 Alignment


Next, connect the 155Mb input of the BERT to the SONET/OC3 output on the Access Panel of the local terminal. Connect the 155Mb output of the BERT (using the same data pattern as at the local site BER test set) to the SONET/OC3 input on the Access Panel of the distant terminal. Verify end-to-end error-free traffic in both directions of transmission. The major and minor alarms must be off and the Normal LED will be on to indicate nominal operation at both local and distant terminals. Verify that the alarm LED on each module is extinguished (disregard WTU alarm if the WTU is programmed as “Equipped”, but has no input present at its input).

Generate a fixed number of errors manually on the local BERT and verify that the distant BERT detected the same number of errors.

If there is no SONET/SDH test equipment or person present at the distant site terminal, perform a remote loopback on the SYNDES module using the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT). The manual LED in the Access Panel will blink once per second on both the local and distant terminals to indicate the loopback state. Connect the input of the BERT to the SONET/OC3 output on the Access Panel of the local terminal. Connect the 155Mb output of the same BERT to the SONET/OC3 input on the Access Panel of the local terminal. Verify end-to-end error-free traffic in both directions of transmission. The major and minor alarms must be off and the Normal LED will be on to indicate nominal operation at both local and distant terminals. Verify that the alarm LED on each module is off (disregard WTU alarm if the WTU is programmed as “Equipped”, but has no input).

Repeat the same end-to-end tests with the B side TX and RX on-line.

Remove all loopbacks and replace SONET/OC3 input and output with fiber equipment signals for normal operation.

Figure 5-12. BER Test Set Connections to the Radio

%%

1*

(-

1*

(-

Microwave Networks


4.7 End-to-End Service Channel Check

Perform the end-to-end Service Channel test on a system equipped with SCU modules at each end of the radio link. For a protected system, set A side on-line and lock out the state of all modules TX and RX direction using the computer/terminal at the Local Access Port. Connect the digital data output (up to 19.2 kbps) of the BER test set (at local site) to the digital service channel input #1 on the Access Panel of the local terminal. Connect the digital data input of the BER test set (at the distant site using the same data pattern as at the local site BER test set) to the digital service channel output #1 on the Access Panel of the distant terminal. Verify end-to-end error-free digital service channel signal operation. There should be no alarm present in the TX direction of the local terminal and RX direction of the distant terminal. Refer to Figure 5-13.

Connect the digital data input of the BER test set (at local site) to the Service Channel OUTPUT#1 on the Access Panel of the local terminal. Connect the digital data output of the BER test set (at the distant site using the same data pattern as at the local site BER test set) to the Service Channel INPUT#1 on the distant terminal Access Panel.

Verify end-to-end error-free digital service channel operation in both directions of transmission. The major and minor alarms must be off and the Normal LED will be on to indicate nominal operation at both local and distant terminals. Verify that the alarm LED on each module is extinguished (disregard SYNDES alarms if any DS1 channel is programmed as “Equipped”, but have no input present at the input connectors on the Access Panel).

Generate a fixed number of errors manually on the local BER test set and verify that the distant BER test set detected the same number of errors. Repeat this error detection test in the return path of the Service Channel #1. Repeat the above test on Service Channel #2.

If there is no service channel test equipment or person present at the distant site terminal, perform a remote loopback on the SCU module using the local maintenance terminal. The manual LED on the Access Panel will blink once per second on both the local and distant terminal to indicate the loopback state. Connect the digital data input of the Data test set to the digital service channel OUTPUT #1 on the Access Panel of the local terminal. Connect the digital data output of the same data test set to the Service Channel INPUT#1 on the Access Panel. Verify end-to-end error-free Service Channel signal operation in both directions of transmission. Major and Minor alarms must be off and Normal LED will be on indicating normal operation at both local and distant terminals. Verify that the alarm LED on each module is extinguished (disregard SYNDES alarms if any DS1 channel is programmed as “Equipped”, but have no input present at the input connectors on the Access Panel).

Remove all loopbacks and replace Service Channel input and output with terminal equipment signals for normal operation.

.

Chapter 5 Alignment


Figure 5-13. Service Channel BER Test Set Connections to the Radio

/:

(-

1*

1*

(-

Microwave Networks


4.8 Receive Threshold Check

The receive threshold test provides an approximate fade margin indication, module performance near threshold, and system ruggedness against path anomalies. The receive threshold test is performed on RXUs in the local terminal, though the test requires certain definite configurations in the remote terminal to achieve reliable and repeatable results.

Note: Actual results may vary due to cable loss, equipment and path variation and calibration.

4.8.1 Remote Terminal Setup

To set up the remote terminal, perform the following procedure.



3. Select 2, Manual Mode: Turn APC Off.

4. For a protected radio terminal, select the Control-Path Switching screen (071) and set A side modules on line in the transmit direction, then force their states to Lock mode.

5. Connect the 155Mb output of the BERT to the SONET/OC3 input on the Access Panel.

4.8.2 Local Terminal Setup

Perform the following procedure while referring to Figure 5-14.

1. For a protected radio, select the Control - Path Switching screen (071) and set A side modules on line in the receive direction, then force their on line states to Lock mode.

2. Connect the SONET/OC3 output from the Access Panel to the BERT input. Reset the BERT and verify error-free operation from remote to local terminal direction.

3. Select Configuration - Select AIS Option screen (052) and disable AIS option on A and B sides (Set to “NO.”)

4. Select Performance Monitoring - View Measurement screen (005) and make note of the receive signal level for both A and B sides. The receive threshold measurement test re-quires a calibrated variable attenuator, the total range of which must be greater than the difference in value between the receive signal level (terminal reading) and the spec-ified received threshold from Chapter 1, Specifications. This step also facilitates select-ing the correct power sensor to measure RSL.

5. Disconnect the antenna feed from the radio antenna port.

6. Set the variable attenuator to 0 dB. Connect the variable attenuator to the antenna feed. (If necessary, add an additional fixed calibrated attenuator in series to the variable at-tenuator.)

7. Connect the power meter with the appropriate power sensor to the variable attenuator. Make note of the nominal receive signal level.

8. Disconnect the power meter from the variable attenuator and connect the variable at-tenuator to the antenna port.Reduce RSL by increasing attenuation on attenuator until the BERT reports 10-6 BER. Reset the BERT as often as necessary to display correct reading. Make note of the total attenuation on the variable (and fixed) attenuator to achieve 10-6 BER. Subtract the total attenuation from the value recorded earlier in step 7 to calculate receive threshold for RXU A.

9. Reduce RSL by increasing attenuation on attenuator until the BERT reports 10-6 BER.

Chapter 5 Alignment


Reset the BERT as often as necessary to display correct reading. Make note of the total attenuation on the variable (and fixed) attenuator to achieve 10-6 BER. Subtract the to-tal attenuation from the value recorded earlier in step 7 to calculate receive threshold for RXU A.

10. For a protected radio terminal, select Control - Path Switching screen (071), set B side modules on line in the receive direction, and force their on line states to Lock mode. Repeat step 9 to determine the receive threshold for RXU B.

Note: In hot standby receiver configuration, the B side receive filter experiences 10 dB more loss than the A side, and therefore 10 dB less system gain.

11. Upon completion of the receive threshold test, connect the antenna feed directly to the radio antenna port. Enable the AIS option in the local terminal.Set screen 052 to YES. Enable APC option in the remote terminal by setting screen 087 to AUTO. Connect the 155Mb output of the BER test set to the SONET/OC3 input on the local Access Panel. At the local terminal, access Control - SYNDES Loopback screen 084 and activate re-mote loopback. Reset BERT and verify error-free operation in both directions. Generate a fixed number of errors in the local BERT and verify that the local BERT receives the same number of errors. The local and remote terminals should show no alarms. Re-move all loopbacks.

12. Replace SONET/OC3 input and output connections with fiber equipment signals for normal operation. Set all Path Switching to Auto State. Enter current date, time, or any other relevant configuration information in the computer/terminal. Reset BER perfor-mance counters and alarm log for in-service monitoring.

.

Figure 5-14. TX and RX Signal Attenuator Connection to the Radio

/%

B7C"+&

'1C

6?>*7>7

$#$7

(-

1*

1*

(-

Microwave Networks


4.9 RF Tx Fade Margin Check

The Tx fade margin test provides an approximate fade margin indication and system ruggedness against path anomalies and unwanted interference signals. The Tx fade margin test is performed on RXUs in the remote terminal, though the test requires certain definite configurations in the local terminal to achieve reliable and repeatable results.

Note: Actual results may vary due to cable loss accuracy, equipment, and path variation and cali-bration. Perform this test only after determining Rx fade margin.

4.9.1 Remote Terminal Setup

To set up the remote terminal, perform the following procedure.

1. Check APC option (Screen 051,) through the computer/terminal. If it is not enabled, remove the ACU and set switch S3, rocker 8, to the Closed position to enable transmit APC option. Slide the ACU back into the shelf.

2. For a protected radio terminal, select the Control - Path Switching screen (071) and set A side modules on line in the receive direction, then force their states to Lock mode.

3. Connect the 155Mb input of the BER test set to the SONET/OC3 output on the Access Panel.

4.9.2 Local Terminal Setup

To set up the local terminal, perform the following procedure. See Figure 5-15.

1. For a protected radio terminal, select the Control - Path Switching screen (071) and set A side modules on line in the transmit direction, then force their on line states to Lock mode.

2. Connect the SONET/OC3 input from the Access Panel to the BERT output. Reset the BER test set and verify error-free operation from the local to remote terminal direction.


4. Set the variable attenuator to 0 dB. Connect the variable attenuator to the antenna port. (If necessary, add an additional fixed calibrated attenuator in series to the variable at-tenuator.) See Figure 5-15.

5. Connect the power meter with the appropriate power sensor to the variable attenuator. Make a note of the Tx power level while the APC at the local terminal is off. Turn on the local terminal APC and note of the Tx power level. Turn off APC at the local termi-nal. The difference in readings indicates the APC step size.

6. Disconnect the power meter from the variable attenuator and connect the variable at-tenuator to the antenna port.

7. While APC is off at the local terminal, reduce Tx power by increasing attenuation on the variable attenuator until the BERT reports 10-6 BER (at remote receive side). Reset the BERT as often as necessary to display the correct reading. Make a note of the total attenuation on variable and fixed attenuators to achieve 10-6 BER. Add the total atten-uation to the APC step size recorded in step 5 to calculate the transmit fade margin of the TXU A in the local terminal. The fade margin should be approximately equal to the difference between the Rx fade margin and the previously measured Rx threshold. If not, an interfering signal may be preset and the Rx terminal.

Chapter 5 Alignment


8. Upon completion of the transmit fade margin test, connect the antenna feed directly to the radio antenna port.

9. Connect the 155Mb input of the BERT to the SONET/OC3 output on the local Access Panel.

10. At the local terminal, access Control - SYNDES Loopback screen 084 and activate re-mote loopback. Reset the BERT and verify error-free operation in both directions. Gen-erate a fixed number of errors in the local BERT and verify that the local BERT receives the same number of errors. Neither the local or remote terminal should be in alarm.

11. Remove all loopbacks. Replace SONET/OC3 input and output connections with ter-minal equipment signals for normal operation. Set all modules to auto state. Enter the current date, time, or any other relevant configuration information in the computer/terminal. Reset BER performance counters and alarm log for in-service monitoring.

Figure 5-15. Signal Attenuator Connection to the Radio

/%

B7C"+&

'1C

6?>*7>7

$#$7

(-

1*

1*

(-

Microwave Networks


4.10 Receive Signal Level/AGC Recording

1. For a protected system, set the A side on-line and lock the state of all modules (TX and RX direction) at local and remote terminals by using the computer/terminal at the Lo-cal Access Port. Also set the remote terminal’s APC to “OFF,”(Screen 087.)


3. Connect a variable attenuator to the antenna feed and set its value to 0 dB.

4. Connect the power meter using the appropriate power sensor to the variable attenua-tor and record the receive signal level in Table 5-H on Page 5-23.

5. Remove the power meter from the variable attenuator and connect the variable atten-uator to the radio antenna port.

6. Measure the AGC voltage as measured on the RXU test point as well as the RSL read-ing at the antenna port as displayed on the computer/terminal (Screen 005.) Record these values in Table 5-I on Page 5-23. Compare the RSL reading with the power meter reading. The difference in the two readings is a calibration factor.

7. Change variable attenuation and record corresponding AGC voltage as measured on the RXU test point as well as the RSL reading at the antenna port as displayed on the computer/terminal. Continue this process until BER reaches 10-6. Record these values in Table 5-I on Page 5-23.

8. For a protected system, set B side on-line and lock the state of all modules (TX and RX direction) at the local and remote terminals by using the computer/terminal at the Lo-cal Access Port. Repeat steps 2 through 7 for the B side radio.

9. Remove the variable attenuator and connect the antenna feed to the radio antenna port Set Local and Remote terminal’s path switching state to AUTO, and return remote ter-minal’s APC to AUTO mode (Screen 087) for normal operation.

4.11 Commissioning Radio Link

Once each terminal of the link is verified for normal operation, connect terminal equipment signals to the Access Panel, and the antenna port to the antenna feed. Remove all loopbacks. It is assumed that the antenna is already aligned and the path established.

For a protected system, set A side on-line and set the state of all modules to auto (TX and RX direction) using the computer/terminal at the Local Access Port. The major and minor alarms must be OFF and the normal LED ON indicating normal operation at both local and distant terminals. There should be no module fail alarm on local or distant radio terminals.

Enter current date and time in the system configuration setting screen (054) of the computer/terminal. In the same configuration screen, set AIS option (052) for the system. Press the <Escape> key to go back to the main menu. Select 1, Performance Monitoring and select 4, Reset Link. This will clear the statistics monitor counters and will report back the time when the counters were reset. Select 1, View Link. Verify that it reports error free performance.Press the <Escape> key to go back to the main menu. Select 2, Alarm and Status and then select 1, System Alarms. Select 4, View/Print Alarm Log and then select 2, Clear Alarm Log. The system will report back the time when the counters are reset.

Chapter 5 Alignment


5.0 Recommended Test EquipmentTable 5-D lists recommendations for test equipment required for alignment and operation of the radio. Table 5-F lists electrical and functional specifications for that test equipment. Consult Table 5-E when selecting equipment other than that specified in Table 5-E.

Note: As an option, we recommend the Hewlett Packard HP8593A Spectrum Analyzer. Though it is not absolutely necessary for doing the tests outlined in this chapter, it is very helpful.

Table 5-D. Recommended Test Equipment

ManufacturerPart Number

Description Tests

Hewlett Packard 5347A Microwave counter/power meter Transmitter output power and RSL, and LO frequency measurementHewlett Packard 8485A Sensors

Hewlett Packard 4934A Transmission test set Service channel and orderwire tests

Hewlett Packard(CERJAC)

E4487A(Series 31XE)

PCM analyzer with DS3/ DS1 option DS3 and DS1 signal simulation and BER

ARRA 90-525-20 Variable attenuator 0-20 dB AGC calibration and signal level measurements

Weston 6100 Digital multimeter (DMM) Voltage measurements

ARRA 90-485-03 3 dB fixed attenuator Rx threshold, Tx fade margin




ARRA 90-225-24 Flexible waveguide Antenna connections

TMN MLN7898A RF loopback cable and pad kit RF loopback

Use the listed equipment, or equivalent, based on specifications in Table 5-F. In addition, use the Silton SPS module case, part number TT0013P-1, which accommodates signal processing spares.

Table 5-E. Test Equipment Electrical and Functional Specifications

Equipment Minimum Specifications for Substitutes

Hewlett Packard 5347A Counter

Frequency Range 500 MHz to 20.0 GHz

Sensitivity:

500 MHz - 12.4 GHz -32 dBm (-35 dBm typical)

12.4 GHz to 20.0 GHz -27 dBm (-32 dBm typical)

Impedance 50 ohm, nominal

Maximum input +7 dBm

Accuracy ±1LSD rms ± time base error x fre-quency

Hewlett Packard 5347A Power Meter

Frequency Range 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz, sensor depen-dent

Power Range -70 to +20 dBm (100 pw to 100 mW)

Dynamic Range 50 dB to 10 dB in steps

Microwave Networks


Hewlett Packard 8485A Power Sensor

Impedance 50 ohms

Frequency Range 50 MHz to 26.5 GHz

Power Range 1 µW to 100 mW (-30dBm to +20dBm)

Hewlett Packard 8481D Power Sensor

Impedance 50 ohms

Frequency Range 10 MHz to 18 GHz

Power Range 0.1 nW to 10 µW (-70 dBm to -20 dBm)

Hewlett Packard 4934A Trans-mission Impairment Measur-ing Set (TIMS)

Receiver Input level = -70 to +15 dBm at 600 ohms

Input frequency = 40 Hz to 60 kHz

Noise measurement accuracy =±2 dB (0 dBrn to +20 dBrn)±1 dB (+20 dBrn to +85 dBrn)

Freq. measurement accuracy = ±1 count

C message, 15 kHz flat

Transmitter Output level = -60 to +10 dBm

Input frequency = 40 Hz to 60 kHz

Hewlett Packard 3784A PCM Analyzer

Operating Rate DS1/DS3

Impedance Bridge = Š1000 ohms

Term = 75 ohms ± 5% (DS3)Term = 100 ohms ± 5% (DS1)

Weston 6100 Digital Multimeter

Resolution (meas) 0.005%

DC Ranges ±10 mV to ±100 V in 5 ranges

Frequency Response 30 Hz to 20 kHz for AC RMS voltage and current measurement

Resistance Accuracy ±0.07% input ±1 LSD

Overload Protected Yes

Power Battery/Line Operation

ARRA 90-525-20 Variable Attenuator

Frequency Range 8.20 to 12.4 GHz

Attenuator Range 20 dB (dynamic)

Attenuator vs Freq (±dB) 1.5 dB

VSWR 1.15 maximum

Table 5-E. Test Equipment Electrical and Functional Specifications (Continued)


Chapter 5 Alignment


6.0 Test Tables

Tables 5-F through 5-I on the following pages are provided for recording data from tests described in this chapter.

Table 5-F. Voltage and Alarm Checks

Parameter Specification Limits System Radio A Radio B

RF DC Converter +12.3 Vdc ±0.30 Vdc-6.0 Vdc ±0.42 VdcBATT 20 - 60 Vdc

SP DC Converter +5.4 Vdc ±0.22 Vdc+6.0 Vdc ±0.24 Vdc-6.0 Vdc ±0.24 VdcBATT 20 - 60 Vdc

Major Summary Alarm Panel LED OffMinor Summary Alarm Panel LED OffModule Fail LEDs All Modules LED OffLDU Preliminary

Table 5-G. Frequency, Transmitter Power, and Monitor Checks

Record Values

Parameter Specification Limits Date Date Date Date Date Date DateIF LO Freq,TXU A

System specific

LO Freq, RXU A

System specific ±60 kHz

IF LO Freq, TXU B

System specific

LO Freq, RXU B System specific ±60 kHzTX Frequency Radio A

TxLO ± 70 MHz ± Tx IF LO

±20 kHz

TX Frequency Radio B

TxLO ± 70 MHz± Tx IF LO

±20 kHz

TX Output APC Low, Radio A

Record from Chapter 1,Table 1-B

user set

TX Output APC Low, Radio B

Record from Chapter 1,Table 1-B

user set

TX Monitor APC Low, Radio A

Record from TX MON

N/A

TX Monitor APC Low, Radio B

Record from TX MON

N/A

Microwave Networks


Table 5-H. RSL, AGC, and System Gain

Parameter Specification Limits System Radio A Radio BRSL @ 10-6 BER See Chapter 1,

Table 1-C, DAGC @ 10-6 BER (TP) TBD TBDRSL @ 10-6 BER (LDU) TBD TBDRSL @ Nominal (APC Low) From path data ±2 dBAGC @ Nominal (TP) TBD TBDRSL @ Nominal (LDU) TBD TBDFade Margin 10-6 BER (APC High)

Calculated ±2dB

System Gain @ 10-6 BER Calculated See Chapter 1Table 1-C, D

Table 5-I. AGC Readings

Parameter TP Radio A TP Radio B LDU Radio A LDU Radio B

AGC Readings(Far End APC Low)-25 dBm-30 dBm-35 dBm-40 dBm-45 dBm-50 dBm-55 dBm-60 dBm-65 dBm-70 dBm-71 dBm-72 dBm-73 dBm-74 dBm-75 dBm-76 dBm-77 dBm-78 dBm-79 dBm-80 dBm

Chapter 5 Alignment


CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 6-1

1.0 Introduction

CM series radios require minimal preventive and corrective maintenance. Periodically conducting a few routine tests and keeping a record of the results will uncover any problems that need to be corrected.

Major sections in this chapter are:

1.0 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 6-12.0 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 6-43.0 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 6-54.0 Upgrades and Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 6-85.0 Replacing Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 6-116.0 Troubleshooting Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 6-14

1.1 Customer Service

For repair service or technical assistance anytime call 1-888-225-4762 (U.S.) or 1-281-263-6501 (international), or fax 1-281-263-6730.

1.1.1 Repair and Exchange Services

Standard repair turn around is typically 14 calendar days from receipt of module to shipment from Microwave Networks. Emergency exchange is typically one day from receipt of request to shipment. Standard repair and emergency exchange time frames do not necessarily apply to manufacture discontinued products, frequency specific modules, assemblies, and radios. To get repair services:

1. Call for a Return Authorization Number (RA#) prior to shipment of any repair/return equip-ment.

2. Return modules in static-safe material. Pack securely for shipment.

3. Provide the following information to facilitate repair or exchange.

• Company name, Ship to, and Bill to address.

• Contact name, phone number, and FAX number.

• Radio model and serial/frame number.

• Module number/description.

• Description of the problem or damage.

• Module configuration

• Operating frequency of module, when applicable.

Include the RA number both inside and on the outside of the package. For out of warranty repairs, include a purchase order.

Send to: Microwave Networks, 4000 Greenbriar #100A, Stafford, Texas, 77477. ATTN: Repair/Returns.

Chapter 6Maintenance

Chapter 6 Maintenance

Page 6-2 8/5/03 CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual

1.1.2 Technical Support Services

Around-the-clock telephone support is available on all Microwave Networks products. For telephone support contact 1-888-225-4762 (U.S.) or 1-281-263-6501 (international). Normal hours are 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, U.S. Central Time. After-hour telephone support is available through our dispatch operators.

Technical Support is guaranteed for current products or products on Additions and Maintenance (AM) status. Support on Manufacturing Discontinued (MD) products will vary depending on age of product, available material, available spares, etc. Telephone Technical Support on discontinued products may be subject to a charge depending upon duration and nature of assistance.

1.2 Recommended Test Equipment

Table 6-A lists test equipment recommendations for maintenance. The Chapter 5, Alignment, lists test equipment for repair and alignment. Table 6-B lists electrical and functional specifications for the recommended test equipment. Consult Table 6-B when selecting equipment other than that specified in Table 6-A. For some procedures in this section you will also need a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT). See the following section for a description of the local maintenance terminal.

Table 6-A. Recommended Test Equipment*

* Use the listed equipment, or equivalent, based on specifications in Table 6-B.

Manufacturer Part Number Description Tests

Hewlett Packard 5347A Microwave counter/power meter/sensors

Transmitter output power and RSL, and LO frequency measurement

Weston 6100 Digital multimeter (DMM) Voltage measurementsTMN MLN7898A RF loopback cable and

pad kitRF loopback

Table 6-B. Test Equipment Electrical and Functional Specifications


Hewlett Packard 5347A Fre-quency Counter

Frequency Range 500 MHz to 20.0 GHzSensitivity:500 MHz - 12.4 GHz -32 dBm (-35 dBm typical)12.4 GHz to 20.0 GHz -27 dBm (-32 dBm typical)Impedance 50 ohm, nominalMaximum input +7 dBmAccuracy ±1LSD rms ± time base error x frequency

Weston 6100 Digital Multimeter

Resolution (meas) 0.005%DC Ranges ±10 mV to ±100 V in 5 rangesFrequency Response 30 Hz to 20 kHz for AC RMS voltage and cur-

rent measurementResistance Accuracy ±0.07% input ±1 LSDOverload Protected YesPower Battery/Line Operation

Microwave Networks


1.3 Description of the Local Maintenance Terminal

The local access port on the access panel provides screens for monitor and control from a VT100-compatible terminal. Customers that need a low-cost and smaller alternative to a laptop computer for access to the Local Access Port functions of the radio can order the handheld Local Maintenance Terminal, P/N MLN8003A. The LMT consists of the following, commercially available, items:

• Hewlett Packard 200LX palmtop PC-XT with 1Mbyte RAM

• Hewlett Packard F1015A serial cable

• Cable Connection GCM-9900 DB-9 Male/Make gender adapter

The LMT is easily configured by a setup utility. Set the LMT as a VT100 terminal operating at 9600 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit. MS-DOS 5.0, Lotus 1-2-3, and a note pad is integral to the LMT. Connection to a serial printer is available with a DB-9 to serial printer adapter. An HP LaserJet printer driver is included with the LMT’s integral software, and can be loaded with the setup utility. See the Installation Chapter of this manual for LMT connection to the radios.



2.0 Maintenance

Routine maintenance of the CM radio consists essentially of collecting data through which to analyze the radio's performance. Semi-annually or at least once a year, tests can be conducted to evaluate DC voltages and the performance of various functional components. By using the performance log in Chapter 5, you can record data and compare it with the results of previous tests to determine if any corrective action should be taken to ensure system performance.

The following recommended evaluation schedule may be adapted to specific plant practices. All checks should be made at least once a year.

2.1 Annual Transmitter Checks

Regulating agencies recommend that various transmitter parameters be checked annually. See the guidelines for your regulating agency. The parameters to be measured are typically carrier frequency, output power, and modulation characteristics.

Transmitter Carrier Frequency — The CM transmitter carrier frequency is the difference between the Modulator IF frequency and the TXU first conversion LO frequency added or subtracted from the LO frequency (from the adjacent RXU).

To measure the transmitter frequency:

1. Measure the TX first conversion LO frequency on the TXU using the LPBK LO OUT port.

2. Subtract 70 MHz from the first conversion LO frequency.

3. Measure the local oscillator for the TXU using the LO MON port on the RXU. Add or sub-tract the frequency from Step 2 from the local oscillator frequency to determine the transmit-ter frequency.

4. Trim the frequency to ±1 kHz of the desired fLO by adjusting LO FREQ ADJ on the RXU front panel with a small non-metallic flathead screwdriver.

Transmitter Output Power — The transmitter output power is measured in accordance with instructions in Chapter 5, Alignment.

Transmitter Modulation Characteristics — The modulation characteristics of a digital microwave transmitter are determined by the digital signal bit rate, transmitter output power level, and transmitter filtering.

The filters are factory tuned and fixed; they require no further checks.

If desired, you may perform the tests listed in Chapter 5, Alignment, in addition to the annual transmitter checks.

2.2 DC Voltages

Insert fuses while monitoring primary (line) voltage. If fuses blow, check for reversed battery connections, incorrect fuse value, faulty power supply unit or power harness cable/connections. Table 6-C lists which fuses to use, depending on whether you are using a ±24 V or ±48 V battery.

Check primary and secondary voltages at the test points on the front of the RF PSU and SP PSU. Record the values in the configuration table of Chapter 5. The module fail LED on the PSU must be off, indicating normal operation. Replace the radio covers and allow an hour for the radio to warm up.

Microwave Networks


3.0 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting consists of tracing a fault in the radio to a specific radio module or to equipment outside the radio. Once found, radio repair is as simple as replacing a module (Subsection 5.0). The CM radio’s built-in test features and LED indicators facilitate troubleshooting.

CAUTION!

Prior to removing a plug-in module, confirm that the module is notin service by checking the Alarm and Status screen for that module,or check the TX or RX PATH screen.

If a fault develops, the first priority is to maintain service. This requires that the working equipment be forced on-line while the suspected faulty equipment can be investigated off-line. A protected radio automatically switches faulty equipment off-line, provided that the radio is not in the “MANUAL” or “LOCK” mode, and restores traffic on the standby side of the radio.

Once working equipment has been forced on-line, make the following standard checks before troubleshooting:

1. Verify that the switch planes are in the “AUTO” mode and the manual LED is not illuminated or blinking (LED is illuminated if switch plane is not in “AUTO” and LED will blink with any loopback enabled).

2. Check the MODULE FAIL OVERVIEW screen through the Local Access Port, and note which modules are in alarm.

3. Check all DC voltages on the RF PSUs and SP PSUs.

4. Check all plug-in modules for full insertion and engagement of connectors.

5. Check all cables and switches for normal position.

3.1 Check Alarms Using Alarm LEDs

In the event of a failure it is likely that several alarm LEDs will be illuminated (e.g. DEMOD failure may also cause a MUX RX, SYNDES RX, and an SCU alarm). If the RF PSU and/or the SP PSU alarm are on, they have the highest priority and should be investigated first. Some cards have both TX and RX functions on them (e.g. SYNDES and MUX) and it will be necessary to go to the alarm and status screen for that module to determine whether it is a TX or an RX alarm to establish the priority of the fault. Fault priority is determined by signal flow.

Table 6-C. Fuse Ratings

Battery RF PSU Fuse SP PSU Fuse

±24 V 10A 5A±48 V 5A 3A

!



Note: The Alarm LED on each module is controlled by the ACU. If there is a power related failure on the MOD, DEMOD, TXU, or RXU, the LED control line becomes open which pre-vents the LED from turning on. However, the alarm is still sent to the ACU and reported via the summary alarm (Major/Minor) and can be monitored through the Local Access Port.

The order of the priority on the TX side is SYNDES (TX)→MUX(TX)→MOD→TXU.Order of priority on the RX side is RXU→DEMOD→ATDE→MUX(RX)→SYNDES(RX).

After the highest priority fault has been determined, go to the corresponding troubleshooting flow chart, use Table 6-D as a reference, to begin troubleshooting (for example, if the MOD and TXU alarm LEDs are on, go to Chart 7). The SCU alarm should only be considered when all other alarms are out.

Since the ACU is the central point for the alarms and control of the radio, an ACU failure may cause erroneous alarms and/or switching. If the condition of the radio does not seem to make sense or follow troubleshooting flow charts, do not clear the problem. The ACU may be at fault and should be checked and then replaced if necessary.

3.1.1 Check the ACU

1. Rule out software errors.

If the ACU alarm LED is lit, it may be caused by a software error. Reset the system software by momentarily pressing switch S4 on the front of the ACU module. If the alarm LED clears, the ACU module does not need to be replaced. Continue searching for the problem by going through the troubleshooting process of Module Alarm LEDs.

3.2 Check Alarms Using the Local Maintenance Terminal

You can check alarms before removing any covers using the a local maintenance terminal connected to the local access port. Install and set the VT100 compatible terminal according to the

Table 6-D. Troubleshooting Flow Chart Matrix

Hot-Standby Space Diversity Non-Protected

Problem Chart Number

SP PSU 1 1 1RF PSU 1 1 1SYNDES (Tx) 3 3 2MUX (Tx) 5 5 4MOD 6 6 6TXU 7 7 7RXU 9 10 8DEMOD 12 13 11MUX (Rx) 5 5 4SYNDES (Rx) 3 3 2SCU 14 14 14OWU 15 15 15BER problems 17 18 16NMU 19 19 19RTS 20 20 NA

Microwave Networks


Installation section of this manual. Perform the following procedure from the Main menu.



3. Select System Alarm (036) from the System menu and press <Enter>. This screen gives Ma-jor and Minor alarm status for the overall system.

4. Select Alarm Summary (035) and press <Enter>. This screen displays each module and its status to assist you in identifying a module reporting a failure.

5. If there is a module in fail condition, return to the System menu and select Alarm and Status for the desired unit (022-034). Press <Enter>.

If no alarms are currently present, check the Alarm Log as outlined in the next section. Once the module(s) in alarm is identified, the next step is to determine which module actually failed.

Check the first module in the direction of the signal flow with a lit LED. For example, if the DEMOD, MUX, and SYNDES are all in alarm, first suspect the DEMOD because a DEMOD failure could cause the MUX and SYNDES alarms since they are being fed a bad signal. Similarly, if the MUX and MOD are in alarm, suspect the MUX.

Note: A module reporting failure is not always the defective unit. In some cases, a failure in an upstream module may be reported by a downstream module.

Examine alarm detail for each module that is in alarm. This gives a good indication of the failure. Once the failed module has been identified, replace it with a known good unit.

3.2.1 Checking the Alarm Log

As an alarm occurs, the ACU assigns it a number and adds it to the alarm log. The first alarm is numbered 00000. The log stores the last 512 alarms but the numbering continues consecutively until it reaches 65535. At that time the log starts over at 00000. (An ACU reset or power-down will also cause a reset to 00000 and also drops all current entries from the log.)

For example, when alarm number 511 occurs, the alarm log is full (00000 - 00511). When the next alarm occurs (00512) the alarm labeled 00000 is dropped from the list.

To check the alarm log, perform the following procedure from the LMT Main menu.



3. Select Alarm Log (038) and press <Enter>.

4. Select Alarm Report (039) and press <Enter>.

Refer to Appendix D, the Alarm Codes Table, for a full listing of CM alarm codes and definitions.

3.2.2 Checking Performance Values

To examine the performance of the radio, perform the following procedure from the LMT Main



menu.

1. Select Performance Monitoring (003) and press <Enter>.

2. Select View Statistics (004) and press <Enter>.

3. Use the up and down arrow keys to view the screens.

The displayed statistics are:

BER – A representative of the bit error rate being delivered to the user.Errored Seconds – A second with one or more bit errors (parity).Severely Errored Seconds – Any second with parity error rate greater than

10-3 for the complete second.Frame Loss Seconds – Any second with a frame loss.

To reset all statistics, perform the following procedure from the Main menu.


2. Select Reset Statistics (006) and press <Enter>.

3. Choose whether you want to reset side A, side B, or both sides.

To view real time measurements of certain parameters on the radio, perform the following procedure from the Main menu.


2. Select View Measurements (005) and press <Enter>.

The measurements available for viewing are:

TX Power Output, RX Signal Level, Slope Amplitude Stress, and System Temperature.

3.3 Check LBO and DS1 Line Coding

For 28xDS1 radios check LBO and DS1 line coding using the local maintenance terminal connected to the local access port. For 1DS3 to 3DS3 capacities, line code is set to B3ZS. Set line-buildout by with SYNDES board jumpers.

4.0 Upgrades and Changes

4.1 Changing Local Oscillator Frequency

The CM RF operating frequencies (transmit and receive) are based on the LO frequency produced by the synthesizer on each RXU. The LO frequency is either plus or minus the RX frequency. The LO frequency should be verified/adjusted at initial installation and checked periodically to ensure that the LO has not drifted. The LO frequencies are set at the factory according to the customer order.

The LO frequency may change a small amount due to a test equipment calibration error or equipment/radio ambient temperature. It is NOT necessary to adjust the frequency as long as it is ±5 kHz of desired.

Microwave Networks


CAUTION!

Do not readjust the LO if the frequency is ±5 kHz of the desiredTX/RX frequency.

4.1.1 Checking LO Frequency

To verify the LO frequency, connect the frequency counter at the LO MON connector of the RXU under test and read the frequency. If the measured LO frequency exceeds the specified range listed in Appendix E, but still is ±100 kHz of the desired setting, then readjust LO frequency using a tuning tool at the front of the corresponding RF module. If the adjustment is out-of-range, toggle the front panel DIP switch and repeat the adjustment process.

4.1.2 Changing LO Frequency

If the measured LO frequency exceeds ±100 kHz of the desired frequency, verify the DIP switch settings on the synthesizer. Perform this procedure using the following steps:

Remove the selected RXU and compare/set DIP switches according to the settings shown in Appendix E.

Replace selected RXU in the shelf. Adjust the LO frequency to within ±200 Hz of desired frequency using FREQ ADJ and the front panel LO FREQ. ADJ. DIP Switch.

If the desired frequency is not achieved, replace faulty module and repeat the LO frequency verification test. Otherwise record the LO frequency. Repeat this procedure for each RXU in the system.

4.2 Changing Protection Configuration

The most common types of protection changes are upgrading a terminal from non-protected to hot standby, and upgrading a hot standby terminal to include space diversity receiver protection.

The CM radio is available as a non-protected radio, but with an RF Branching Network for a hot standby radio. This configuration allows you to convert the non-protected radio to hot standby at a later time without losing traffic.

To change the protection configuration of the radio, perform the following procedure.

1. Change the appropriate switch settings on the ACU as indicated in Chapter 3.

2. Add modules as required (for example, when going from non-protected to hot standby, add all the B radio modules). Refer to Chapter 2 for a matrix of modules in each configuration.

3. Remove the RF Branching Network and replace it as indicated in Chapter 3.

4. Add or change cables as shown in Chapter 4, Installation.

To change from non-protected configuration to hot-standby configuration, simply change the appropriate switch setting(s) on the ACU, add the B radio modules, and replace the RF Branching Network. Connect the TXU and RXU interconnect cables as shown in Chapter 4.

!



To change a hot-standby radio to include space diversity receivers, simply change the appropriate switch setting(s) on the ACU and replace the RF Branching Network. Connect the RXU interconnect cables and antenna connections as shown in Chapter 4.

4.3 Adding Service Channel, Orderwire, or WTU

To upgrade your radio to add Service Channel and/or Orderwire, add the SCU and/or OWU module(s) and change the appropriate switch setting(s) on the ACU as indicated in Chapter 3.

Note: Before removing the ACU board, make a note of user-defined configurations such as Tx power, AIS, date and time, loopbacks, alarm log, and statistics data. Once the ACU board is removed, some of this information may be altered.

Remember to configure the SCU and OWU to match your installation as described in Chapter 3. The radio must have an SCU in order to add an OWU.

Add the Wayside Traffic Unit option in the same manner.

4.4 Adding the Optional Network Management Unit

The optional Network Management Unit (NMU) consists of the NMU board, firmware, and mounting hardware. The NMU mounts on the ACU board. To add the NMU board to the radio, perform the following procedure:

1. Remove the ACU board from the rack to prepare it for NMU installation.

Note: Before removing the ACU board, make a note of user-defined configurations such as Tx power, AIS, date and time, loopbacks, alarm log, and statistics data. Once the ACU board is removed some of this information may be altered.

2. Install the firmware chips into location U4 on the NMU board.

3. Using the provided screws, mount the standoffs to the NMU board.

4. Align the NMU board over connector J4 on the ACU, making sure that the header matches pin-to-pin. Mount the NMU board to the ACU board.

5. Set the NMU switches and jumpers according to Chapter 3.

6. Using the VT100 Local Maintenance Terminal and the menu information in Appendix B, re-configure the ACU with the desired Tx power, AIS, date and time, loopback, and statistics in-formation. For details on NMS operation see the TELESCAN 3000 Manual, P/N 6885104E95 or the TELESCAN 6000 Manual, P/N 8841100-00.

Microwave Networks


5.0 Replacing Modules

Due to the frequency uniqueness of the TXU and RXU, these units are spared differently. Refer to the section above titled Checking and Changing Frequency for a discussion of TXU and RXU configuration.

IMPORTANT: Faulty modules must be returned to Microwave Networks for repair, rather than repaired in the field, since modules use complex integrated circuits.

5.1 Replacing TXU and RXU

5.1.1 TXU

Follow the directions below to replace the TXU.

1. Remove the failed TXU.

2. Verify that the spare TXU is the same part number as the failed unit.

3. Remove the SMA cable between the filter and the power amplifier. See Figure 6-1 for the TXU bandpass filter location.

CAUTION!

Do not loosen or tighten any screws on the filter itself, as this willmistune and may damage the filter.

4. Remove only the two shoulder screws that connect the filter cover to the TXU.

5. Loosen the SMA connector located directly on the filter and remove. This filter will be used on the spare TXU.

6. Install the conversion filter from step 4 onto the spare TXU, being careful not to pinch or clamp DC cables under the filter cover or semi-rigid cable. It may be necessary to remove the conversion filter from the TXU spare.

7. Insert and re-connect the TXU.

!



5.1.2 RXU

Follow the directions below to replace the RXU.

1. Remove the failed RXU.

2. Verify that the spare RXU is the same part number as the failed unit

3. Use the synthesizer module on the failed RXU to set the switch settings on the RXU spare as shown in Figure 6-2.

4. Insert and reconnect the RXU.

Bandpass Filter

Front

F-1237a

A A

View AA - For CM11:

Figure 6-1. TXU Bandpass Filter Location

Microwave Networks


5.2 Replacing All Other Modules

Set jumpers and switches on new modules according to jumpers and switch positions of the unit being replaced. Install replacement module and connect cables as necessary.

Note: SP and RF backplanes are generally not field replaceable modules.

Front

F-1235

SynthesizerSwitches

N

A

F

76

54

32

1

S2

1 0

ML

ML

ML

SS

SS

SS

GG

BB

BB

BB

10

65

43

21

S1

1 0

FR

EQ

UE

NC

Y S

ET

Figure 6-2. Synthesizer Switch Location



6.0 Troubleshooting Charts

This section contains troubleshooting charts referenced in the Troubleshooting section of this chapter. Charts that follow are:

SP/RF PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15SYNDES (Non-Protected). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16SYNDES (Protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17MUX (Non-Protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18MUX (Protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20TXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20RXU (Non-protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21RXU (Hot-Standby). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21RXU Space Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22DEMOD (Non-Protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23DEMOD (Hot-Standby) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24DEMOD (Space-Diversity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25SCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26OWU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27BER Problems (Rx Non-Protected). . . . . . . . 6-28BER Problems (Rx Hot-Standby) . . . . . . . . . 6-29BER Problems (Rx Space Diversity). . . . . . . 6-30NMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31Remote Tx Switch HH and SD . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32

Microwave Networks


F-0350-1293

BatteryVoltage

OK?

Measure with a DVM the Battery Voltageat the Test Points on the PSU

Replace PSU Check Fuse at Power Distribution Panel

ProblemsClear?

FuseOK?

Replace Fuse

Measure Battery Voltage at TB1 on the

Back of the Radio

VoltageOK?

Repair External Battery Equipment and Cabling

Verify PSU Is Fully Seated. Check and

Repair Power Distribution Harness

One of the Modules Is Loading Down a Secondary Voltage.

Remove Modules One at a Time Until PSU Problem Clears.

Replace Module Causing Problem.

Yes No

Done

ProblemClear? Done

Yes

ReplacePSU and Fuse

No

Yes No

Yes

No

ProblemClear? Done

Yes

No

Check and Repair Power Distribution

Harness

Yes No

Chart 1. SP/RF PSU



F-0990

In the SYNDES Alarm ScreenCheck to See if Alarm Is on the TX or RX Side

Is Alarma DS1 Input

Alarm?

Done

Yes

No

Replace SYNDES

Check and RepairExternal Equipment

and Cabling

AlarmClear?

Yes

Replace SYNDES

No

Perform MUX Loopback

AlarmsClear?

Yes

Replace SYNDES

No

Tx Rx

AlarmsClear? Done

Yes

Replace MUX

No

Problem Likelyat Remote Tx

Note: Ensure that the SYNDES configuration switches are correctly set according to the manual.

Chart 2. SYNDES (Non-Protected)

Microwave Networks


F-0353

In the SYNDES Alarm ScreenCheck to See if Alarm Is on the TX or RX Side

Both Tx?Yes

No

Replace SYNDES

Check ExternalEquipment and Cabling Both Rx?

Yes

Replace SYNDES

No

Tx Rx

AlarmsClear? Done

Yes

Replace MUX

No


Chart 3. SYNDES (Protected)



F-1293

In the MUX Alarms ScreenCheck to See if Alarm Is on the TX or RX Side

AlarmsClear?

Yes

No

Replace SYNDES

Tx Rx

Replace MUX

DoneYes

No


AlarmsClear?

Perform IF Loopback

AlarmsClear?

Replace MUX

DoneYes

Replace DEMOD

No

Done

No

Replace ATDE

YesAlarmsClear?

Chart 4. MUX (Non-Protected)

Microwave Networks


F-0355

In the MUX Alarms ScreenCheck to See if Alarm Is on the TX or RX Side

AlarmsClear?

Yes

No

Replace SYNDES

BothRx?

Yes

Replace MUX

No

Tx Rx

AlarmsClear? Done

Yes

Replace DEMOD

No


Replace MUX

Done

Chart 5. MUX (Protected)



F-0356

AlarmsClear?

Yes

No

Replace MUX

Replace MOD

Done

Chart 6. MOD

F-1212

Check MOD - TXU IF Cables

CablesOK?

No

Yes

AlarmsClear? Done

Yes

Replace MOD

No

Replace

1

Replace TXU and ResetOutput Power

Chart 7. TXU

Microwave Networks


F-1211

LO orAGC

Alarm?

Yes

No

AlarmsClear? Done

Yes

Replace RXU

Replace RXU

Check Remote Tx Status.Check Antenna Alignment and RF

Connections at Local and Remote Sites

ViewMeasurementsScreen Display

Low RSL?

Replace RXU

No

Yes

No

Chart 8. RXU (Non-protected)

F-1210

LO orAGC

Alarm?

Yes

No

Replace RXU

Check Remote Tx. Check AntennaAlignment and RF Connections at

Local and Remote Sites

Both RXDisplay Low

RSL?

Replace RXU

No

Yes

Chart 9. RXU (Hot-Standby)



F1209

Is It a LO orAGC

Alarm?

Yes

No

Replace RXU

ViewMeasurementsScreen Display

Low RSL?

Replace RXU

No

Yes

Check Remote TX Status.Check Antenna Alignment and RF

Connections at Remote Site

BothLow

RSL on Bothor One RXU

Check AntennaAlignment and RF

Connections atLocal Site

One

AlarmsClear?

No

Replace RXU

YesDone

Chart 10. RXU Space Diversity

Microwave Networks


F-0375

Replace Demod

No

YesCheck RXU - DEMOD IF Cable.

Check Remote Tx Status.Check Antenna Alignment and RF

Connections at Local and Remote Sites.

AlarmsClear?

Perform IFLoopback

AlarmsClear?

Yes

Replace MUX

No

AlarmsClear?

Yes

Replace RXU

No

Done

Done

AlarmsClear?

Yes

Replace ATDE

No

Done

AlarmsClear?

Done

No

Yes

Chart 11. DEMOD (Non-Protected)



F-0376-0794

Perform IFLoopback

No

YesCheck Remote Tx. Check Antenna

Alignment and RF Connections at Localand Remote Sites.

AlarmsClear?

Alarm OnBoth?

No

No

ReplaceDemod

Done

YesCheck RXU -DEMOD IF Cable

CableOK?

Replace

ReplaceRXU

Yes

AlarmsClear?

Yes

ReplaceMUX

No

DoneAlarmsClear?

Yes

ReplaceATDE

No

AlarmsClear?

Yes

No

Done

Chart 12. DEMOD (Hot-Standby)

Microwave Networks


CableOK?

F-0378-0794

Perform IFLoopback

No

YesCheck Remote Tx.

Check Antenna Alignment and RFConnections at Remote Site

AlarmsClear?

Alarm OnBoth?

No

Check RXU -DEMOD IF Cable

ReplaceCable

Yes

Done

ReplaceDEMOD

Yes

No

AlarmsClear?

Check Local AntennaAlignment and RF

Connections

Yes

No

ReplaceRXU

AlarmsClear?

Yes

No

ReplaceMUX

Done

DoneAlarmsClear?

Yes

No

ReplaceATDE

AlarmsClear?

Yes

Done

No

Chart 13. DEMOD (Space-Diversity)



F-0379

No Alarm ButVF/Data Are Bad

VF/DataOK?

No

Problem atRemote Tx

Done

ReplaceSCU

AlarmClear?

Check External VFand Data Cables

Yes

No

ReplaceMUX

AlarmsOn?

No

No

Done

YesReplace SCU

Perform MUXLoopback

Yes

VF/DataOK?

Yes

No

ReplaceMUX

ProblemCleared? Done

Yes

Chart 14. SCU

Microwave Networks


F-0380b

No AlarmBut VF Does Not

Pass Through

VF/DataOK?

No

Problem atRemote Tx

Done

ReplaceOWU

AlarmOn?

No

No

Yes

Yes

VF/DataOK?

Yes

No

ReplaceSCU

DoneYes

Perform LocalSCU Loopback

VF/DataOK?

ReplaceMUX

ReplaceOWU

Chart 15. OWU



Chart 16. BER Problems (Rx Non-Protected)

F-0829

Perform IFLoopback

BEROK? No

Perform IFLoopback atRemote Site

ReplaceRXU

LowRSL?

No Yes

Check Remote Tx Status.Check Antenna Alignment

and RF Connections atLocal and Remote.

YesPerform MUXLoopback

DoneBEROK?

Yes

No

No

ReplaceMUX

ReplaceDEMOD

BEROK?

Yes

No

ReplaceSYNDES

BEROK? Done

Yes

No

ReplaceRemote TXU

BER OK atRemote

Site?

Yes

No

ReplaceLocal RXU

BEROK? Done

Yes

Perform MUXLoopback atRemote Site

No

BEROK?

YesDone

Look for Presenceof Interfering Signal

ReplaceRemote MUX

BER OK atRemote

Site?

No

ReplaceRemote

SYNDES

BER OK atRemote

Site?

DoneYes

ReplaceRemote

MOD

Yes

No

No

ReplaceATDE

BEROK? Done

Yes

Microwave Networks


F-0830

Perform IFLoopback

No

BothRx?

No Yes

LowRSL?

Yes

No

ReplaceDEMOD

BEROK?

No

ReplaceMUX

BEROK?

Yes

BEROK?

ReplaceRemote

TXU

Yes

Switch RemoteTXU - MOD and TX

MUX-SYNDES

ReplaceRemote MOD

BER OK?

No

ReplaceRemote

MUX

Done

Yes

Yes

No

Check Remote Tx. CheckAntenna Alignment and RFConnections at Local and

Remote.

BER OK? Done

YesDone

No

BER OK?

ReplaceRemote

SYNDES

No

Check for Presence ofInterfering Signal

Yes ReplaceRXU

Done

No

ReplaceSYNDES

BEROK?

YesDone

No

ReplaceATDE

BEROK?

YesDone

Chart 17. BER Problems (Rx Hot-Standby)



L ow RSLon Both

Rx?

F-0832

No

No YesLowRSL?

Yes

No

Perform IFLoopback

BERProblemson Both?

No

PerformMUX

Loopback

BEROK?

Yes

Check Antenna Alignmentand RF Connections at

Local Site

Check Remote Tx.Check Antenna Alignment

and RF Connections atRemote Site.

Yes

No

BER OK?

Yes Problem Likely atRemote Site. Troubleshoot

Remote Site.

ReplaceRXU

No

RemoveATDE

BEROK?

Yes ReplaceDEMOD

Done

ReplaceRXU

No

ReplaceMUX

BEROK?

Yes ReplaceATDE

No

ReplaceATDE

BEROK?

YesDone

Chart 18. BER Problems (Rx Space Diversity)

Microwave Networks


F-0850

ACUAlarm?

No

Reset Switch S4on the ACU

Done

ReplaceNMU

YesACUAlarm?

ReplaceACU

CheckACU Alarm

Yes

NMUAlarmClear?

Yes

No

ReplaceACU

Chart 19. NMU



!"""#$%&

'

(

"$%)&

'

* +* , "

"

(

'

-

(

!!, .$%

)&

'

-/0

(

-12"1

3 !!,-/0-4,$ +5

!!, .$%

)&

(

'

*$%)&

60/-2(/2,"7-"$%

(

, 0/

2&(

, 0/

'

2&55(

, -

2&55(

, -/0

'

'

5-%-"6"55"0

'

$%8)&

'

(

!!,, 0/

3 !!0/7-"$%7-, 755

* + ""7* +!!

"

3 92/"7-!55

Chart 20. Remote Tx Switch Hot-Standby and Space Diversity RX

CM System User’s Manual Page 1

Place any site research or reference material here

Site Engineering

Site Engineering

Page 2 CM System User’s Manual

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual Page A-1

1.0 IntroductionThis appendix describes T/I, or Threshold-to-Interference ratio curves for the CM7/8 SONET/SDH Radio.

2.0 T/I RatioThe T/I ratio is the ratio of the level of the desired receiver carrier threshold to that of an interfering carrier that degrades the performance of the CM7/8 receiver from a bit error rate (BER) of 10-6 to a BER of 10-5.

As defined in EIA Bulletin 10D, the threshold level, T, is that signal level in a digital receiver which results in a 10-6 BER in that receiver. The interference level, I, in the T/I ratio is defined as that level of interference required to degrade the 10-6 BER performance one order of magnitude to 10-5 BER.

T/I curves plotting allowable T/I versus frequency offset of the interfering signal are on file with the frequency search companies and are available for all Microwave Networks digital microwave radios.

Note: Microwave Networks incorporates diagrams into Appendix A as they become avail-able.

Appendix AT/I Curves

Appendix A TI Curves

Page A-2 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual

-50.00

-40.00

-30.00

-20.00

-10.00

0.00

10.00

20.00

30.00

40.00

-220 -200 -180 -160 -140 -120 -100 -80 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

Interferer Freq Offset from Carrier (MHz)

T/I

Rat

io (

dB

)

T/I Ratio Limit line

Figure A-1. CM7 SONET Electrical, T/I Curve, APC On, SP TXUs

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System user’s Manual Page A-3

Tadiran Microwave Networks

-50.00

-40.00

-30.00

-20.00

-10.00

0.00

10.00

20.00

30.00

40.00

-220 -200 -180 -160 -140 -120 -100 -80 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220

Interferer Freq Offset from Carrier (MHz)

T/I

Rat

io (

dB

)

T/I Ratio Limit line

Figure A-2. CM7 SONET Electrical, T/I Curve, APC Off, SP TXU

Appendix A TI Curves

Page A-4 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual

-5 0 .0 0

-4 0 .0 0

-3 0 .0 0

-2 0 .0 0

-1 0 .0 0

0 .0 0

1 0 .0 0

2 0 .0 0

3 0 .0 0

4 0 .0 0

5 0 .0 0

-2 2 0 -2 0 0 -1 8 0 -1 6 0 -1 4 0 -1 2 0 -1 0 0 -8 0 -6 0 -4 0 -2 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 0 1 0 0 1 2 0 1 4 0 1 6 0 1 8 0 2 0 0

In te rfe re r F re q O ffs e t f ro m C a rrie r (M H z )

C/I

Rat

io (

dB

)

C /I R a tio

Figure A-3. CM8 SONET Electrical, CW Interference, APC Off, DHP Tx

-5 0 .0 0

-4 0 .0 0

-3 0 .0 0

-2 0 .0 0

-1 0 .0 0

0 .0 0

1 0 .0 0

2 0 .0 0

3 0 .0 0

4 0 .0 0

5 0 .0 0

-2 2 0 -2 0 0 -1 8 0 -1 6 0 -1 4 0 -1 2 0 -1 0 0 -8 0 -6 0 -4 0 -2 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 0 1 0 0 1 2 0 1 4 0 1 6 0 1 8 0 2 0 0 2

In te r fe re r F re q O ffs e t fro m C a rrie r (M H z )

C/I

Rat

io (

dB

)

C /I R a tio

Figure A-4. CM8 SONET Electrical, CW Interference, APC On, DHP Tx

CM System User’s Manual Page B-1

IntroductionAppendix B describes the QuikLink menus and screens that display on a VT100/VT220, compatible computer terminal connected to the radio local access port (Chapter 4, Page 4-20). Each screen has an explanation of how to make menu choices, how to move to the next or previous display screens, and how to change radio settings. Topics of this section include:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1Verifying the ACU Software Version . . . . . . . . . B-1Screen Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2Monitoring Radio Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3Index of Available Local Display Screens. . . . . . B-4Screen Menu Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7Individual Local Maintenance Screens . . . . . . . . B-9

NOTE: Access all screen using a computer terminal (LMT) connected to the Local Access Port.

Appendix B covers 2, 6, 7/8, 10, and 11-GHz radios. Whenever possible, differences are noted, but some screens appear due to the presence of optional equipment. Screen explanations describe applicability.

Verifying the ACU Software Version The ACU software for configuring the radio is P/N MVN4025B. The current version number appears on the PROM U29 on the ACU. This information covers the latest software release and may not apply to your system. Contact Technical Support for release information.

Software Revision The latest ACU and its software supports 100BaseT radio capacity and SNMP network management.

Contact Customer Service for specific information on current software revisions and the affects on your specific radio configuration. Call the 24-hour hot-line at 888-225-4762 (U.S. toll free). Outside U.S. call 281.263.6501.

Appendix BQuikLink Screens

Appendix B QuikLink

Page B-2 CM System User’s Manual

Screen LayoutFigures B-1, B-2 (Page B-7), and the following list discusses using screens that may appear on your computer terminal or performance monitoring device connected to the radio local access port.

Each screen has a number which allows you to go to that display without scrolling. Screens 001 to 007 show the information screen, top-level menus, and performance statistics. Screens 020 to 040 show alarms and status. Screens 050 to 057 have configuration settings. And, Screens 070 to 088 have control and maintenance settings.

Screen Control Area: The lower left corner of the screen denotes which of the five screen types the terminal displays. Choose from five letters, followed by a three-digit-node address (000—250, if NMU equipped):

L - denotes a local radio. R - denotes a remote radio.c - denotes a co-located radio.r - denotes the remote terminal of a co-located radio.N - denotes the NMS network node.

Selecting Screens 1. Move the cursor into the screen control area (3), to select one of the four screens.

2. Press 0, then the left arrow key (0,←) to select one of the screen views.

3. Use the Up/Down arrow keys (↑/↓ ) to select L, R, c, or r, then press Enter (↵ ).

NOTE: Select a screen viewing configuration and press Enter within five seconds between key com-mands, or the selection function resets.

Aborting Changes Press ESC to abort any change.

Navigating Screens The screen number displays in the lower left corner of the screen (3). There are two methods of reaching a screen:

1. Press the Escape key to move from screen to screen through the menu hierarchy, or

2. Enter the number of the screen you wish to display.

L 002 Esc Select _

Main Menu

>1. Performance Monitoring 2. Alarm and Status 3. Configuration 4. Control and Maintenance

Screen Control Area

Screen Title

Command

Selections,Information

mainRefresh Indicator

Figure B-1. Screen 002 – Main Menu

Microwave Networks


For example, if you are on screen 073 and want to go back to screen 071, type 071 and press Enter (071,↵ ). The system then displays screen 071. To return to a previously displayed screen, press 0 and Enter (0,↵ ). Use this method to toggle between the two screens.

Command Area: that work with that screen, see Table B-A. For example, Screen 002 displays Esc, and Select _. Press Esc to display the Product Label screen, which is the parent for Screen 002. To choose <Select> enter an appropriate number followed by Enter (<#>,<↵ >), or use the up/down arrow and press Enter (<↑> or <↓>, <↵ >.)

Refresh Indicator: The repeating symbols “. o O” show that the system is continuously polling and refreshing the screen. Every time the symbol changes, the screen has been refreshed. These symbols are not shown if the screen is not being refreshed or has a static display.

Selection, Information area displays menu items, status information, and messages - such as error messages or reports that appear momentarily on the screen.

Table B-B lists control codes, ASCII codes, and jump screen commands.

Table B-A. Keyboard/keypad Functions

Key Action

1-9 (< Moves menu cursor to numbered item; displays number at menu selection prompt

<0##> Moves menu cursor to specified screen number.

Up Arrow <↑> Moves menu cursor to numbered item directly above current item; wraps. Also functions as <Page Up> key.

Down Arrow <↓> Moves menu cursor to numbered item directly below current item; wraps. Also functions as <Page Dn> key.

Left Arrow <←> Moves menu cursor left one column; wraps between columns.

Right Arrow <→> Moves menu cursor right one column; wraps between columns.

Escape <ESC> Returns to previous screen or menu.

Enter <↵ Enter> Descends to selected screen or changes selected states.

Table B-B. Local Access Port Codes

Type Code Meaning

Control codes <ESC>,<↵ Enter> or <Ctrl-R> Repaint Screen

ASCII codes <U> Arrow up

<D> Arrow down

<L> Arrow left

<R> Arrow right

<↵ Enter> Execute or select

<ESC> Return to parent screen

<?>,<H>,<h> Help

Jump screen commands <0>,<##>,<↵ Enter> Go to screen ##

<0>,<↵ Enter> Go to previous screen

Appendix B QuikLink


Monitoring Radio FunctionsThe optional Local Maintenance Terminal (MLN8003A), a VT100/VT220, or an ANSI equivalent computer terminal provides access to radio monitoring and control screens. The terminal connects to the local access port. The local access port, a female DB9 RS232 data connector, connects by serial cable to the communications port of the terminal. Chapter 4, Installation, describes the proper connection for the serial cable. This cable comes with the optional LMT. Once connected, set the communications port of a terminal or computer to 9600, 8,N,1 and set the terminal type to VT100.

Index of ScreensTable B-C lists all local display screens that may appear on the VT100 screen. This table is particularly helpful when using the jump screen feature.

Table B-C. Local Display Screen Index

Screen Number

Screen Title Description

001 Log-in Screen Displays radio model, software and revision number, date, and time. Also displays the node type, master or slave.

002 Main Menu Lists the four submenus: 1-Performance Monitoring, 2-Alarm and Status, 3-Configuration, and 4-Control and Maintenance.

003 Performance Monitoring Menu

Lists four selections:View Link, View Measurement, Reset Link, and Reset Comm Port.

004 Perf. - View Link Lists link statistics such as:bit error rate, frame loss, errored seconds, severely errored seconds, and frame loss seconds for five time frames: Last second, 60 seconds, 60 minutes, 24 hours, and Last 7 Days.

005 Perf. - View Measurement

Displays the Ant. Tx Power, TXU Power, Ant. RX Power, RXU Power, and system temperature. Also displays Slope Amplifier stress for CM radios.

006 Perf - Reset Link Resets the link statistics counters.007 Perf. - View Comm Ports Displays the NMU and Auxiliary Communication Port

statistics020 Alarm and Status Menu Lists 14 submenus of alarm information: SYSTEM,

SYNDES, MUX, DEMOD, MOD, SCU, ATDE, TXU, RXU, OWU, SP PSU, RF PSU, WTU, and SCE. Selec-tion jumps to the appropriate submenu.

021 Alarm - System Menu Lists five items: Show Alarm Summary, Show System Alarms, Show System LED Status, View/Print Alarm Log, and Show Tx and Rx Path.

022* Alarm - SYNDES A multiple-page display that shows Module, Service, Transmit, and Receive status; Switch confirm, and each channel I/O status. For DS3 configurations, the display also shows Input BER, and Rx PLL status.

023* Alarm - MUX A multiple-page display that shows Module, Service, Transmit, and Receive status; Switch confirm, Input Channel Tx Data, DS3 Input Alarm, Rx Out of Frame, Mux Output Alarm, Rx A Out of Frame, Rx B Out of Frame, Rx A Input Data, and Rx B Input Data.

Microwave Networks


024 Alarm - DEMOD Displays Module status, Service status, VCO, Quadra-ture, and Frame Loss.

025 Alarm - MOD Displays Module status, Service status, Switch Confirm, and I/O LOS.

026 Alarm - SCU Displays Module status, Service status, Hardware status (follows Module status), and Switch Confirm. Also dis-plays when system is not equipped with an SCU.

027* Alarm - ATDE Displays Module status, Service status. Also displays when system is not equipped with an ATDE, or, for 3DS3 systems, the ATDE is implemented on the DEMOD.

028 Alarm - TXU A multiple-page display that shows Module and Service Status, Switch and APC Confirm, LO, TX ALC Tx Power Level, Fan, Phase Lock Loop, Regulated Voltage.

029 Alarm - RXU Displays Module status, Service status, LO, AGC, and Regulated Voltage Status. Displays Preamplifier on some systems.

030 Alarm - OWU Displays Module, Service, and Hardware Status. Indi-cates when system is not-equipped with OWU.

031 Alarm - SP PSU Displays Module, Service, and Supply Status.Also shows battery, and supply voltage conditions.

032* Alarm - RF PSU Displays Module Status, Service Status, Supply Status.033 Alarm - WTU Displays Module Status, Service Status, Switch Confirm,

Ch. Input LOS.034 Alarm - SCE Displays Unit Status035 Alarm - Summary Lists SYSTEM, SYNDES, MUX, DEMOD, MOD, SCU,

ATDE, TXU, RXU, OWU, SP PSU, RF PSU, WTU, and SCE alarms.

036 Alarm - System Alarms Displays A & B Side BER, Tx High APC, Remote Com-munication, TXU, SCU, and SYS. alarms.

037 Alarm - System LED Status Displays Major LED, Minor LED, Manual LED, and Sec-tion Fail LED status. Also Normal LED.

038 Alarm - Report Menu Allows you to view, clear, and print the alarm and event log.

039 Alarm - View Report Lists all alarms and events in the log by date and time stamp.

040 Status - Tx and Rx Path Displays on-line modules for Tx and Rx Path.050 Configuration Menu Lists Module Parameters, AIS Option, Calibrate Tx

Power, Date & Time, Line Lengths/Coding.051* Configuration - System /

Module ParametersDisplays System/Module Configuration and Parameters for Freq. Band, Capacity, Tx & Rx Protection, Battery, APC Option, SCU, ATDE, OWU, SCE, and Line Input Channels equipped. Also TX Power Option and NMU Software Revision.

052 Configuration - Select AIS Option

Allows you to select AIS option.

053 Configuration - Calibrate Tx Power Output

Allows you to enter the On-line TXU Output Power. Not available on CM6.

054 Configuration - Date and Time

Allows you to set the date and time.

057 Configuration-SYNDES Link

Allows you to set line length and coding for each chan-nel. Only available on 28DS1.

Table B-C. Local Display Screen Index (Continued)

Screen Number


Appendix B QuikLink


070 Control and Maintenance Menu

Lists Path Switching, Loopback, APC, and Power Ampli-fiers submenus. Transistor-Transistor Logic and Relays.

071 Control - Path Switching Set path switching for TXU-MOD, RXU-DEMOD, MUX-SYNDES, SCU, and WTU.

073 TTL I/O & Relays Displays the TTL input and Relay output control status, and allows the setting of TTL & Relay output control points.

081 Control - Loopback Menu Lists IF, MUX, SYNDES, SCU, and WTU loopback sta-tus and submenus. Clear All resets loopback to normal operation.

082 Control - IF Loopback Loop the local equipment and view the status of a local facility loopback. Not supported on radios with 3DS3 or higher capacity.

083 Control - MUX Loopback Loop the local equipment and view the status of a local facility loopback.

084 Control - 28DS1 SYNDES Loopback

Control - 3DS3–100BaseTScreens are also shown.

Select local or remote channels, individually or all at once. To monitor individual channel changes, enter the channel number. To monitor all channels at once, enter 99 and the screen will display <all>. Screen 84 also allows you to monitor and change the loopback status from local to remote equipment.

085 Control - SCU Loopback Loop the local equipment and view the status of a local facility loopback.

086 Control - WTU Loopback Loop the local equipment and view the status of a local facility loopback.

087 Control - APC Manual Turn APC Manual Mode On/Off, or return to the Auto Mode.

088 Control - Power Amplifiers Turn the power amplifiers On or Off for both A and B radios. Not available on CM11.

* Not all screen selections are available for use with each radio configuration, capacity, or frequency band. Review specific screen explanations for individual radio applicability.

Table B-C. Local Display Screen Index (Continued)

Screen Number


Microwave Networks


Screen Menu FlowchartsThe following section contains flowcharts (Figures B-2, B-3, B-4, B-5, and B-6) for the local radio maintenance screens. The screens allow for configuring, monitoring, controlling, and troubleshooting operations on the radio. The next subsection illustrates each screen in numerical order.

003PerformanceMonitoring

002Main Menu

020Alarm & Status

050System

Configuration

070Control &

Maintenance

F-0134-0

Figure B-2. Flowchart - Main Menus

LastSecond

003PerformanceMonitoring

004View Statistics

005View

Measurements

006Reset LinkCounters

Last60 Sec.

Last60 Min.

Last24 Hrs.

Last7 Days F-0135r

007View Comm

Ports

ResetCommPort

Figure B-3. Flowchart - Performance Monitoring Screens

Appendix B QuikLink


020Alarm & Status

021System

026SCU

Alarms

023MUX

Alarms

025MOD

Alarms

024DEMODAlarms

028TXU

Alarms

029RXU

Alarms

030OWU

Alarms

031SP PSUAlarms

022SYNDESAlarms

027ATDE

Alarms

035Alarm

Summary

036SystemAlarms

037System

LEDStatus

038AlarmLog

040Tx andRx Path

032RF PSUAlarms

033WTU

Alarms

034SCE

Status

F-1215

039AlarmReport

Figure B-4. Flowchart -Alarm and Status Screens

050System

Configuration

051System/Module

Parameters

053Calibrate

TxPower

054Date and

Time

052AIS

Options

System/ModuleParameters

WTUChannels

SYNDESChannels

F-1216

Figure B-5. Flowchart - Configuration Screens

Microwave Networks


Local Maintenance ScreensThis section illustrates and describes each local maintenance screen in numeric order. Use the flowcharts to navigate to a desired screen, then look for the screen in this section

070Control and

Maintenance

081Loopback/Monitoring

087APC

Control

088Power

AmplifierControl

071Path

Switching

SCU

MUX-SYNDES

(Any) ForcedSwitching

TXU-MOD

083MUX

Loopback

082IF/Baseband

Loopback

084SYNDES

Loopbacks

085SCU

Loopbacks

WTU

086WTU

Loopbacks

F-0138-0

ClearAll

RXU-DEMOD

073TTL I/O &

Relays

Figure B-6. Flowchart - Control and Maintenance Screens

Appendix B QuikLink

Page B-10 CM System Users Manual

001 - Product Label Screen

Radio Frequency and Capacity

Table B-D shows the possible radio frequencies for your radio. Frequency band is the number which comes before the letter G in the radio model name. The G indicates the frequency band in GHz. In the Radio Capacity Table, N indicates narrowband configuration.

CM radios have a master-slave relationship in a network. The Master label displays only if the NMU is equipped and set as a master.

This screen also shows the radio model, software revision, and copyright information.

A slave unit does not display any message. See Chapter 3, Section 7 for ACU switch settings.

002 - Main Menu

Menu Selections

Selection causes jump to the listed menu.

Item 1 shows a menu statistics or measurements, or to reset statistics.

Item 2 shows a menu to get to the alarm and status of the system or of any module.

Item 3 shows the configuration menu.

Item 4 shows the menu to set switching path, loopback, APC control, and power amplifier control.

Table B-D. Radio Frequency and CapacityFrequencies

Telestar 2G, 6G, or CM6

Telestar 7/8G, 10G, or CM7/8, and CM11

Capacities

4DS1N

8DS1, 12DS1, 28 DS1, DS3, 3 DS3

8E1N, 8E1, E3

4E1, 4 E1N

SONET OC3/STM3

2x100BaseT+DS3

!

"#$%&'

L 002 Esc Select _

Main Menu

>1. Performance Monitoring 2. Alarm and Status 3. Configuration 4. Control and Maintenance

Microwave Networks

CM System Users Manual Page B-11

003 - Performance Monitoring Menu

Menu Selections

Select 1 to view link statistics for last second, last 60 seconds, last 60 minutes, last 24 hours or last 7 days.

Select 2 to view performance measurements of System Temperature, TX power output at the antenna or filter, RX signal level at the antenna or filter, or slope amplitude stress.

Select 3 to view NMS and Auxiliary Communication Port statistics.

Select 4 to reset radio link side A, reset radio link side B, or to reset both radio link sides.

Select 5 to reset NMS and Auxiliary Communication Port statistics. A confirmation message will be shown requesting authorization to proceed with task, “Reset comm Port? (Y,1/N,0):”.

004 - View Link

Screen Elements

Use PgUp, PgDn to view link statistics for last second, last 60 seconds, last 60 minutes, last 24 hours, or last 7 days.

BER (bit-error rate) represents the bit errors delivered to the customer.

L 003 Esc Select _ o

Performance Monitoring >1. View Link 2. View Measurements 3. View Comm Ports 4. Reset Link 5. Reset Comm Port [94-04-07 10:32]

L 004 Esc PgUp PgDn .

Perf - View Link Last Second A Side B Side BER: ----- 1.0e-003 Frame Loss: Yes No

L 004 Esc PgUp PgDn o

Perf - View Link Last 60 Sec A Side B Side BER: 0.0e+000 8.7e-003 ES: 0 12 SES: 5 6 FLS: 2 4


Perf - View Link Last 60 Min A Side B Side BER: 0.0e+000 8.7e-003 ES: 0 12 SES: 5 6 FLS: 2 4


Perf - View Link Last 24 Hrs A Side B Side BER: 0.0e+000 8.7e-003 ES: 0 12 SES: 5 6 FLS: 2 4


Perf - View Statistics Last 7 Days A Side B Side BER: 0.0e+000 8.7e-003 ES: 0 12 SES: 5 6 FLS: 2 4

Appendix B QuikLink


ES (errored seconds) is a second with one or more parity errors.

SES (severely errored second) is any second with parity errors greater than 10-3.

Frame loss shows upon loss of framed data signals. No statistics are updated during frame loss events.

FLS (frame loss second) is any second with a a frame loss. During these events, BER calculation does not include frame-loss period.

Screen data gets updated once every second. For non-protected radios, B-side statistics are blank.

005 - View Measurements Screen

Screen Elements

System Temp displays in °F and °C. Measured on the ACU module.

Tx Power at Antenna is the power being delivered to the antenna by the transmitter. Only on-line transmitter measurement shows.

TX Power at Filter is the power being delivered by each TXU.

RSL at Antenna is the receive signal power present at the antenna port.

RSL at Filter is the receiver power present at each RXU.

RSL at Plug-in only displays for CM radios and is the receive power at the RXU.

Slope Amp Stress displays for CM radios and is the Slope Equalizer stress voltage. Any voltage out of range causes a TX alarm.

For non-protected radios, B-side statistics are blank.

()*+,-'.-/-$0 .!.!/1(*+ '''+#234!-/1(*+0#234!-.%+ '''+#4!-45!-.%+(,'#4!-4!-

%&4

()*+,-'.-/-$0 .!. -.34

%&4

391

39:;(3

Microwave Networks


006 - Reset Statistics Menu

Menu Selections

Select 1to reset both radio A and radio B.

Select 2 to reset radio A. The date and time of the last reset display next to the menu item.

Select 3 to reset radio B. The date and time of the last reset are display next to the menu item.

Note: Reset zeros all link counters. For non-protected radios, only item 2 is displayed.

007 - View Comm Ports Screen

Screen Elements

This screen displays the NMU Communication Port statistics. If your radio is not equipped with a NMU, the screen only displays a message to that effect.

The maximum number of statistical events displayed prior to Rx Overrun indication are limited to 4,294,967,295 for screen items 1 and 3. Items 2, 4, and 5 display up to 65,535 statistical events prior to counter overrun.

Page 2 displays Auxiliary Communication Port statistics. Statistical event are limited to the same number of entries stated above before counter overrun.

L 006 Esc Select 1

Perf - Reset Link

>1. Both Sides 2. A Side Only [93-11-10 08:00] 3. B Side Only [93-11-10 08:00]

Perf - View Comm PortsNMS Port Total Err Free Frames Rx: 4294967295 No of Err Frames: 1275 Total Err Free Chars Rx: 4294967295 No of Err Char Rx: 53612 No of Rx Overrun: 65535L 007 Esc PgUp PgDn o

Perf - View Comm Ports Auxiliary Port

Total Err Free Chars Rx: 4294967295 No of Err Char Rx: 36426 No of Rx Overrun: 65535


Appendix B QuikLink


020 - Alarm and Status Menu

Selection displays screen or menu of alarms and status for the item indicated.

Note: The ACU does not have its own alarms.

021 - System Alarm Menu

Menu Selections

Select 1 for view an alarm summary screen (035).

Select 2 to show state of system alarms.

Select 3 to show status of system LEDs.

Select 4 to display the alarm log.

Select 5 to show the on-line TX and RX paths.

Note: For non-protected radios, item 5 does not display.

L 020 Esc Select_

Alarm and Status

>1. SYSTEM 5. MOD 9. RXU 13. WTU 2. SYNDES 6. SCU 10. OWU 14. SCE 3. MUX 7. ATDE 11. SPPSU 4. DEMOD 8. TXU 12. RFPSU

L 021 Esc Select_

Alarm - SYSTEM

>1. Show Alarm Summary 2. Show System Alarms 3. Show System LED Status 4. View/Print Alarm Log 5. Show Tx and Rx Path

Microwave Networks


022 - SYNDES Alarm Screen

Screen Elements

Module Status indicates whether the module is operating normally (Normal) or is in alarm (Alarm.)

Service Status shows absent, standby, in-service. Absent means the module is required but not installed or an SP fuse is blown. Standby means the module is present but not in service. In-Svc means the module is carrying traffic.

Transmit and receive status shows a failure in either the transmit path or receive path. The path status that has the highest priority according to the list below is used as the composite module state.

1. Missing module or empty slot.

2. Alarm

3. In-Svc

4. Standby

5. Normal

Switch Confirm shows when the SYNDES fails to respond to a switch command on protected systems.

If the DS1 signal is absent at the line interface circuit for any channel configured as equipped, the appropriate alarm activates.

If any of the RX portion of the SYNDES is in alarm for a particular channel, the appropriate alarm activates.

DS3 Configurations

Input BER alarm indicates the bit error rate at the DS3 input exceeds 10-6

LOS at DS3 Input alarm is a loss of signal at the DS3 input to the SYNDES.

LOS at DS3 Output alarm is a loss of signal at the DS3 output from the SYNDES.

DS3 Rx PLL indicates receive side phase lock loop circuit has failed or is out of range.

! "#$ % &'( )

*+

,+! - +.+/+0+. +.+/+0+.1++21 1++210+++.+3/0 0+++.+3/02,++1, 2,++1,

+('+('2! +('.(',! +('3('+! +('+('2-+('.(',-+('3('+-

*,+

/('+! /('! /('/! /('+-/('-/('/-

*/

/! %-/! -/-/%4

*//

*+.."+$

-$56!$--$56%7

Page 2. 100BaseT

L 022 Esc PgUp PgDn

Alarm - SYNDES A Side B Side

PDH INPUT LOS: Normal Normal PDH RX PLL: Normal Normal REC MUX CLOCK: Normal Normal RECEIVE FRAME: Normal Normal

Appendix B QuikLink


023 - MUX Alarm Screen Screen Elements



Transmit and receive status shows a failure in either the transmit path or receive path. The path status that has the highest priority according to the list below is used as the composite module state.

1. Missing module or empty slot.

2. Alarm

3. In-Svc

4. Standby

5. Normal

Switch Confirm shows when the MUX fails to respond to a switch command on protected systems.

Note: For non-protected radios, B side MUX alarms are not displayed and RX B indications are displayed as “– – “.

Ch 1-Ch 4, Ch 5-Ch 8, and Ch 9-Ch 12 Tx Data refer to data and clock from the TX SYNDES.

Rx A Input Data and Rx B Input Data indicate that the data received from DEMOD A or DEMOD B is not valid.

Rx Out-of-Frame activates if the data supplied to the on-line MUX, from DEMOD A or DEMOD B, is out-of-frame.

MUX Output Alarm shows status of MUX output side.

DS3 Input Alarm refers to data and clock from Tx side of the SYNDES.

/

7

! "#$ % &'( )

7

(6+(62$4(6.(6,$4('3(6+$4%4--)87-/

+

/

7

/! %4--)87-

/

7

%4-)8%4-)8%4! %4!

/

/

/

7

-$56!$%%7-$-88%

+.."+$

Microwave Networks


024 - DEMOD Alarm Screen

Screen Elements



The DEMOD alarms link to internal stress voltages that represent the control voltages for the adaptive control loops within the DEMOD. Any voltages out of range cause an alarm.

VCO is 70 MHz VCO control voltage.

Quadrature is control voltage for quadrature adjustment.

Frame Loss is control voltage for frame losses.

Note: For non-protected radios, B side DEMOD alarms are not displayed.

025 - MOD Alarm Screen

Screen Elements



Switch Confirm shows when the MOD fails to respond to a switch command on protected systems.

Output LOS indicates a MOD hardware failure.

Input LOS is an indication of invalid or no data from the MUX.

Note: For non-protected radios, B side MOD alarms are not displayed.

2

-

! "#9(-:

2

-!; !-))!(<:; :-)):(<

2

-(; 5 #99(7-8

.

-

! "#&'( )--! -

.

-=.9#.9#(!-(:-!8 <

Appendix B QuikLink


026 - SCU Alarm Screen

Screen Elements



Hardware Status shows that the hardware is operating normally (Normal) or is in alarm (Alarm).


The second screen shown displays for radios without an SCU

Note: For non-protected radios, B side SCU alarms are not dis-played.

027 - ATDE Alarm ScreenNot on radios with 3DS3 or higher capacity.

Screen Elements



The second screen shown displays for radios without an ATDE.

Note: For non-protected radios, B side ATDE alarms are not displayed.

L 026 Esc

Alarm - SCU A Side B Side

Module Status: Normal Normal Service Status: In-Svc Standby Hardware Status: Normal Normal Switch Confirm: Normal Normal

Alarm - SCU

Unit Non-equipped

L 026 Esc

L 027 Esc

Alarm - ATDE A Side B Side

Module Status: Normal Normal Service Status: In-Svc Standby

L 027 Esc

Alarm - ATDE

Unit Non-equipped

Microwave Networks


028 - TXU Alarm Screen Screen Elements

Module Status indicates whether the transmitter is operating normally (Normal) or is in alarm (Alarm.)



APC Confirm indicates the TXU failed to respond to an automatic power control command.

LO indicates the operational status of the synthesized local oscillator in the TXU. An alarm condition is reported if:

1. There is insufficient drive level to the mixer in the conver-sion section of the TXU or,

2. The microwave oscillator is not phase-locked to the internal reference.

Tx ALC indicates the operational status of the ALC (automatic level control) circuitry in the conversion section of the TXU.

Tx AGC indicates the operational status of the AGC (automatic gain control) circuitry in the power amplifier section of the TXU.

Tx Power Level indicates a low RF output (or loss of signal) from the TXU.

Fan shows the operational status of the RFU chassis fan.

PLL shows the operational status of the phase-locked loop.

Note: For non-protected radios, B side TXU alarms are not displayed.

,

$7

! "#&'( )(( )

+%

,

$7

$4& 8

% &

,

$7

$4& 8 %9

%6'&

Appendix B QuikLink


029 - RXU Alarm Screen Screen Elements

Module Status indicates whether the receiver is operating normally (Normal) or is in alarm (Alarm.)

Service Status shows absent, standby, in-service. Absent means the module not installed or an SP fuse is blown. Standby means the module is not in service. In-Svc means the module is carrying traffic.

LO indicates the operational status of the synthesized local oscillator in the RXU. An alarm occurs if either:

1. There is insufficient drive level to the mixer in the conversion section of the RXU.

2. The microwave oscillator is not phase-locked to the internal reference.

AGC indicates the operational status of the automatic gain control circuitry of the receiver IF amplifier.

Preamplifier shows the condition of the preamp (if used.)

Regulated Voltage shows condition of the low noise amplifier section of the RXU.

Note: For non-protected radios, B side RXU alarms are not displayed.

(&!+!

+-67 .!.!

!,.+,#-+-+. &.+,#8'. &.+'!9%:#-+-+ ;#-+-+,+!+#-+-+

%$&

Microwave Networks


030 - OWU Alarm Screen

Screen Elements


Service Status shows absent, standby, in-service. Absent means the module not installed or an SP fuse is blown. Standby means the module is not in service. In-Svc means the module is carrying traffic.

The OWU is always in-service when present. The second screen shows for radios not equipped with an OWU.

031 - SP PSU Alarm Screen

Screen Elements


Service Status shows absent, standby, in-service. Absent means the module not installed or an SP fuse is blown. Standby means the module is not in service. In-Svc means the module is supplying DC to the SP shelf and modules.

Supply Status indicates a fault on the DC primary side of the PSU. (This may also indicate a blown fuse.)

Note: For non-protected radios, B side SP PSU alarms are not displayed.

L 030 Esc

Alarm - OWU

Module Status: Normal Service Status: In-Svc

L 030 Esc

Alarm - OWU

Unit Non-equipped

L 031 Esc

Alarm - SP PSU A Side B Side

Module Status: Normal Normal Service Status: In-Svc Standby Supply Status: Normal Normal

Appendix B QuikLink


032 - RF PSU Alarm Screen

Screen Elements


Service Status shows absent, standby, in-service. Absent means the module not installed or an SP fuse is blown. Standby means the module is not in service. In-Svc means the module is supplying DC to the RF shelf and modules.

Supply Status indicates a fault on the DC primary side of the PSU. (This may also indicate a blown fuse.)

Note: For non-protected radios, B side RF PSU alarms are not displayed.

033 - WTU Alarm Screen

Screen Elements




Ch Input LOS indicates a loss of signal for the digital line input to the WTU.

The second screen shows for radios not equipped with a WTU.

Note: B side WTU alarms do not display in non-protected ra-dios.

%&(7(<'

+-0(.7 .!.!

!,.+,#-+-+. &.+,#8'. &8'. &.,.+,#-+-+

%&(7

+-0(.7 .!.!

+#-+-+34.,#-+-+"4.,#-+-+

(+

L 033 Esc

Alarm - WTU A Side B Side

Module Status: Normal Normal Service Status: In-Svc Standby Switch Confirm: Normal Normal Ch.Input LOS: Normal Normal

L 033 Esc

Alarm - WTU

Unit Non-equipped

Microwave Networks


034 - SCE Alarm Screen

Screen Elements

Unit Status shows the status of the SCE unit. In-Svc shows that the unit is communicating with the ACU. Absent means the unit is NOT communicating with the ACU.

The second screen shows for radios not equipped with an SCE unit.

035 - Alarm Summary Screen

Screen Elements

This screen summarizes the alarms for all modules in a system.

A indicates an A-side alarm.

B indicates a B-side alarm.

AB indicates an alarm on both A and B sides.

X indicates an alarm on a module without redundant units such as OWU, ACU, SYSTEM and SCE.

L 034 Esc

Alarm - SCE

Unit Status: In Service

L 034 Esc

Alarm - SCE

Unit Non-equipped

L 035 Esc

Alarm - Alarm Summary

SYNDES( ) TXU (A ) SPPSU( ) MUX ( B) RXU ( ) RFPSU( ) DEMOD ( ) SCU ( ) ATDE (AB) MOD ( ) OWU ( ) WTU ( ) SYSTEM(X ) SCE ( )

Appendix B QuikLink


036 - System Alarms Screen

Screen Elements

BER Major is an error rate greater than 10-3 errors per second.

BER Minor is an error rate greater than 10-9 errors per second.

Tx HIGH APC indicates that APC is off, but should be on.

Remote Communication shows a failure in the overhead communications channel between the local and remote radio ACU.

If APC option is disabled, the Tx High APC field shows “– – – – –”.

For 7/8 GHz radio configurations, the Tx High APC field shows “– – – – –”.

The second page describes problems between modules and remote units.

Note: For non-protected radios, B side alarms are presented as “– – – – –”.

037 - System LED Status Screen

Screen Elements

Normal LED indicates that the summary status alarms are not needed.

Major LED alarm indicates a service-affecting condition of an on-line unit that is in alarm.

Minor LED alarm indicates a non service-affecting alarm.

Manual LED alarm indicates that a switch plane has been left in a locked (manual) condition. Manual LED on the access panel flashes when a loopback is on.

Section Fail indicates a remote radio Major Alarm.

L 036 Esc PgUp PgDn

Alarm - System Alarms

BER (A Side): Major BER (B Side): Minor Tx High APC: Alarm Remote Communication: Normal

Alarm - System Alarms

TXU: APC option not the same at remote site. SCU: Remote end SCU is not present. Sys: Remote node does not have the same protection as local.L 036 Esc PgUp PgDn O

/0

#->-88 -88 !?!; 8-88

Microwave Networks


038 - Alarm Log Menu

Menu Selections

Select 1 to view the Alarm Log.

Select 2 to clear the Alarm Log. The date and time of the last clear displays next to the menu item.

Select 3 to print the Alarm Log. If a printer is hooked up to the radio, the alarm log prints.

If you are using a PC and you wish to transfer the alarm log information to a spreadsheet program, you must first capture the information using the appropriate commands in your communications software, then convert it to the spreadsheet program.

039 - Alarm Log Screen

This screen displays a chronological list of alarms and events.

The first column indicates the event number, starting at 00000, since the last ACU reset. The last 512 events are stored here for one year.

The second column shows the date on which the alarm occurred (YYYY-MM-DD).

The third column indicates the time at which the alarm occurred.

The fourth column indicates the severity of the alarm:

M = Major alarmm = Minor alarmE = EventThe fifth column indicates the alarm code. Refer to Appendix D for a list of all alarm codes in numerical order.

The sixth column indicates the status of the event (C - Clear, or S - Set).

Note: For Alarm Codes 119, 120, 121, and 166, C means Failed Switch, and S means Successful Switch.

The seventh column indicates where the alarm occurred.

SYS = SystemRX = ReceiverTX = TransmitterRFP = RF Power SupplySYN = Synthesizer/DesynthesizerMUX = Multiplexer/DemultiplexerDEM = DemodulatorATD = Automatic Time-Delay EqualizerMOD = ModulatorSCU = Service Channel UnitSPP = SP Power SupplyOWU = OrderwireThe eighth column indicates which radio is affected: A or B, and L, R, c, r, or N.

L 038 Esc Select_

Alarm - Report

>1. View Alarm Log 2. Clear Alarm Log[93-11-10 09:00] 3. Print Alarm Log

L 039 Esc PgUp PgDn

Alarm - Report >Bottom Top00060 1999-01-08 06:55:11 E 069 S MUX A00061 1999-01-09 08:00:23 m 069 S DEM B00062 1999-01-09 18:34:12 m 073 S MUX B00063 1999-01-09 22:02:42 E 119 S SYN B00064 1999-01-10 12:38:33 M 116 C MUX B00065 1999-01-10 13:34:56 m 073 S MUX A

Appendix B QuikLink


040 - TX and RX Path Status

This screen displays the on-line modules in the transmit and receive paths.

Note: The letter in the parenthesis indicates the on-line side (A or B) of a redundancy protected system. “?” indicates an un-known module is on-line; typically caused by a hardware fail-ure in the path.

This screen is not used in non-protected systems.G

050 - System Configuration Menu

Menu Selections

Select 1 for Module Parameters.

Select 2 for AIS options.

Select 3 for TX power output calibration.

Select 4 for Date and Time menu.

Select 5 Line Lengths/Coding menu (28 DS1, only.)

L 040 Esc

Status - Tx and Rx Path

Tx: SYNDES-MUX(B) -> MOD/TXU(A) SCU(B) WTU(A)Rx: SYNDES-MUX(A) <- DEMOD/RXU(?) SCU(A) WTU(B)

L 050 Esc Select _

Config - SYSTEM1. Module Parameters2. AIS Option3. Calibrate Tx Power4. Date & Time5. Line Length/Format

Microwave Networks


051 - System/Module Parameters Screen This screen covers options defined by the SP shelf backplane connections and by the setting of switch S3 on the ACU. (See Chapter 3).

NMU version indicates the firmware level of the Network Management System. NMU version only displays when the radio has the NMU option.

Frequency Band may be one of 2, 6, 7/8, 10, or 11 GHz.

Capacity may be one of4DS1 - 16QAM8DS1 - 128QAMDS3 + 1 DS1 - 64QAM4DS1s - 8QAM4DS1s - 64QAM12 DS1s - 128QAM28DS1 - 64QAM3DS3 - 64QAMSONET/SDH - 128QAM (see 155-Mbps manual)100BaseT - 128QAM (see 100Base-t manual)

Tx/Rx Protection may be one of:Hot StandbySpace DiversityFreq DiversityUnprotected

Battery may be 48 or 24-volt. If optional modules are programmed, but not present, the Minor alarm LED on the access panel lights.

APC may be Enabled, Disabled, or forced active indefinitely (Forever; see Chapter 2–Automatic Power Control). Not available on Telestar radios.

SCU may be:Non-EquippedNon-Protected/AbsentNon-Protected/NarrowbandProtected/Both AbsentProtected/Narrowband

ATDE may be Equipped or Non-equipped. 3DS3 DEMOD has an integral ATDE.

OWU may be Non-equipped, Equipped / No. xxx, Equipped Absent.

SCE may be Equipped or Non-equipped.

Page 4 shows the equipped DS1 SYNDES and DS3 WTU channels.

Telestar 7-GHz Radio

Page 4 shows the equipped low noise amplifier and Tx power option.

.+

( )#59 %9@@@@@8A* ++;6B(#-$56$4 6 "#%4 6 "##2,9

.+

( )#5(- "58 -C$ A( $A-CA50(A

.+

( )#5A(' AA-

.+

( )#5C$A('

+A A AA

2('

2C$('

.+

( )#5&A A$4&- 6'

2$0;6B

.+

( )#5

$7&- 6

/

Appendix B QuikLink


052 - AIS Options Screen

This screen allows you to program the SYNDES Rx to output AIS if the BER exceeds 10-3. When the AIS feature is disabled, the screen displays NO.

Note: For non-protected radios, B side setting is not displayed.

053 -Tx Output Power Calibration Screen

The CM radios do not require calibration.

Follow alignment procedure outlined in Chapter 5, Transmitter Output Power and Monitor, to calibrate Tx Power Output. Enter the set value into these configuration screens.

Note: If a power amplifier is turned off, or APC H is on, the display will show no reading, regardless of the configuration.

To calibrate the off-line TXU, select item 3, then press Enter. A warning message, [WARNING: Disconnect Off-line TXU First!], displays.

. '

( )!-

!&' %D+/ED-

( )("$4&-

"

./

(

Microwave Networks


CAUTION!Ensure the off-line TXU, A or B, is physically

disconnected from the RF Distribution section.

Primary path data will be lost if the off-line TXU is not disconnected from the signal path.

Once the off-line TXU is disconnected from the signal path, press <Enter>.

A message is displayed: “[Is Off-line TX disconnected? (1=Yes)” Verify that the off-line TXU is disconnected, enter 1, and press Enter. The off-line power amplifier will turn ON for five minutes.

A message “[Hit Any Key to recover. 5 Min. Left]” displays. Press any key to terminate the power amplifier time-out period, and clear the display.

Note: This function is only available on local maintenance screens, and not available to remote users.

054 - Date and Time Menu

This menu allows you to change the date and time. If the radios are communicating over the link, changing the date/time at the local (near-end) radio will also change the date/time of the remote (far-end) radio to the same date/time.

L 054 Esc Enter: 1997-10-31 00:00

Config - Date and Time

Date[yyyy-mm-dd]: 1997-10-31 Time[hh:mm:ss] : 00:00:00

Appendix B QuikLink


057 - 28DS1 SYNDES Configuration Screen Use Screen 057 to set each channel line length or to set the channel as unequipped. Also set line coding for each of the 28 channels.

From the line length configuration screen press PAGE UP/DOWN to display the channel you want, and the press ENTER.

The screen prompts for a channel to configure. Enter a channel number (99 for all) and press ENTER.

The line length screen for your channel opens. Select the number of the appropriate length and press ENTER.

Set line coding for each channel the same way.

For more information about configuring the SYNDES see Section 3-11.

Microwave Networks


070 - Control and Maintenance Menu

Menu Selections

Item 1 sets path switching on the TXU-MOD, RXU-DEMOD, MUX-SYNDES, SCU, and WTU switch planes to on or off, and lock (manual) or automatic.

Item 2 sets loopback for IF (baseband on Telestar radios,) MUX, SYNDES, SCU, WTU, and clears all loopbacks.

Item 3 toggles APC on or off manually, or sets APC to automatic.

Item 4 toggles power amplifiers on or off.

Item 5 sets the monitor and controls for the ACU/NMU external TTL and relay inputs and outputs.

Note: Items 1 and 2 are not used on non-protected systems.

071 - Path Switching Screen

This screen displays the current Tx/Rx on-line status and allows setting of TX and RX path switching.

Enter toggles between the A and B side radio, Auto, and Lock switching modes.

If alarms are outstanding on desired on-line modules, the next screen will be the Forced Switching menu.

Auto selects the switching mode to function under radio control. Under automatic radio control the ACU monitors alarm conditions of the radio and determines optimum on-line module selection.

Lock maintains the current TX/RX selection on-line. The ACU continues to monitor radio alarm conditions without initiating switch selections. A lock switch selection is maintained until modified by an automatic switch selection.

Path switching is unavailable for non-protected systems, which the screen indicates.

0@

( D+*'&' *"</*(2*&).*$$!5-F%#

0+ ('

('&' $7%7$7-D%7-7<<(<<C$<G%#H+IJIKE

0+ '

('&' $7%7$7-%7-7D<(<C$<<

0+

('&'

"

6 "# # H66 6K( )

8A # #H88K( )

HK( )

Appendix B QuikLink


073 - TTL and Relay I/O Status Screens TTL I/O Status

This screen shows radio TTL input status and output control points.

Point indicates the four (NMU not equipped) or eight (NMU equipped) TTL input points available for external connection.

Input Status displays the specific TTL logic value of individual input points.

Output Control displays the specific logic value of individual TTL output control points (0 = Off, 1 = On).

Note: This screen is not available on radios not equipped with an NMU.

Relay I/O Status

This screen shows radio output control points status. Page 2 shows output control points status and allows the setting of individual relay output control points

Point indicates the four relay control points available for external connection.

Output Control displays the specific logic value of individual relay output control points (0 = Off, 1 = On).

Remote TTL In displays the status of the relay output control point links to the cross hop TTL input. This line displays the remote TTL input point number if the relay control point links to a remote input, or displays No if it doesn’t link to remote TTL input.

Output Relay output setting. Rmt - remote control: On - local set on, Off - local set off.

Ctrl - TTL I/O

Point: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Input Status: 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 Output Control: 1 0 1 0

[Press Enter to Change Output ]L 073 Esc PgUp PgDn o

Page 1: TTL I/O Status for NMU Equipped Radio

Ctrl - TTL I/O

Point: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Input Status: 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 Output Control: 1 0 1 0

[ Output: 1 0 1 0 ]L 073 Esc o

Page 1: Relay I/O Status

Ctrl - Relays

Point: 1 2 3 4 Output Control: On Off Off Off Remote TTL In: 5 6 No No

[Press Enter to Change Output ]L 073 Esc PgUp PgDn

Ctrl - Relays

Point: 1 2 3 4 Output Control: On On Off Off Remote TTL In: 5 6 No No

[ Output: Rmt Rmt On Off ]L 073 Esc Up Dn L R <Enter>

Page 2: TTL I/O Status for NMU Equipped Radio

Page 2: Relay I/O Status

Microwave Networks


081 - Loopback Monitoring Screen

Screen Selections

Select 1 for IF (baseband for 7-GHz Telestar) local loopback.

Select 2 for MUX local loopback.

Select 3 for SYNDES loopback.

Select 4 for SCU loopback.

Select 5 for WTU loopback.

Select 6 to clear all loopbacks.

Note: The status is the summary of all the loopback states of the module. If a module is not present in the radio, “-----” is displayed.

082 - IF/Baseband Loopback Screen

This screen allows you to turn the IF or baseband loopback on or off for the A and B radios.

Notes: For non-protected radios, side B loopback is not dis-played. For remote user request, “Not Allowed to Change” message is displayed.

Note: The ACU software does not support IF loopback on ra-dio with 3DS3 or higher capacity.

Establish IF loopback using an external 50-ohm cable (P/N 3085397H01). Connect the cable between Mod and Demod MCX connectors.

To perform the IF loopback procedure, refer to IF Local Loop-back in Chapter 2.

,++

("<#

D+*-882*(-88*7-.*C$-88/*-881*(

, ('

("<L!8D

"<D-88-88G#H+IJIKE

(2,+%

Appendix B QuikLink


083 - MUX Loopback Screen

This screen allows you to turn the MUX loopback on or off for the A and B radios.

Notes: For non-protected radios, side B loopback is not displayed.For remote user request, “Not Allowed to Change” message is displayed.

084 - SYNDES Loopback Screen

This screen allows you to turn the SYNDES loopback on or off for the local and remote radios.

To change the loopback status of the local or remote radio, select the appropriate radio with the Left or Right Arrow key, and press Enter. The Local-Lpbk status indication will toggle between “OFF” and “ON”.

To enable or disable 28DS1 Monitoring, and specify channel selection, use the Left or Right Arrow key to choose Monitoring for the local or remote unit, and press Enter.

“[Enter Channel Number, 0 = off: 00]” message is displayed. Enter channel number to be monitored (01...12) and press the Enter key to enable the monitoring function. If you would like to monitor all channels at once, enter 99, and ALL will be displayed for the channel entry.

Note: For non-protected radios, B side and remote loopback is not displayed.

Note: The Ctrl-Loopback screen now indicates which side/channel is “Online” and which is “Off”.

Note: 3DS3 Screens are on the following page.

%&'&+'+

%9+&=>76?

%&+%9+&= .!.!?:00:00@ ,.,ABCA2

%&'+'.+

%9+&=>.B<.?

%&+-:''.B<.:00?:00@'&+'',-9CA))C$$A+'#

1

Microwave Networks


084 - 3DS3-100BaseT SYNDES Loopback Screen

This screen allows you to turn the SYNDES loopback on or off for the local and remote 3DS3 radios.

To change the loopback status of the local or remote radio, select the appropriate radio with the left or right Arrow key, and press Enter.

Enter channel number to monitor (1-3) and press the Enter key to enable the monitoring function. To monitor all channels at once, enter 99, and ALL will display instead of the channel number.

The third screen displays a Remote Loopback.

085 - SCU Loopback Screen

This screen allows you to set side A or B SCU local and remote loopback On or Off.

Notes: For non-protected radios, side B loopback is not dis-played. If your radio is not equipped with a SCU, the screen displays a message to that effect.

086 - WTU Loopback Screen

This screen is available due to the presence of optional equipment. It allows you to set side A or B WTU local and remote loopback On or Off.

Notes: For non-protected radios, side B loopback is not dis-played. If your radio is not equipped with a WTU, the screen displays a message to that effect.

,2 '

("<LD

%- -88D-88

,2 '

("<LD

%- D-('*+

,2 '

("<LD

%- D=%D-ML=

//

-$56F+$

,2 '

("<LD

%

-88-88

%&'&+'+

%9+&=>.7?

%&+%9=-%9= <+ '+?:00:00:00:00@ ,.,ABCA2

%"&'&+'+

%9+&=>D/7?%&+%9=- %9=<.4#:00?:00:<++4#:00:00:00@ ,.,ABCA2

Appendix B QuikLink


087 - APC Option Menu

This menu allows you to turn APC Off or On for both the A and B radios.

This menu is not available for Telestar 7/8 GHz radios.

CAUTION: Entering 99 will cause the radio to maintain its current status permanently. Before entering 99, make sure you want to maintain the current status of APC ON

or APC OFF permanently.

For non-protected radios, there is no B-side APC control.

Menu Selections

Select 1 for APC on manual mode: APC ON.

Select 2 for APC off manual mode: APC OFF.

Select 3 for APC auto mode.

088 - Power Amplifier Control Screen

This screen allows you to toggle the power amplifier on or off.

This function is not available on CM radios.

Note: For non-protected radios, side B power amp control is not available. Remote users (R or r) cannot turn both amplifi-ers off to ensure the RF path is not shut down.

,0+

(( -88$-D+* $ (-* $ (-88/*% $$-

((

-$!(

,0

C'("J( " (-$-C% "

C'( " (-$-C%"

,, '

(&)

D--

(&)

&$$ -88

,, '

$05,;6B%

$%-

Microwave Networks


Appendix B QuikLink


CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page C-1

1.0 IntroductionUse the following tables to verify the configuration of your radio. Mark current settings as a checklist and configuration record. The tables are also found in the individual sections of Chapter 3 that detail radio modules.

Table C-A. 8209302-00 Access Panel Configuration Settings ............................C-2Table C-B. MGN8112 Access Panel Configuration Settings ..............................C-2Table C-C. SP Backplane Jumper Settings ..........................................................C-3Table C-D. TXU IF BPF/LO Board Jumper Settings ..........................................C-3Table C-E. RXU Control Board MLN7905A Jumper Settings ...........................C-4Table C-F. ACU Jumper Settings ........................................................................C-4Table C-G. ACU DIP Switch Settings .................................................................C-5Table C-H. MOD 8000514-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH) ..............C-5Table C-I. DEMOD 8000515-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH) .........C-6Table C-J. MUX 8000513-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH) ..............C-6Table C-K. SYNDES 8000516-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH) ........C-6Table C-L. SCU Jumper Settings.........................................................................C-6Table C-M. SCU Switch S1 (CH1) and S2 (CH2) Settings..................................C-6Table C-N. OWU Jumper Settings.......................................................................C-7Table C-O. OWU Switch Settings........................................................................C-8Table C-P. MLN7330 WTU Jumper Settings .....................................................C-8Table C-Q. MLN7330 WTU Switch Settings ......................................................C-8Table C-R. 8000608-00 WTU Equalizer Control / Line Length Settings ...........C-8Table C-S. 8000608-00 WTU Line Code Select Settings ...................................C-9Table C-T. MLN7329 (E1) Jumper Settings .......................................................C-9Table C-U. MLN7329 (E1) WTU Switch Settings ..............................................C-9Table C-W. NMU Switch S1 Settings.................................................................C-10Table C-X. NMU Switch S2 Settings.................................................................C-10Table C-V. NMU Jumper Settings .....................................................................C-10

Appendix CConfiguration Tables

Appendix C Configuration Tables

Page C-2 5/12/04 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual

Table C-A. 8209302-00 Access Panel Configuration Settings

SWITCH 1DS3 3DS3 28DS1100BaseT

+ 1DS3SONET

ElectricalSONETOptical

S3-1 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS3-2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS3-3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS3-4 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS3-5 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS3-6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS3-7 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS3-8 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS4-1 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS4-2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS4-3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS4-4 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS4-5 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFFS4-6 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFFS4-7 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFFS4-8 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS5-1 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS5-2 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS5-3 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS5-4 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS5-5 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFFS5-6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS6 P1 P2 P2 P1 P2 P2

Table C-B. MGN8112 Access Panel Configuration Settings

(DS1, DS1N)

Rocker Setting Function Rocker Setting Function









Microwave Networks


*Select only one jumper according to desired channel capacity.







28DS1, DS3, 3DS3, and SONET/SDH (MGN8112B)Jumpers on the rear of the access panel

Jumper SettingE1, E2 1-2 = 1DS3 SYNDES

2-3 = 3DS3 SYNDES

Jumper blocks on Network Bridge Interface (MLN8098B) Module

East West Port ConfigurationE4 (in) E10(in) ACU/NMU—Master/SlaveE5 E12 East/West—Omni-directional

Table C-C. SP Backplane Jumper Settings

Jumper Setting Function

E1 Strapped Enables Terminal operation E4 Strapped* Enables 4 DS1/4DS1N (8/16 QAM) operationE5 Strapped* Enables 8 DS1 (32 QAM) operationE6 Strapped* Enables 12 DS1/8DS1N (128 QAM) operationE7 Strapped* Enables 28DS1/1DS3/3DS3 (64 QAM) operationE2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 17 Not used

Table C-D. TXU IF BPF/LO Board Jumper Settings


119 MHz MLN8175 MLN8275 1-2126 MHz MLN8175 MLN8275 2-3150 MHz MLN8110 MLN8210 1-2 1-2 1-2151,614 MHz MLN8110 MLN8210 1-2 1-2 2-3154 MHz MLN8110 MLN8210 1-2 2-3 2-3160 MHz MLN8110 MLN8210 2-3 1-2 1-2161 MHz MLN8110 MLN8210 2-3 1-2 2-3168 MHz MLN8108 MLN8209 1-2

Table C-B. MGN8112 Access Panel Configuration Settings(Continued)

(DS1, DS1N)

Rocker Setting Function Rocker Setting Function



175 MHz MLN8108 MLN8208 1-2 1-2182 MHz MLN8108 MLN8208 2-3 2-3196 MHz MLN8107 MLN8207 1-2245 MHz MLN8106 MLN8206 1-2 1-2266 MHz MLN8106 MLN8206 2-3 2-3300 MHZ MLN8176 MLN8276 1-2 1-2305.56 MHz MLN8176 MLN8276 2-3 2-3311.32 MHz MLN8176 MLN8276 1-2 1-2

Table C-E. RXU Control Board MLN7905A Jumper SettingsJumper Setting Label Function

E1 1-2 RF<LO2-3 RF>LO

Sideband Option Sets unit for upper or lower sideband. Depends on bandwidth option.

E2 2-3 AUTO MAN/AUTO Factory test and adjustment.E3, E4 2-3 1DS1/DS3 (10 MHz)

1-2 3DS3 (30 MHz)Bandwidth Option Sets appropriate channel bandwidth

for system capacity.

Table C-F. ACU Jumper Settings


E1 1-2 Normal operation2-3 Factory test



E4 1-2 ACO disables audible and visual2-3 ACO disables audible only

E5 1-2 ACU fail causes minor alarm only2-3 ACU fail causes major and minor alarm

E6 1-2 4-Port NMU (NMU Revision C or later)2-3 Normal NMU (NMU Revision A or B)

Table C-D. TXU IF BPF/LO Board Jumper Settings


Microwave Networks


Table C-G. ACU DIP Switch Settings

Switch Rocker Setting Function Enabled

NOTE: Switches can be marked OPEN or DOWN. OPEN/DOWN is OFF as labeled.S2 1 Closed Service channel not equipped

Open Service channel equipped2 Closed Service channel non-protected

Open Service channel protected3 Closed WTU non-protected

Open WTU protected4 Closed ATDE not equipped

Open ATDE equipped5 Closed Orderwire not equipped

Open Orderwire equipped6 Closed WTU not equipped

Open WTU equipped7 Closed

*OpenAPC On at Power Up – DisabledAPC ON at Power Up – Enable

8 Closed Status & Control Extender not equippedOpen Status & Control Extender equipped

S3 1, 2, 3 Closed, Closed, Closed TX/RX Hot StandbyClosed, Closed, Open TX Hot Standby; RX Space DiversityClosed, Open, Closed TX/RX Space DiversityClosed, Open, Open TX/RX Non-protectedOpen, Closed, Closed TX Non-protected; RX Space DiversityOpen, Closed, Open TX/RX Frequency Diversity

4, 5 Closed, Closed 2 GHzClosed, Open 6 and 11 GHz (CM)Open, Closed 10 GHzOpen, Open 7/8 GHz

6,7 Closed, Closed 48 Vdc batteryOpen, Closed 24 Vdc battery

8 Closed APC option enabledOpen APC option disabled

* Set S3, 8 to Closed to work. With current radio firmware: Manual LED will not light. Screen 087 (Appendix B) is disabled.

Table C-H. MOD 8000514-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH)Jumper Setting Function Enabled

E1 Open For factory testsE2 Not a jumper I Base Band Out connectorE3 Not a jumper Q Base Band Out connectorE4 Not a jumper 70-MHz Monitor connectorE5 Not a jumper Clk OUT connectorE6 Open For factory testE7 Installed Connects Q DAC to Base Band filterE8 Open For factory testE9 Installed Connects I DAC to Base Band filter



Table C-I. DEMOD 8000515-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH)

Jumper/Switch Setting Function

JP8 1-2 Normal operationS1-1 OFFS1-2 OFFS1-3 ONS1-4 OFF

Table C-J. MUX 8000513-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH)


JP4 1-2 FEC Enable—Normal operation2-3 FEC Disable

Table C-K. SYNDES 8000516-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH)


JP2 1-2 Optical operation2-3 Electrical operation

JP3 1-2 Channel equipped (normal operation)2-3 Channel un-equipped (Disable RX Alarm)

Table C-L. SCU Jumper Settings


J1 1-2 High gain (23 dB) on VF Channel 2, -16 dBm input, +7 dBm output2-3 Low gain (0 dB) on VF Channel 2, -3.5 dBm input, -3.5 dBm output

J2 1-2 High gain (23 dB) on VF Channel 1, -16 dBm input, +7 dBm output2-3 Low gain (0 dB) on VF Channel 1, -3.5 dBm input, -3.5 dBm output

J4 1-2 Oscillator Test2-3 Oscillator enable

Table C-M. SCU Switch S1 (CH1) and S2 (CH2) Settings

Switch Position



Factory defaults in bold: Not used, Normal, 2 stop bits, 1 parity bit, 8 data bits, 9.6 kbps1 OFF Not used2 ON Bypass data channel *

OFF Normal data channel operation 3 ON 1 stop bit

OFF 2 stop bits4 ON No parity bit

OFF 1 parity bit5 ON 7 bit data

OFF 8 bit data

Microwave Networks


1 Select one ring duration2 Select one ring tone3 Select one ring rate4 Select one VF channel 23 gain adjust5 Select one VF channel 13 gain adjust6 Select one AUX out enable7 Select one handset out enable8 Select one AUX output level

6, 7, 8 ON, ON, ON 19.2 kbps data rateON, ON, OFF 9.6 kbps data rateON, OFF, ON 4.8 kbps data rateON, OFF, OFF 2.4 kbps data rateOFF, ON, ON 1.2 kbps data rateOFF, ON, OFF 0.6 kbps data rateOFF, OFF, ON 0.3 kbps data rateOFF, OFF, OFF 0.15 kbps data rate

* Bypass mode lets the SCU automatically adjust to the pattern and format of incoming data, but is not recommended for use above 2.4 kbps. In Normal operation SCU DIP-switch settings must match the pattern and format of incoming data.

Table C-N. OWU Jumper Settings


E1 1-2 Factory settingJ1 1-2 Not used



7-8 Ring duration continuous1









25-26 AUX out enable on-hook (controlled by off-hook switch)6

27-28 AUX out enable continuous (AUX output always On)6

29-30 Handset out enable off-hook (controlled by off-hook switch)7

31-32 Handset out enable continuous (speaker always On)7

33-34 AUX output level -3.5 dBm (to hook up external speaker)8

35-36 AUX output level +7 dBm (to hook up external speaker)8

37-38 Not used39-40 Not used

Table C-M. SCU Switch S1 (CH1) and S2 (CH2) Settings

Switch Position





BOLD SHOWS DEFAULT SETTINGS

Table C-O. OWU Switch Settings

Switch Function Enabled

K1 Sets third digit of the station IDK2 Sets second digit of the station IDK3 Sets first digit of the station ID

Table C-P. MLN7330 WTU Jumper Settings


E1 1-2 Normal operation1-3, 2-4, 3-4 Factory test

E3 1-2 DS1 channel equipped2-3 DS1 channel not equipped

E6 1-2 Normal operation1-3, 3-4 Factory test

E8 1-2 DS1 channel - AMI line code (not for E rate)2-3 DS1 channel - B8ZS line code (not for E rate)

E10 1-2 Asynchronous data channel receiver enabled2-3 Asynchronous data channel receiver disabled

Table C-Q. MLN7330 WTU Switch Settings

Switch Setting Function Enabled

K2 9 DS1 line buildout 1 to 131 feetA DS1 line buildout 131 to 262 feetB DS1 line buildout 262 to 393 feetC DS1 line buildout 393 to 524 feetD DS1 line buildout 524 to 655 feet

Table C-R. 8000608-00 WTU Equalizer Control / Line Length Select Settings

Line Interface Unit Equalizer Control / Line Length Select0 = OFF (OPEN) I = ON (CLOSED)

SW1-1 SW1-2 SW1-3 SW1-4DS1 / T1Function

Pulse /Line Length Gain

1 1 0 1 SHORT HAUL 0-100 FT 0.6 dB 12 dB0 0 1 1 SHORT HAUL 133 – 266 FT / 1.2 dB 12 dB1 0 1 1 SHORT HAUL 266 – 399 FT / 1.8 dB 12 dB0 1 1 1 SHORT HAUL 399 – 533 FT / 2.4 dB 12 dB1 1 1 1 SHORT HAUL 533 – 655 FT / 3.0 dB 12 dB0 0 0 0 LONG HAUL 0.0 dB PULSE 36 dB0 1 0 0 LONG HAUL -7.5 dB PULSE 36 dB0 0 1 0 LONG HAUL -15.0 dB PULSE 36 dB0 1 1 0 LONG HAUL -22.5 dB PULSE 36 dB1 0 0 0 LONG HAUL 0.0 dB PULSE 26 dB1 1 0 0 LONG HAUL -7.5 dB PULSE 26 dB1 0 1 0 LONG HAUL -15.0 dB PULSE 26 dB1 1 1 0 LONG HAUL -22.5 dB PULSE 26 dB

Microwave Networks


Table C-S. 8000608-00 WTU Line Code Select Settings

Line Code (SW1–5)

OFF (OPEN) B8ZSON (CLOSED) AMI

Table C-T. MLN7329 (E1) Jumper Settings


E1 1-2 Normal Operation1-3, 2-4, 3-4 Factory Test

E2, E4, & E5 1-2 E1 Channel #1 - 120 ohm2-3 E1 Channel #1 - 75 ohm

E12 2-3 E1 Channel #1 - 120 ohm1-2 E1 Channel #1 - 75 ohm

E3 1-2 E1 Channel #1 Equipped2-3 E1 Channel #1 Not Equipped

E6 1-2 Normal Operation1-3, 2-4, 3-4 Factory Test

E7 1-2 Not used2-3 Not used

E8 1-2 E1 Channel #1 - AMI Line Code2-3 E1 Channel #1 - HDB3 Line Code

E9, E11, & E15 1-2 Not used2-3 Not used

E13 2-3 Not used1-2 Not used

E10 1-2 Not used2-3 Normal operation

Table C-U. MLN7329 (E1) WTU Switch Settings

Switch Setting Function Enabled

K2 6 E1 Channel #1 UnequippedE E1 Channel #1 - 75 ohm impedanceF E1 Channel #1 - 120 ohm impedance

K4 6 Not usedE Not usedF Not used



*Default settings

Table C-V. NMU Jumper Settings


E1 1-2* Oscillator enabled2-3 RTC test enabled

E2 1-2 Test enabled2-3* Com port oscillator enabled

E3 1-2* Watchdog timer enabled2-3 Watchdog timer disabled

E9 Jumper installed Normal operationE10 Jumper installed Normal operation

Table C-W. NMU Switch S1 Settings

Rocker Function Open Closed

1 Site Address 1 Added Ignored2 Site Address 2 Added Ignored3 Site Address 4 Added Ignored4 Site Address 8 Added Ignored5 Site Address 16 Added Ignored6 Site Address 32 Added Ignored7 Site Address 64 Added Ignored8 Site Address 128 Added Ignored

Table C-X. NMU Switch S2 Settings

FunctionSwitch Setting

Rocker 1 - 4 Rocker 5 Rocker 6 Rocker 7 Rocker 8

Site Master Open Closed Open Closed ClosedSlave Open Open Open Open Open4-Port Bridge* Open Open Open Open Open* On NMU part number MLN7481C only

CM System User's Manual Page D-1

1.0 IntroductionSystem software uses alarm codes to simplify alarm logging. Alarm codes identify control, event, and status information, as well as, system switching, performance measurements, and conditions at monitored points. Alarms may indicate direct hardware conditions and events, or may be summed creating a derived alarm. The alarm log screen, explained in detail in Appendix B, lists an alarm code with each alarm displayed. Table D-A lists the alarm codes in numerical order, along with corresponding alarm information for Telestar (TS) and CM radios. Not all alarms display on the alarm log screen of the local maintenance terminal (LMT).

* 2, 6, and 10 GHz Telestar radios only** 7/8 GHz Telestar radios only

Table D-A. Alarm Codes

Code Definition Type Used LMT Monitor Displays:

0 RF PSU 24 or 48 Volt Battery Minor Yes Supply Failure

1 RF +12 Volt Supply Minor Yes +12 Volt Supply

2 RF -6 Volt Supply Minor Yes -6 Volt Supply

3 TX AGC VoltageTX Frequency Code (CM, TS 7GHz only)

Minor No none

4 TX Local Oscillator Power Level *TX Frequency Code (CM, TS 7GHz only)

Minor No none

5 TX APC StatusTX Power Option Code (CM, TS 7GHz only)

Control APC Confirm none

6 TX ALC Voltage (CM, TS 7GHz only)TX Power Option Code (CM, TS 7GHz only)

Minor No none

7 TX Output Power Level Minor No none

8 TX Online Status Status Yes none

9 TX Local Oscillator PLL VoltageTX Regulated Voltage Alarm (CM, TS 7GHz)TX LO Vendor Code (TS 7GHz, see #144)

Minor No none

10 RX RSL Voltage PM Reading Yes RX Signal Level - Configuration

11 RX RSL Reference PM Reading Yes none

12

13

14

15 Regulated Voltage Alarm (CM)

16 RX Receiver PLL Voltage*IF Frequency Select (CM)

Minor No none

17 RX LO Detector Voltage*RF Loopback Test Confirm (CM)RX LNA Equipped** (TS 7GHz only)

MinorStatusStatus

No nonenoneConfiguration

18 MOD +5 Volt Supply Minor Yes +5V Supply

Appendix DAlarm Codes

Appendix D Alarm Codes

Page D-2 CM System User’s Manual

19 MOD -5 Volt Supply Minor Yes -5V Supply

20 MOD DAC I Output*MOD I FIR Alarm**

Minor YesYes

DAC I OutputI FIR Alarm

21 MOD DAC Q Output*MOD Q FIR Alarm**

Minor Yes DAC Q OutputQ FIR Alarm

22 MOD IF Level Minor Yes IF Level

23 MOD Thru/Cross Status Status Yes none

24 MOD PLL Locked (PLL out of lock) Minor Yes PLL Locked

25 MOD MUX Active (no activity from MOD) Minor Yes Input LOS

26 DEMOD VCO Stress Voltage Minor Yes VCO

27 DEMOD Quadrature Phase Minor Yes Quadrature

28 DEMOD Slope Equalizer Minor Yes Slope

29 DEMOD AGC*DEMOD AGC I**

Minor Yes AGCAGC I

30 DEMOD I Gain Minor Yes I Gain

31 DEMOD I Offset Minor Yes I Offset

32 DEMOD Q Gain Minor Yes Q Gain

33 DEMOD Q Offset Minor Yes Q Offset

34 DEMOD I Clock Minor Yes I Clock

35 DEMOD Q Clock Minor Yes Q Clock

36 DEMOD VCXO Voltage Minor Yes VCXO

37 DEMOD A/D Bit Line Stress (not TS 7GHz)DEMOD Q Eye Quality (TS 7GHz only)

Minor Yes A/D Bit Line StressQ Eye Quality

38 Demod Loopback StatusDEMOD I Eye Quality (TS 7GHz only)

StatusMinor

NoYes

noneI Eye Quality

39 DEMOD Sweep Active StatusDEMOD AGC Q**

StatusMinor

NoYes

noneAGC Q

40 DEMOD Frame Loss Minor Yes Frame Loss

41 DEMOD Supply Voltage Minor Yes Supply Voltage

42 ATDE II-2 Minor DS3/E3 None

43 ATDE QQ-2 Minor DS3/E3 None

44 ATDE II-1 Minor All Rates II-1

45 ATDE QQ-1 Minor All Rates QQ-1

46 ATDE II+1 Minor All Rates II+1

47 ATDE QQ+1 Minor All Rates QQ+1

48 ATDE II+2 Minor DS3/E3 None

49 ATDE QQ+2 Minor DS3/E3 None

50 ATDE IQ-2 Minor DS3/E3 None

51 ATDE QI-2 Minor DS3/E3 None

52 ATDE IQ-1 Minor All Rates IQ-1

53 ATDE QI-1 Minor All Rates QI-1

54 ATDE IQ+1 Minor All Rates IQ+1

55 ATDE QI+1 Minor All Rates IQ+1

56 ATDE IQ+2 Minor DS3/E3 None

57 ATDE QI+2 Minor DS3/E3 None

Table D-A. Alarm Codes (Continued)



Microwave Networks

58 SP PSU 24 or 48 Volt Battery Minor Yes Battery

59 SP +5.4 Volt Supply Minor Yes +5.4V Supply

60 SP +6.0 Volt Supply Minor Yes +6.0 Volt Supply

61 SP -6.0 Volt Supply Minor Yes -6.0 Volt Supply

63 MUX PLL Fail Minor Yes Rx Failure

64 MUX Channel 9-12 Fail Minor Yes Group 3 Failure



67 MUX Rx 2 Input LOS Minor Yes Rx 2 Input Alarm

68 MUX Rx 1 Input LOS Minor Yes Rx 1 Input Alarm

69 MUX Rx Out of Frame Minor Yes Rx Out Of Frame

70 MUX XILINK Fail Minor Yes Hardware Failure

72 MUX Module Fail Minor Yes Hardware Failure

73 MUX Far-End ACU Alarm Status No none

74 SYN Group 3 Input LOS Minor Yes PCM Group 3 Input



77 SYN Group 3 Output Fail Minor Yes PCM Group 3 Output



80 SCU Fail Minor Yes Hardware Failure

81 RF PSU Failure Minor Yes Supply Failure

82 SP PSU Failure Minor Yes Supply Failure

84 TXU Failure Minor Yes Tx Fail

85 MUX Rx Failure Minor Yes Rx Failure

86 MUX Tx Failure Minor Yes Tx Failure

87 TXU ALC Minor Yes Tx ALC

88 TXU Power Level Minor Yes Tx Power Level

89 TXU AGC Minor Yes Tx AGC

90 TX Phase Locked Loop Alarm (CM, TS 7GHz)TXU Local Oscillator

Minor Yes LO

91 RXU FET Bias Out of Range Minor Yes Pre-Amplifier

92 RXU AGC Voltage Minor Yes AGC

93 RXU Local Oscil. Minor Yes LO

94 MOD Output LOS Minor Yes Output LOS

95 MUX Far-End MUX Alarm Status No none

96 SYN Rx Failure Minor Yes Rx Failure

97 SYN Tx Failure Minor Yes Tx Failure

98 MUX Rx 1 OOF Minor Yes RX 1 Out-Of-Frame

99 MUX Rx 2 OOF Minor Yes RX 2 Out-Of-Frame

100 MOD Input LOS Minor No none

101 OWU Failure Minor Yes Hardware Failure

102 SYNDES Card Present Minor Yes Module State

103 MUX Card Present Minor Yes Module State

104 MOD Card Present Minor Yes Module State





105 DEMOD Card Present Minor Yes Module State

106 SCU Card Present Minor Yes Module State

107 ATDE Card Present Minor Yes Module State

108 OWU Card Present Minor Yes Module State

109 WTU Card Present Minor DS3/E3 -

110 DIU Card Present Minor No none

111 TXU Card Present Minor Yes Module State

112 RXU Card Present Minor Yes Module State

113 SP PSU Card Present Minor Yes Module State

114 RF PSU Card Present Minor Yes Module State

115 BER FEC 1E-9 Error Minor Yes BER Minor

116 BER PE 1E-3 Error Major Yes BER Major

117* TXU High APC Failure Major Yes Tx High APC

118 RXU Receive APC Failure Major Yes Rx High APC

119 Switch - Automatic -switch Syndes output Event Yes None

120 Switch - Manual Event Yes None

121 Switch - Forced Event Yes None

122 SYN Major System Rx failure (online Syndes) Major Yes System Rx Failure

123 MUX Major System Tx failure Major Yes System Tx Failure

124 MUX Output LOS Minor Yes Mux Output Alarm

125 SYN PLL Channel-1 E2 Failure Minor Yes -

126 SYN PLL Channel-2 E2 failure Minor Yes -

127 SYN AIS Channel-1 Received Status Minor Yes -

128 SYN AIS Channel-2 Received Status Minor Yes -

129 WTU Channel Input loss of signal Minor Yes Ch Input LOS

130 WTU Channel Output loss of signal Minor Yes Ch Output LOS

131 WTU Phase Lock Loop alarm Minor Yes PLL Alarm

132 WTU Elastic Store alarm Minor Yes Elastic Store

133 WTU Thru Mux I/P data activity Minor Yes Rx Activity A/B

134 WTU Cross Mux I/P data activity Minor Yes Rx Activity A/B

135 MUX DS3/E3 Input Alarm Minor Yes DS3/E3 Input Alarm

136 SYNDES Loss of DS3/E3 Input Minor Yes LOS - DS3/E3 Input

137 T3 SYNDES Clock recovery Fail - No none

138 SYNDES Bit Error Alarm Minor Yes BER Alarm

139 SYNDES DS3/E3 Rx PLL fail Minor Yes DS3/E3 Rx PLL Fail

140 SYNDES Loss of DS3/E3 Output Minor Yes LOS - DS3/E3 Output

141 RF +5 Volt Supply Minor Yes +5 Volt Supply

142 MUX Tx FIFO alarm Minor Yes MUX Output Alarm

143 Remote Communication Ch. Fail Minor Yes Rmt. Comm. Ch.

144 NMU TTL Input - Point 1TX LO Vendor Code Bit 2 (TS 7GHz only) (

EventMinor

YesNo

Point: 1, Input Statusnone

145 NMU TTL Input - Point 2 Event Yes Point: 2, Input Status



148 ACU TTL Input - Point 5 Event Yes Point: 5, Input Status




Microwave Networks




152 NMU TTL Output - Point 1 Event Yes Point: 1, Output Control




156 ACU Relay Output - Point 1 Event Yes Point: 1, Output Control




160 EOC Cutoff Event Yes Screen 039

161 APC Manual Event Yes Screen 039

162 APC Auto Event Yes Screen 039

163 ACU Status Failure Event Yes -

164 SM Received Radio_Fail_Cmd Event Yes -

165 BER Greater Than 0 (zero) Event Yes -

166 Reverse Channel, TXU Switch (HH,HS) Event Yes MOD-TXU Switch Alarm

166 Reverse Channel, MUX Switch (FF) Event Yes SYNDES-MUX Switch Alarm

167 SCE Communications Fail Alarm Yes Screen 034

168 Reported ACU Status/Hardware/EOC Change Event Yes -

169 RF TX Fan Alarm (CM only) Alarm Yes -

170 Fast Channel Failure

171 MAX Number of Alarms (Total) - - -

172 Loopback Minor Alarm Alarm Yes Screen 039



CM7/8 System User’s Manual Page E-1

IntroductionThe CM7/8 Synthesized Oscillator provides the local oscillator (LO) signals for the conversion process on both the receiver and transmitter. The oscillator operates in one of eight bands. Table E-A lists the synthesizer modules and their associated frequency operating range.

Adjust the LO frequency, within each band, by setting the FREQUENCY SET dip switches S2 and S1, and the LO FREQ ADJ dip switch S3 and variable capacitor accessed from the Receiver Panel front. Refer to Chapter 3, Sections 3-3 and 3-4 for descriptions of TXU and RXU operation.

CM7 Setting SwitchesRF frequencies are from 7100 to 7780 MHz, and LO frequencies are from 7030 to 7850 MHz. To determine the receiver local oscillator (RXLO) frequency, using a Hewlett Packard Frequency Counter 5347A or equivalent, measure both the receiver and transmitter RF frequencies, and then adjust RXLO as follows: If the receiver frequency (RXRF) is less than the transmitter frequency (TXRF), set the RXLO frequency to a value 70 MHz less than the measured RXRF; if the RXRF is greater than the TXRF, set the RXLO frequency to a value 70 MHz greater than the RXRF as listed in Table E-D.

Figure E-1 shows the RXLO synthesizer FREQUENCY SET switch setting arrangement. Use Figure E-1 with the information in Tables E-B and E-C to set the synthesizer switches. Note that the areas N, A, F, and G correspond to switches S1 and S2. Also note that LO FREQ ADJ Switch S3 and the fine-frequency adjust capacitor are accessible from the Receiver Panel front. Table E-D lists the synthesizer frequencies according to their frequency bands.

Table E-A. Synthesizer Oscillator Frequency Ranges

Synthesizer Oscillator Modules Frequency Range

MLL8156A 7030 to 7235 MHz

MLL8157A 7235 to 7440 MHz

MLL8158A 7440 to 7645 MHz

MLL8159A 7645 to 7850 MHz

MLL8160A 7850 to 8030 MHz

MLL8161A 8030 to 8210 MHz

MLL8162A 8210 to 8390 MHz

MLL8163A 8390 to 8570 MHz

Appendix ESetting Frequency Switches

Appendix E Setting Frequency

Page E-2 CM7/8 System User’s Manual

Within the synthesizer oscillator module frequencies listed in Table E-B, switch S2 (areas N and A) and area G of switch S1, set the synthesizer frequency in 20-MHz increments. Table E-C lists 2-MHz increments set by area F of S1. The following example describes how to use these tables to set synthesizer frequency.

NOTE Before adjusting synthesizer frequency, ensure that the system has had sufficient time to reach its normal operating temperature.

Example:

For a LO frequency of 7622.84 MHz, set S1 and S2 as follows:

1. In Table E-B, the N value for synthesizer frequency 7622 is 2, or binary 010. Set the three switches in area N of S2 from left to right to 010. The A value is 3, or binary 0011. Set all of the four switches in S2 area A to 0011. The G value is 01. Set the switches on S1 area G to 01.

2. Go to Table E-C to tune the synthesizer to a 2-MHz increment. Since the frequency is now between 7620 and 7640 MHz, set switch S1 area F to the 2-to 4-MHz value. The F value is 14, or binary 1110. The frequency is now between 7622 and 7624 MHz.

Switch S3, accessible through the receiver front panel LO FREQ ADJ opening, extends the LO frequency adjustment downward from the current frequency reading by approximately 1 MHz when toggled to the left (ON position). Placing Switch 3 in the OFF position extends the LO frequency adjustment upward from the current frequency reading by approximately 1 MHz.

3. Access the fine-frequency adjust capacitor through the LO FREQ ADJ opening, and rotate its screw adjust until reaching the desired frequency reading of 7622.84 MHz. If necessary, toggle switch S3 in order to reverse the direction of frequency adjustment.

4. The frequency switches are now set properly for 7622.84 MHz.

Figure E-1. Frequency Switch Arrangement

Microwave Networks


Table E-B. CM7 Synthesizer Switch Settings in 20-MHz Increments

MLL20-MHz Synthesizer Increments

NN (binary)

A A (binary) G

8159A 7840 to 7860 1 001 8 1000 01

7820 to 7840 1 001 9 1001 01

7800 to 7820 1 001 10 1010 01

7780 to 7800 1 001 11 1011 10

7760 to 7780 1 001 12 1100 10

7740 to 7760 1 001 13 1101 10

7720 to 7740 1 001 14 1110 10

7700 to 7720 1 001 15 1111 11

7680 to 7700 2 010 0 0000 11

7660 to 7680 2 010 1 0001 11

7640 to 7660 2 010 2 0010 11

8158A 7640 to 7660 2 010 2 0010 01

7620 to 7640 2 010 3 0011 01

7600 to 7620 2 010 4 0100 01

7580 to 7600 2 010 5 0101 10

7560 to 7580 2 010 6 0110 10

7540 to 7560 2 010 7 0111 10

7520 to 7540 2 010 8 1000 10

7500 to 7520 2 010 9 1001 11

7480 to 7500 2 010 10 1010 11

7460 to 7480 2 010 11 1011 11

7440 to 7460 2 010 12 1100 11

8157A 7440 to 7460 2 010 12 1100 01

7420 to 7440 2 010 13 1101 01

7400 to 7420 2 010 14 1110 01

7380 to 7400 2 010 15 1111 01

7360 to 7380 3 011 0 0000 10

7340 to 7360 3 011 1 0001 10

7320 to 7340 3 011 2 0010 10

7300 to 7320 3 011 3 0011 10

7280 to 7300 3 011 4 0100 11

7260 to 7280 3 011 5 0101 11

7240 to 7260 3 011 6 0110 11

7220 to 7240 3 011 7 0111 11



8156A 7220 to 7240 3 011 011 0111 01

7200 to 7220 3 011 011 1000 01

7180 to 7200 3 011 011 1001 01

7160 to 7180 3 011 011 1010 10

7140 to 7160 3 011 011 1011 10

7120 to 7140 3 011 011 1100 10

7100 to 7120 3 011 011 1101 10

7080 to 7100 3 011 011 1110 11

7060 to 7080 3 011 011 1111 11

7040 to 7060 4 100 100 0000 11

7020 to 7040 4 100 100 0001 11

Table E-C. Switch Settings, 2 MHz Increments

2 MHz Increments F F (binary)

0 to 2 15 11112 to 4 14 11104 to 6 13 11016 to 8 12 11008 to 10 11 1011

10 to 12 10 101012 to 14 9 100114 to 16 8 100016 to 18 7 011118 to 20 6 0110

Table E-B. CM7 Synthesizer Switch Settings in 20-MHz Increments

MLL20-MHz Synthesizer Increments

NN (binary)

A A (binary) G

Microwave Networks


CM8 Switch SettingsCM8 RF frequencies are from 7780 to 8500 MHz, and LO frequencies are from 7850 to 8570 MHz. To determine the receiver local oscillator (RXLO) frequency, using an HP 5347A frequency counter or equivalent, measure both the receiver and transmitter RF frequencies, and then adjust RXLO as follows: If the receiver frequency (RXRF) is less than the transmitter frequency (TXRF), set the RXLO frequency to a value 70-MHz less than the measured RXRF; if the RXRF is greater than the TXRF, set the RXLO frequency to a value 70-MHz greater than the RXRF as listed in Table E-E.

Figure E-2 shows the RXLO synthesizer FREQUENCY SET switch setting arrangement for the CM8. Use Figure E-2 with the information in Tables E-E and E-C to set the synthesizer switches. Note that the areas N, A, F, and G correspond to switches S1 and S2. Also note that LO FREQ ADJ switch S3 and the fine-frequency adjust capacitor are accessible from the Receiver panel front. Table E-F lists the synthesizer frequencies according to their frequency bands.

Within the synthesizer oscillator frequencies listed in Table E-E, switch S2 (areas N and A) and area G of switch S1, set the synthesizer frequency in 20-MHz increments. Table E-C lists 2-MHz increments set by area F of S1. The example on Page 2 describes how to use these tables to set synthesizer frequency.

NOTE Before adjusting synthesizer frequency, ensure that the system has had sufficient time to reach its normal operating temperature.

Table E-D. Synthesizer Frequency Bands

RXU P/N Band Condition L/M/H ƒrf (MHz) ƒlo (MHz) LO Synthesizer

MRL8166 7 - 1 ƒRF>ƒLO lowmidhigh

710072027305

703071327235

MLL8156

MRL8166 7 - 1 ƒRF<ƒLO lowmidhigh

N/A71007165

N/A71707235

MLL8156


730574077510

723573377440

MLL8157


716572677370

723573377440

MLL8157


751076127715

744075427645

MLL8158


737074727575

744075427645

MLL8158

MRL8169 7 - 4 ƒFRF>ƒLO lowmidhigh

771578177920

764577477850

MLL8159


757576777780

764577477850

MLL8159



Table E-E. 20-MHz Synthesizer Switch Settings

MLL20 MHz Synthesizer Increments

NN (binary)

A A (binary) G

8163A 8560 to 8570 7 00111 4 0100 01

8540 to 8560 7 00111 5 0101 01

8520 to 8540 7 00111 6 0110 01

8500 to 8520 7 00111 7 0111 10

8480 to 8500 7 00111 8 1000 10

8460 to 8480 7 00111 9 1001 10

8440 to 8460 7 00111 10 1010 10

8420 to 8440 7 00111 11 1011 11

8400 to 8420 7 00111 12 1100 11

8390 to 8400 7 00111 13 1101 11

8162A 8380 to 8390 7 00111 13 1101 01

8360 to 8380 7 00111 14 1110 10

8340 to 8360 7 00111 15 1111 01

8320 to 8340 8 01000 0 0000 10

8300 to 8320 8 01000 1 0001 10

8280 to 8300 8 01000 2 0010 10

8260 to 8280 8 01000 3 0011 10

8240 to 8260 8 01000 4 0100 11

8220 to 8240 8 01000 5 0101 11

8210 to 8220 8 01000 6 0110 11

Figure E-2. CM8 Synthesizer Switch Arrangement

Microwave Networks


8161A 8200 to 8210 8 01000 6 0110 01

8180 to 8200 8 01000 7 0111 01

8160 to 8180 8 01000 8 1000 01

8140 to 8160 8 01000 9 1001 10

8120 to 8140 8 01000 10 1010 10

8100 to 8120 8 01000 11 1011 10

8080 to 8100 8 01000 12 1100 10

8060 to 8080 8 01000 13 1101 11

8040 to 8060 8 01000 14 1110 11

8030 to 8040 8 01000 15 1111 11

8160A 8020 to 8030 8 01000 15 1111 01

8000 to 8020 9 01001 0 0000 01

7980 to 8000 9 01001 1 0001 01

7960 to 7980 9 01001 2 0010 10

7940 to 7960 9 01001 3 0011 10

7920 to 7940 9 01001 4 0100 10

7900 to 7920 9 01001 5 0101 10

7880 to 7900 9 01001 6 0110 11

7860 to 7880 9 01001 7 0111 11

7850 to 7860 9 01001 8 1000 11

Table E-F. Synthesizer Frequency Bands

RXUP/N

Band Condition L/M/Hƒrf(MHz)

ƒlo(MHz)

LOSynthesizer


792080108100

785079408030

MLL8160


778078707960

785079408030

MLL8160


810081908280

803081208210

MLL8161


796080508140

803081208210

MLL8161


828083708460

821083008390

MLL8162


814082308320

821083008390

MLL8162

MRL8173 8 - 4 ƒFRF<ƒLO lowmidhigh

832084108500

839084808570

MLL8163

MLL20 MHz Synthesizer Increments

NN (binary)

A A (binary) G

CM System User’s Manual Page F-1

ACO — Alarm Cut Off.

ACU — Alarm and Control Unit.

A/D or ADC — Analog-to-Digital Converter.

AGC — Automatic Gain Control.

AIS — Alarm Indication Signal (all “1” bit pattern).

ALBO — Automatic Line Build Out.

ALC — Automatic Level Control.

ALM — Alarm.

AMI — Alternate Mark Inversion.

Annunciator — Sub-board on Interface Panel which contains the ACO switch and LED, Major LED, Minor LED, Manual LED and SEC Fail LED.

ANT — Antenna.

APC — Automatic Power Control.

ATDE — Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer (plug-in module). This unit combats linear channel distortions caused by all sources, but is specifically used to fight dispersive fade degradations.

ATT — Attenuation.

AUX — Auxiliary.

B8ZS — Binary Eight Zero Substitution.

BB — Baseband. The lowest frequency around which signals are processed.

BCH — Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem — A block format FEC code, characterized by high efficiency and applicability to random error event channels.

BER — Bit Error Rate.

BGT — Backward Guard Time.

BPF — Band Pass Filter.

BPV — Bipolar Violation.

BW — Bandwidth.

Appendix FGlossary

Appendix F Glossary

Page F-2 CM System User’s Manual

CCIR — International Radio Consultative Committee.

CCITT — International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee.

C/I — Carrier-to-Interference Ratio.

CLK — Clock.

Codec — Coder/Decoder.

Co-located — located in the same rack, as in two CM-HC radios.

Constellation — The totality of possible signal states used by the modem to send level information. Each point comprising the pattern is described by I and Q coordinates.

CTIA — Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association.

D — D word time or pattern; D frame.

D/A or DAC — Digital-to-Analog Converter.

DADE — Differential Absolute Delay Equalization.

dBm0 — dB above reference noise measured with C-message weighting at 0 transmission level point.

DEC — Double Error Correction.

DEMOD — Demodulator (plug-in module).

DFM — Dispersive Fade Margin, a measure (in dB) of a system's immunity to dispersive fade activity.

DISGAP — Distributed GAP.

Dispersive Fade — A change in propagation condition which affects the shape of the desired channel response. Typically, this is caused by multipath activity and is equalized by the ATDE and Slope Equal-izer.

DIU — Drop and Insert Unit (plug-in module).

DIV — Diversity.

DRO — Dielectric Resonator Oscillator.

DS1 — Digital Signal 1, the primary multiplex level in North American TDM hierarchy (1.544 Mbps).

DS3 — Digital Signal 3, the third multiplex level in North American TDM hierarchy (44.736 Mbps).

DSB — Double Side Band.

DSB-SC — Double Side Band-Suppressed Carrier.

DTMF — Dual Tone Multi-frequency.


Microwave Networks

DVM — Digital Voltmeter.

E1— Primary multiplex level in International TDM hierarchy (2.048 Mbps).

E3— Third multiplex level in International TDM hierarchy (34.368 Mbps).

EFS — Error Free Seconds.

EMC — Electromagnetic Compatibility.

EMI — Electromagnetic Interference.

ENC — Encoder.

ES — Error Second.

ESD — Electrostatic Discharge.

FCC — Federal Communications Commission.

FE — Framing Error.

FEC — Forward Error Correction.

FEC Gap — Frame gap that coincides with FEC parity bit times.

FER — Frame Error Rate.

FET — Field Effect Transistor.

FF — Frequency Diversity Transmitter/ Frequency Diversity Receiver.

FGT — Forward Guard Time.

FI — FEC “I” Flag.

FIFO — First In First Out.

Flat Fade — A change in propagation conditions which affects the level of the received signal. This is com-pensated for by receiver AGC and possibly transmitter APC.

FLC — Frame Loss Counter.

FLS — Frame Loss Second.

Form A — Relay with normally open contacts.

Form B — Relay with normally closed contacts.

Form C — Relay with transfer contacts.

FQ — FEC “Q” Flag.

FR — Frame Resupply.

FREQ — Frequency.

Appendix F Glossary


FS — Symbol rate.

Gray Code — A counting scheme using binary numbers whereby adjacent numbers differ in only one bit position.

HDBn — High Density Bipolar signal, with a maximum of “n” consecutive zeros.

HH — Hot Standby Transmitter/Hot Standby Receiver.

HHU — Hand-held Unit.

HP — Hop Parity.

HS — Hot Standby Transmitter/Space Diversity Receiver.

H/W —þHardware.

IF — Intermediate Frequency (70 MHz).

IFP — Interface Panel.

In-Service — System carries live traffic.

INT — Interference.

I/P — Input.

ISI — Inter-symbol Interference.

LBO — Line Build Out.

LDU — Local Display Unit.

LED — Light Emitting Diode.

LEV —þLevel.

LNA — Low Noise Amplifier.

LNDC — Low Noise Down Converter.

LO — Local Oscillator.

LOS — Line of Site.

LOW — Local Orderwire.

LPF — Low Pass Filter.

M — M word time or pattern; M frame.


Microwave Networks

Mbps — Megabits per second.

MGC — Manual Gain Control.

MHSB — Monitored Hot Standby radio protection configuration.

MLA — Microwave Link Analyzer.

MOD — Modulator (plug-in module).

Modem — Modulator/Demodulator.

MTBF — Mean Time Between Failure.

MTTR — Mean Time to Repair.

Multipath — Dynamic linear distortion characterized by notches and/or slope in the channel frequency response. The phenomena is caused by multiple independent propagation paths connecting transmitter and receiver.

MUX — Multiplexer (plug-in module).

MWG —þMicrowave Generator.

NC — Normally Closed relay contact.

NCS — Network Communications Software.

NF — Noise Figure.

NM — Network Management.

NMS — Network Management System.

NN — Non-protected Transmitter/ Non-protected Receiver.

NO — Normally Open relay contact.

NRZ — Non-Return to Zero.

NS — Non-protected Transmitter/Space Diversity Receiver.

OFS — Operational Fixed Services (Part 94).

O/P — Output.

Out-of-Service — System not carrying live traffic.

OWU — Orderwire Unit (plug-in module).

PA —þPower Amplifier.

Appendix F Glossary


PAM — Pulse Amplitude Modulation.

PCA — Printed Circuit Assembly.

PCB — Printed Circuit Board.

PER —Parity Error Rate.

PES — Parity Error Second.

PF —þPropagation Flag.

PLD — Programmable Logic Device.

PLL — Phase Lock Loop.

PLO — Phase Lock Oscillator.

PRBS — Pseudorandom Bit Sequence.

P/S — Parallel-to-Serial (Data Stream Conversion).

PSF — Previous Section Fail.

PSU (RF) — RF Power Supply Unit (plug-in module).

PSU (SP) — SP Power Supply Unit (plug-in module).

PWR — Power.

QAM — Quadrature Amplitude Modulation.

QPSK — Quadrature Phase Shift Keying Modulation.

REA — Rural Electrification Administration.

RF — Radio Frequency. In the CM6HC, this varies between5.925 and 7.125 GHz.

RFI — Radio Frequency Interference.

RFS — Radio Frequency Shelf.

RMU — Rack Mounting Units, 1.75 inches.

RU — Rack Unit, 1.75 inches.

RX — Receive(r).

RXU — Receiver Unit (plug-in module).


Microwave Networks

SBY — Standby.

SC — Service Channel.

SCU — Service Channel Unit (plug-in module).

SD — Space Diversity radio protection configuration.

SEC — Seconds.

SF — Signal Failed (140 Mb/s).

SLEQ — Slope Equalizer.

SO — Stuff Opportunity.

SP — Signal Processing.

S/P — Serial-to-Parallel (Data Stream Conversion).

SPS — Signal Processing Shelf.

SR — Stuff Request.

SS — Space Diversity Transmitter/Space Diversity Receiver.

S/W — Software.

SWR — Switching Request.

SYM — Symbol.

Symbol Rate or Frequency (fs) — The rate (frequency) at which symbols are generated. Since symbols rep-resent any of 3, 5, or 7 bits (for 8, 32, and 128 QAM respectively), the system bit rate is 3, 5, or 7 times higher than the symbol rate.

SYNDES — Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (plug-in module).

T1 — Transmission medium capable of carrying a TDM signal at 1.544 Mbps.

T3 — Digital Signal 3, the third multiplex level in North American TDM hierarchy (44.736 Mbps).

TDM — Time Division Multiplexing.

T/I — Threshold to Interference.

TIU — TELESCAN Interface Unit.

T/R — Transmitter/Receiver pair (2 T/Rs in a monitored hot standby radio).

TTL — Transistor-Transistor Logic.

TX — Transmit(ter).

TXU — Transmitter Unit (plug-in module).

Appendix F Glossary


U/C — Upconverter.

UI — Unit Interval, Jitter.

UIS — User Interface Software.

UPSTRM — Upstream.

VCO — Voltage Controlled Oscillator.

VF — Voice Frequency.

XO — Crystal Oscillator.

XTL — Crystal.

XPD — Cross-Polarization Discrimination.

CM System User’s Manual 6/14/02 Page G-1

IntroductionTo manage CM radios as IP-network devices using Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) you should be familiar with your network management application and understand IP-network concepts, hardware, protocols, and architecture. This appendix discusses the CM radio SNMP option and covers:

What is CM SNMP? ........................... G-1SNMP Option Components ................ G-2Layout of a CM SNMP Network........ G-4Installing Hardware............................. G-5Installing Software .............................. G-8System Operation.............................. G-10

What is CM SNMP?CM SNMP simplifies configuring, monitoring, and diagnosing your radio, radio link, or entire radio network by providing open-standard radio management via Ethernet. Since SNMP is an open-standard protocol, you can use any SNMP-capable manage-ment application to manage CM radios. This radio option includes an SNMP Network Management Unit (SNMP NMU), an Ethernet interface at the front panel, and appro-priate software files.

SMNP is a network management standard for LANs that defines a client/server rela-tionship. The client program (called the network manager) makes virtual connections to a server program (called the SNMP agent) which operates on a remote network device and serves information about device status to the manager. SNMP uses a management information base (MIB) to define these virtual connections. Any SNMP manager, with proper access, can query the status and modify the configuration of each managed device.

A MIB is a standard set of definitions (structure and format) for exchanging informa-tion about the network components. Microwave Networks’ MIB is a private MIB for the CM radio. The SNMP option adapts the alarms and commands used by the Status and Control Extender (SCE) for use by the SNMP manager.

Revision Note Ethernet routing is self-learning in the latest release of CM SNMP. Routing Informa-tion Protocol version 2 (RIP-2) provides dynamic routing of up to 15 radios per subnet. Spans of 15-radio subnets are unlimited.

After setting the IP address of the first-accessed radio and configuring it as a gateway, routing tables of radios throughout the network update automatically to incorporate changes as they occur.

RIP is primarily for networks of moderate size and has these limitations:

• Limited to sub-networks whose longest path is 7 hops (15 radios).

• Uses fixed metrics to compare alternative routes; so it is unsuited to situations where routes need to be chosen based on real-time parameters such a measured delay, reliability, or load.

Appendix GCM SNMP

CM SNMP

Page G-2 6/14/02 CM System User’s Manual

SNMP Option ComponentsTables G-A lists the CM SNMP components that Table G-B describes. Use the CM SNMP hardware upgrade kit, PN 8708231-00, to convert existing CM radios with Microwave Network’s proprietary network management to SNMP.

The SNMP Front Panel

Figure G-1 shows the radio front panel and Ethernet interface that Table G-C describes. The CM SNMP option adapts Status and Control Extender (SCE) alarms and commands to manage the radio. See the Status and Control Extender Operation Manual, P/N 68P85104E05, for more information on the SCE. A jumper cable connects alarm data from the SCE jack to the network interface.

Table G-A. SNMP Components

System Computer (User Provided)

CM SNMP Hardware CM SNMP Software

Win 98/NT/Win 2000 SNMP NMU SNMP NMU Software (installed)Serial port Ethernet Front Panel SNMP Manager (user provided)10BaseT Ethernet network interface card

SNMP/10BaseT Cable (user provided)

CM SNMP MIB (private)

Table G-B. Component Descriptions and Part Numbers

Item Description Part No.

Network Interface Module Connects radio support data to a network 8000539-00SNMP NMU SNMP agent. Modifies radio data for use by

SNMP managers8000538-00

CM SNMP MIB Management Information Base (MIB) 4600027-00Bridge Cable RJ11-4/RJ11-4 8108633-02

Cable, Ribbon,15 conductor, 18" long 3700044-00

Table G-C. Front Panel Network Interface Components

Item Description

LINK Shows that the radio is connected to an Ethernet network.ACTIVITY Blinking indicates data transfer between agent and manager.SCE 4-pin RJ-11 connector to jumper to the front panel SCE jack.10BaseT 8-pin RJ-45 10BaseT network connection.

Figure G-1. SNMP NMU Front Panel


Microwave Networks

The SNMP NMU (Network Management Unit)

The SNMP NMU (Figure G-2) mounts on the ACU and acts as the SNMP agent. The NMU collects management data from its radio and, on request from an SNMP manager, distributes the data through the network to the manager. The NMU automati-cally sends critical radio errors, called traps, to the SNMP manager.

Traps are the standard mechanism of SNMP for unsolicited reports from network elements to the network manager. Traps store variable data and static textual informa-tion in the SNMP NMU. Successive traps with same textual information need only transfer the variable data.

Each SNMP NMU acts as a multi-homed device. That is, each radio has two IP inter-faces, so two IP addresses. One interface is the Ethernet interface at 10 Mbps, and the other is the over-the-air interface of the radio overhead channel at 64 kbps. The over-the-air interface transports status and command data over the microwave link. The IP address of the Ethernet interface is also the address of the SNMP NMU.

Major components of the SNMP NMU to note are the nine LEDs (Table G-D), three push-button switches (Table G-E), and three jumpers (Table G-F). Two megabytes of flash memory stores the SNMP system parameters and variables. NMU software may be downloaded to the board through the network using the TFTP service (see your computer utilities documentation).

Position 6 of eight-position dip switch SW1 toggles communication to the local access port between the ACU and NMU. Close SW1-6 to communicate with the NMU. Open SW1-6 to communicate with the ACU. SW1-6 should remain closed with all other positions open for normal operation.

Figure G-2. SNMP NMU Card

CM SNMP


Layout of a CM SNMP NetworkThis section describes the typical network layout of CM radios using the SNMP option. Figure G-3 shows this layout.

The management station, or SNMP manager, sends SNMP get and set requests to the SNMP agents–each radio NMU. The SNMP NMU answers get and set requests from the manager as specified by the Microwave-Networks MIB (management information base).

The MIB contains the common name of each object (which must be unique), the value of the OID (object IDs, which are hierarchical and must be unique), and the textual description of the syntax and semantics of the CM radio.

Each radio has two IP addresses: one addresses the Ethernet interface (IF1), the address of its SNMP NMU, and the other the 64 kbps over-the-air interface (IF2). The over-the-air interface transports radio support data, including get and set requests from the SNMP manager, over the microwave link to other radios addressed in the network routing tables.

A local connection at the front panel of each radio is available for on-site radio mainte-nance using the local maintenance terminal (LMT; see Chapter 6, Sub-section 1.3).

Table G-D. SNMP NMU LED Descriptions

LED Name Function

LD1 LINK Indicates that the Ethernet link is plugged into a valid networkLD2 POL Polarity Reverse – indicates reversed polarity at the Ethernet RxLD3 JAB Jabber – indicates linking communication has been establishedLD4 COL Collision – indicates that the send packet was not sent but will be

retransmittedLD5 RX RX – indicates that Ethernet port is receivingLD6 TX TX – indicates that Ethernet port is transmittingLD7 +3.3V +3.3 volt powerLD8 +5V +5 volt powerLD9 Bus Error Indicates an error on the data bus

Table G-E. SNMP NMU Push-button Reset Switch Descriptions

Switch Function

S1 Hard Power Reset – performs cold-cycle restart of softwareS2 Soft Power Reset – performs warm-cycle restart of softwareS3 Abort – halts the NMU processor

Table G-F. SNMP NMU Jumper Descriptions

Jumper Function

JP1 For internal use. Normally openJP2 For internal use. Normally openJP3 Pins 1 and 2 connected enables watchdog timer


Microwave Networks

Installing HardwareThis section describes the installation of the CM SNMP option, which involves connecting cables and installing and configuring your SNMP software.

Installation Note To use the SNMP NMU each radio needs ACU Rev. E and ACU code A10 or later.

To upgrade to SNMP, replace the standard NMU, associated cables, and the network interface module on the front panel with those in the SNMP upgrade kit, P/N 8708231-00. While this procedure stops management data, experienced technicians can complete the upgrade without losing service.

SITE A

Ethernet

SITE C

SITE B

Radio1

2

Radio4

Radio5

ManagementStation

Local MaintenanceTerminal (LMT)

Ethernet

Ethernet

Radio

LAN/WAN10BaseT

cm snmp ntwk p2

IP Address 1IP Address 2

INTF1 INTF2

INTF1 (interface 1) — 10BaseTINTF2 (interface 2) — 64 kbps

IP Address 3IP Address 4INTF2INTF1

3Radio

IP Address 5INTF1

REPEATER

IP Address 6

LOCAL ACCESS

INTF2IP Address 3

IP Address 2

IP Address 1

INTF2

Radio6

SITE D

PSTNModem

Modem

IP Address 2IP Address 1IP Address 4

crossover cableor hub

INTF1

10Base-T

PSTN

SERVER &INTERMEDIATE

GATEWAY

CLIENT

CLIENT

SERVER

SERVER

SERVER &INTERMEDIATE

GATEWAY

Figure G-3. Typical CM SNMP Network

CM SNMP


Connecting Cables

After installing the CM radio, connect cables from your Ethernet network to the radio and make the following connections as this section details.

• 10BaseT port to the network• Network interface SCE port to the radio SCE connector• Maintenance terminal to the local access port (if required)

Ethernet (10BaseT) Port

10BaseT cabling is 10-MHz Ethernet running over un-shielded twisted-pair cable. Its maximum length is generally 100 to 150 meters, but length limits are based on signal loss in decibels (11.5db max.). The connection is RJ45 for interfacing radio alarms and controls through a network. When connecting the radio to a hub, wire 10BaseT cables (Category 3 or better) straight through. When connecting directly to a network, or the radio Ethernet connections at repeater sites, cross-pin cables. Table G-G lists cable pinning.

SCE Port

The SCE Network port bridges alarm and control data normally connected to an SCE unit. The bridge cable, PN 8108633-02, is RJ11 4-wire-to-RJ11 4-wire with straight-through pinning. Table G-H lists pin assignments.

The SCE, Status & Control Extender, uses alarm/control relays to provide system alarm, status, and performance information to and controls from remote alarm moni-toring equipment.

Table G-G. Ethernet Port Pins

Pin Signal Color1 TX + White/Orange2 TX - Orange3 RX + White/Green4 Blue5 White/Blue6 RX - Green7 White/Brown8 Brown

Figure G-4. Network Interface Ports

Access-Panel Jack

Cable connections


Microwave Networks

Local Access Port

The DB9 local access connection provides a 9600-bps serial interface to the NMU from a VT100 compatible terminal for local configuration. The ACU shares this port with the NMU. NMU switch SW1-6 sets which unit uses the port. With SW1-6 OPEN the ACU controls the local access port and when CLOSED the NMU controls the port.

The female local-access port connector carries three RS-232 compatible signals as Table G-I describes. Set the terminal to 9600, 8, N,1 with no flow control to communi-cate with the NMU.

The opposite end of a serial cable connects a computer or terminal serial port to the local access connector. The computer uses either a DB9 connector (9-pin) or a DB25 (25-pin) connector. For a computer with a DB9 connector, strap pins 7 and 8, and 4 and 6 of the cable connection.

Access the local access port from a remote location by connecting a dedicated Hayes-compatible modem as Chapter 4 discusses.

Table G-H. SCE Cable Pin AssignmentsSCE Network JackPin 1 at left

SCE Modular Conn.Pin 1 at top

Pin Signal Pin Signal1 SCE OUT 1 DATA INPUT2 GND 2 GND3 GND 3 GND4 SCE IN 4 DATA OUTPUT

Jumper cable connections

Table G-I. Local Access Port

Pin Signal2 input3 output5 ground

CM SNMP


Installing SoftwareAn SNMP supported radio needs software to collect and store the values of the managed variables (MIB objects). The SNMP agent is a software program that inter-faces with the MIB and responds to queries from the management station. The SNMP NMU maps the data of the radio being monitored to MIB objects.

Variables that the SNMP NMU handles include alarms, performance statistics, and relay inputs from and commands to the CM radio through the ACU. ACU software monitors and controls radio sensors and modules.

Option Requirement The radio must have ACU Rev. E and ACU software version A10 or later for SNMP.

The diskette included in the CM SNMP installation kit contains Microwave Networks’ private MIB (P/N 4600027-00). Open the MIB file in a text editor to view more infor-mation about the management options (including the list of traps generated by the SNMP NMU.

Install

To install the MIB

1. Insert the installation disk into the drive on the management station computer.

2. Copy the file snmpnmu.mib to the MIB file directory of your SNMP man-agement application.

3. Add and compile the new MIB according to the steps outlined by your SNMP application for adding a MIB file.

Configure

Now assign each radio a unique IP address using the steps below. If the NMU is already connected to an Ethernet LAN, then it will already have at least one IP address assigned that will usually be the IP address of interface 1– the Ethernet address of the NMU. In such cases, it is convenient to use that address as the local IP address of the PPP interface on that host.

Use the CM radio command-line interface or Telnet from the local access port to change the radio IP addresses as the steps below detail.

Your radio network will be a separate subnet that uses the first-accessed radio as an intermediate gateway. Although RIP-2 limits networks to 15 radios, you can string radio subnets together.

Security Note The following changes require administrative-level access.

1. Close NMU SW1 position 6 to access the NMU at the local access port.

2. Connect a serial cable between a VT100 compatible terminal and the local ac-cess port.

3. Set terminal communication to 9600 baud, 8 bit, no parity, 1 stop bit, and no flow control. Press return to establish communication. The radio responds with the login and password request.

4. On a radio that is not connected to a LAN, assign an IP address to IF1(inter-face 1) using the Telnet command ifconfig.

5. Now set up the PPP link (IF2/interface 2). Use Telnet command setup_ppp to configure IF2, the over-the-air interface.

• Set one radio of the over-the-air interface as the client and the other as the


Microwave Networks

server as Figure G-6 shows.

• Set RIP to let radios exchange IP information so that all network devices deter-mine how to reach any other device in the network. You can also manually edit routing information for smaller networks.

• Set the first radio connected to an existing network as the “intermediate gate-way" (Figure G-6). The intermediate gateway serves as an entrance to the sub-net of radios. When you reach the 15-radio limit of RIP, you can start another radio subnet by using its first radio as its intermediate gateway.

Figure G-5 shows an example of the setup_ppp entries. The gateway IP address is 172.17.0.0 for this subnet of radios with addresses from 172.17.1.1 to 172.17.1.30 (each radio using two addresses).

Figure G-5. Example of setup-ppp Entries

Use the SHUTDOWN command to ensure flash memory gets updated before reboot or removing power from the board.

CompanyLAN

Gateway

Ethernet IntermediateGateway RADIO SUBNET

IF1 IF2 IF2

CLIENT SERVER

Telnet of SNMPapplication

Figure G-6. Example of Radio Network Connections

CM SNMP


System OperationConfigure the interface and radios, monitor events, query radios, receive responses to issued commands, or receive unsolicited critical radio data (traps) from a CM radio with SNMP using an SNMP management application, Telnet, or the command line interface (CLI).

The management station displays responses or trap data. Trap data updates periodi-cally. The system connects to Telnet or an SNMP management application through the Ethernet network, and the CLI connects to the radio local access port.

SNMP Network Manager

Radio management using the CM SNMP private MIB depends largely on the SNMP management application you use. Refer to the tutorials, help, and documentation of your specific management software.

Microwave Networks MIB

The CM SNMP MIB contains groups of variables that specify the structure and format for CM radio management data. The following text explains these variables.

Add and compile the CM SNMP MIB into your SNMP manager. For illustration this section uses Castlerock SNMPc. See your documentation or administrator for instruc-tions.

After compiling, perform the following steps to access MIB variables using SNMPc:

1. Click Start and select Programs.

2. Open SNMPc (or the name of your commercial SNMP)

3. Select Startup System from the SNMPc sub-menu

4. In the login screen, enter your User Name and Password

5. Click OK

6. At the Root Subnet Menu, select the subnet that contains the IP address of the desired radio, and then select the radio.

7. At the Server Menu, click Tools, and then click MIB Browser.

8. Open the Private folder.

9. From the private folder that appears, select Microwave-Networks.

MIB Tables

The figure below shows the major CM SNMP variable categories:

• Performance monitor radio performance statistics

• Configuration view and change radio settings

• Fault management configure and monitor radio alarms

• Trap management control and monitor traps

• Diagnostics perform system tests and monitor results


Microwave Networks

Performance Table

Table G-J lists and describes the variables available from the performance table (perfT-able). Use the tools of your specific SNMP management application to display a MIB table window or graph for the selected variables.

Figure G-7. CM SNMP MIB Tables

Table G-J. MIB Performance Table (perfTable) Variables

Table Description

perfTable – To expand, click +.

perfID – Identifies NE (0) and FE (1) radios.

perfSide – Identifies A or B side of a protected radio

perfErrSeconds – NE and FE G826 Errored second ratio

perfSevErrSeconds –NE and FE G826 severely errored sec-onds

perfRslCur – NE and FE current recieved signal levels

perfRslMax – NE and FE Maximum receive signal levels recorded

PerfTxPower – NE and FE receiver transmitter output power

perfBER – NE and FE radio bit errors relative to total number of bits/time interval

perfResetCounters – Resets all Performance table data counters

CM SNMP


Configuration Table

Select the configuration table to display or edit the radio configuration settings. Use your specific SNMP manager to manipulate selected MIB variables.

Fault Manager Table

Select the fault manager to access alarm and trap information of CM radio. Traps are unsolicited critical radio data automatically sent from the agent (NMU) to the manager. Use your specific SNMP manager to manipulate selected MIB variables.

Table G-K. MIB Configuration Table (confTable) Variables

Table DescriptionconfTable – To expand, click +confID – Internal system variable. Normally not usedipAddr – NE and FE radio IP addressessubnet – NE and FE subnet addressestftpServer – name of the host server for file downloadtftpFile – name of the file that updates the NMUsyndesConfig – data tributary capacitysyndesMuxTransmit – Syndes to MUX Tx path – locked/auto and current (main/standby) pathModTxuTransmit – MOD to transmitter Tx path – locked/auto and current (main/standby) pathrxuDemodRecieve – DEMOD to receiver Rx pathmuxSyndesReceive – MUX to Syndes Rx pathtransmitAPC – state of the automatic power control – auto/manual and on/off

Table G-L. MIB Fault Manager (faultManager) Variables

Table DescriptionfaultManager – To expand, click +alarmTable – To expand, click +alarmID - Internal system variable. Normally not usedalarmNEValue / alarmFEValue - reports 16 alarms of the near- and far-end radio including module, link, and summary alarms as follows:

trapRecipientTable – To expand, click +trapRepID – Internal system variable. Normally not usedtrapRepIp– Trap recipient IP address; that is, the address to which the SNMP agent (NMU) sends critical alarmstraps – To expand, click +trapMode – Trap mode control. Three states; 0, no traps sent;1, summary alarms from one agent; and 2, verbose – retrieve all alarmstmpAlarmId – Internal system variable. Normally not used. Not accessibletmpAlarmStatus – Internal system variable. Normally not used. Not accessible

sce-Link-Failfe-Link-Failrf-PSU-Failsp-PSU-Fail

transmitter-Failreceiver-Failmodulator-Faildemodulator-Fail

atde-Failmux-Failsyndes-Failscu-Fail

owu-Failwtu-Failacu-Failsummary-A-Failsummary-B-Fail


Microwave Networks

CM SNMP Traps

This folder shows the available CM SNMP traps that are internal system variables. Traps are the unsolicited critical radio data automatically sent from the agent (NMU) to the manager. Traps modes works in one of three settings: no traps, terse (send A or B side summaries only), and verbose (send a trap on any alarm change).

Diagnostics

Select diagnostics to open the radio test tables and variables. Use your specific SNMP manager to manipulate selected MIB variables.

Table G-M. MIB Diagnostics (diagnostics) Variables

Table Description

diagnostics – To expand, click +

neRemoteLoopTable – To expand, click +

neChannelD - Internal system variable. Normally not used.

neChannelStatus - Loopback status if near-end channels

feRemoteLoopTable – To expand, click +

feChannelID – Internal system variable. Normally not used

feChannelStatus – Loopback status of the far-end chan-nels

CM SNMP


Telnet

The following material describes the Telnet commands and their responses. Use Telnet to perform the following tasks:

• Retrieve performance data

• Set or modify parameters

• View monitored alarms

• Perform diagnostic tests or monitor test results

Security Note You need administrative-level access to modify radio parameters.

Telnet is a general bi-directional communications utility. It provides a standard way to interface terminal devices and terminal-oriented processes to each other. Telnet communicates with another host using the Telnet protocol.

If you open Telnet without arguments, it enters command mode and shows prompt: telnet>. In command mode, it waits for commands. If you open Telnet with argu-ments, it executes the command and arguments.

Telnet enters input mode after opening a connection between your Telnet terminal and a radio. In input mode, text typed is sent to the remote host. The input will be line mode because that is what CM SNMP supports. The local system under the control of the remote system performs character processing in line mode.

Telnet Password Note The default user name in Telnet is admin or guest. The default password is psos. A guest session without the password puts you in monitor only mode.

After opening Telnet and connecting to the radio or network node (Figure G-8), use the Telnet command options listed in the following section.

Figure G-8. CM SNMP Telnet Shell


Microwave Networks

Telnet Commands

Type Help at the Telnet command line for a list of commands supported by CM SNMP (Figure G-9). Table G-N defines the Telnet commands.

Telnet commands for the CM SNMP radio are organized into the same four functions as the MIB: performance, configuration, fault, and diagnostic. Telnet displays perfor-mance statistics, executes configuration commands, and displays radio settings. Telnet also lets you configure, display, and reset radio alarms and radio diagnostics. The next section discusses command usage.

Table G-N. Telnet Command Definitions

Command Descriptionarp Address Resolution Protocol. Builds tables to translate an address in a

protocol address space into a 48-bit Ethernet address.community A ‘community table' exists in the router that contains several entries with

parameters that define the attributes of the community.date Displays day, month, day of month, military time, and year.display Shows node, agent, or network information according to set optionsdownload Transfer updated firmware files to the SNMP NMUhelp Lists the Telnet commands. Enter help plus the Telnet command for a

description of that command.ifconfig Lists the settings of the network interfaces and allows changes. localcli Identifies the local command-line interface (NMU connection)nestat Summarizes network usage statistics.passwd Change the current password.ping Shows if a given host is alive and the round trip transmission time.reboot Reboots the NMU software.reset_log Resets system, radio, or alarm log.route Manually manipulate the network routing tables.setup_ppp Configure interface 2 (IF2)–the 64-kbps interface over the radio link.shutdown Shut down the radio.ver Display the NMU software revision.whoami Display name of connected radio and user name.radioname Display and change the radio name.syndestype Display or set the Syndes interface type: 4DS1, 8DS1, 12DS1, 28DS1,

1DS3, 3DS3, OC3.

Figure G-9. Main Telnet Display

CM SNMP


Telnet Command Usage

arp This command (address resolution protocol) responds to its options as follows:

arp host Displays the entered host IP address.

arp –a Displays all of the current arp entries from the arp table.

arp –d host Deletes an arp table entry identified by host name. Requires administrator security level.

arp –s host ether_addr [temp] Create arp entry for host called hostname with address ether_addr.

arp –f filename Not used.

Hostname ether_addr [temp] [pub] [proxy-only]

The ethernet address is given as six hexadecimal bytes separated by colons. The entry is permanent unless the word temp is in the command. If the word pub is given, the entry is published; that is, this system will act as an Arp server responding to requests for hostname even though the host address is not its own. If proxy-only is given, the entry is published, but it will not be used by this system for packets sent to hostname, which can be useful when hostname is reached by other means.

Community Before an object can be read or written, the SNMP community name must be known. These community names are configured into the system, by the administrator, to allow references to portions of the MIB. These values identify commonality between SNMP objects. It is typical to make these community names obscure so as to limit access to SNMP capability by outside users. To see the current settings of the connected unit type Communities. The unit returns with the current settings.

Get: public Set: private Trap: SNMP_trap

To set communities use:community [-g (get community)] [-s (set community)] [-t (trap community)]

date This command shows current day, month, day of month, 24hr time, and year.

Display This commands responds to its options as follows:

display alarm Shows alarm log up to 200 entries. [num_entry] specifies the number of entries to be displayed.

display radio Shows log of radio configuration changes. Number of entries [num_entry] can be displayed.

display all Shows both alarm and radio configuration entries. Number of entries [num_entry] can be displayed.

display system Lists system errors; i.e., memory, internal NMC software or OS errors. Number of entries [num_entry] can be displayed.

display network Lists IP addresses of all CM SNMP radios on LAN.

display stat Lists internal system resource usage


Microwave Networks

download This command updates NMU firmware with the latest system software. Download requires administrative-level access.

You must know the IP address of the local TFTP host server, which the device sending the updated file. This command can update NMU firmware on the addressed radio. Upgrading the radios down a link can take up to 30 minutes to complete.

Download example -- download file [name] from host server [IP address] (Y/N)?

help Lists the Telnet commands supported by the CM SNMP option.

ifconfig Configure the network interfaces. Requires administrative-level access to execute.

ifconf ni number Internet number 1, 2, or 6Usage: [af [address [dest_addr] ] [up] [down] [netmask mask] [broadcast broad_addr] ]

af Address family

address Specifies address to use to route broadcasts to the network.

dest_addr Specifies address of agent on far-end of a point-to-point link.

up Enables an interface. Shows internet address and network address.

down Disables an interface. When disabled, the system does not attempt to use the interface.

netmask mask Specifies how much of an address to reserve for sub-dividing a network into subnetworks.

broadcast broad_addr Lists broadcast address.

ifconf arp Enables arp in mapping network-level addresses and link-level addresses (default).

ifconf –arp Disables arp.

ifconf –a Shows internet numbers with associated addresses (inet, netmask, broadcast).

localcli Redirects the local CLI (command line interface) of the SNMP NMU to the local access port of the radio (default).

localcli -a SNMP NMU CLI goes to the access panel if SW1-6 is off.

localcli -n SNMP NMU CLI always goes to the three-pin connector on the NMU.

netstat This command lists the contents of the various network-related data structures in vari-ous formats.

netstat -a Shows state of all sockets.

netstat -I Shows state of all network interfaces.

netstat -r Shows the routing table.

netstat -s Shows per-protocol statistics.

passwd new passwd: New password entry.

ping This command sends ICMP packets to a host and listens for responses.

CM SNMP


ping –s host The –s option sends datagrams containing specified datagram size in bytes. Count specifies number of bytes/datagram, and timeout specifies time duration of transmission.

reboot After changing parameters issue the reboot command to update the NMU. Requires administrative-level access to execute.

reboot NE Reboots NMC of near-end radio.

reset_log This administrative-level command responds to its options as follows:

reset_log system Resets system log.

reset_log radio Resets radio and alarm log.

route The route command manually manipulates the network routing tables. Requires administrative-level access to execute.

add Adds a route.

delete Deletes a specific route.

host Name of host IP address

net Specifies network

destination Destination of host or network

gateway Name of specified gateway

metric Lists a number specifying the number of hops to reach destination.

setup_ppp This administrative-level command lets you configure the PPP interface of the radio (IF2).

• Set one radio of a hop as the client and one as the server.• Enable or disable RIP.• Connect the first radio of a radio subnet as an intermediate gateway.• Use reboot when finished to save this configuration to the NMU.

shutdown This administrative-level command enables the connected radio NMC to be shut down (Y), or remain on (N).This command ensures that flash memory is updated and placed in a safe state for removing power.

ver Displays the NMU software version, part number and build date. Code size and check-sum also displays to aid in troubleshooting. For example:

Version v2.2 PN# 4600026-01 (build 06-12-02)Code Size 660096 bytes - Checksum 0x2e23e12

whoami This command displays name of connected radio and user name used during login. For example:

Radio name: westUser: admin

radioname Type radioname and press return to display the current name. To change the name use radioname [-s (newname)]. Do not use spaces.

syndestype Displays radio interface type. To change the Syndes interface type use: syndestype [-s (config)] where config is one of 4DS1, 8DS1, 12DS1, 28DS1, 1DS3, 3DS3, or OC3 (155Mbit/s).

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 I-1

8000608 WTUswitch 3-14-6

AAccess Panel 2-5, 3-1-1Access Panel connections 4-6Access Panel LEDs 5-11ACU 3-7-1Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer 2-2adding ATDE 6-10adding NMU 6-10adding orderwire 6-10AGC 5-19Alarm and Control Unit 3-7-1alarm codes D-1alarm log 6-7alignment 5-1, 5-10, 5-20ALM LED, Orderwire unit 3-13-4antenna connection 4-21antenna port, connections 4-22APC 2-2, 2-27ATDE 2-6Automatic 2-27Automatic Gain Control 5-19Automatic Power Control 2-27Automatic Switching 2-12

Bbandpass filter

location 6-12branching waveguide 2-3

Ccarrier frequency test 5-10channel capacity 1-4checking frequency 2-28computer/terminal installation 4-13

DDC voltages 5-9

DCE-to-DCE internal cable connections 4-20DEMOD

operation 3-9-2differential fading 1-7DIP Switches 3-15-4DS1

line coding (28xDS1 radio only) 6-8

Eend-to-end DS3 check 5-11end-to-end service channel check 5-13equipment rack 3-1-12

FFCC compliance 1-4frequency switch settings E-1frequency, LO 5-10Frequency, Local Oscillator 5-10frequency, modulator 5-10Front Panel Functions 3-13-4front panel functions

ACU 3-7-4DEMOD 3-9-4SP PSU 3-6-3

front panel functions, RXU 3-4-2front panel functions, TXU 3-3-2

HHot Standby Transmitter, Hot Standby Receiver 2-7,3-2-2Hot Standby Transmitter, Space Diversity Receiver 2-8, 3-2-2

IIF cabling 5-8IF local loopback 2-22inspection 5-1installation 4-1installation kit 4-2installation kits 3-1-12

Index

I-2 5/12/04 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual

Index

Interference Considerations 1-7interference considerations 1-7

Jjumpers

ACU 3-7-4RXU 3-4-4SP shelf backplane 3-1-10TXU Alarm Control 3-3-4

LLDU screens B-1LO frequency 5-10LO frequency, verification 6-8Local Access Port B-1Local Oscillator, Frequency 5-10loopback

IF local 2-22RF local 2-20SCU remote 2-25SYNDES remote 2-24WTU remote 2-26

loopbacks 2-19

MManual Switching 2-12MGN8112 Access Panel

switch settings 3-1-9MLN7330 WTU

jumpers 3-14-4switch 3-14-4

MOD 2-1, 3-8-1front panel functions 3-8-3

Modular 4-10Modulator 3-8-1modulator frequency 5-10module alarm LEDs 6-2module fail LEDs 5-11modules

DIP switches 5-9jumpers 5-9

Monitored Hot Standby Switching 2-11Multiplexer 3-10-1MUX 2-1, 3-10-1

MUX Local loopback 2-24

NNetwork Management Unit 3-15-1NMU 3-15-1

jumpers 3-15-3switches 3-15-3, 3-15-4

Non-protected Transmitter, Non-protected Receiver2-10, 3-2-2Non-protected/Non-protected configuration 5-7

OOrderwire Unit 3-13-1OWU 3-13-1

front panel functions 3-13-4handset functions 3-13-4jumpers 3-13-5, 3-13-6, C-7switches 3-13-5, 3-13-6

Pperformance checking 6-7power cables 4-5power distribution 3-1-4preliminary checks 5-9Protected Configuration 2-11Protection Switching 2-7protection switching 2-11

Rrack ground wiring 4-5rack installation 4-2radio cabinet 3-1-1radio commissioning 5-19Radio Frequency Power Supply Unit 3-5-1radio system gain 1-7rated power output 1-7Receive Signal Level 5-19receive signal level 1-7receive threshold check 5-15Receiver 2-2Receiver RXU-DEMOD Switch Plane 2-17Receiver Sensitivity 1-7receiver switching, HS 2-18receiver SYNDES-MUX switch plane 2-18

CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 I-3

Microwave Networks

Receiver Unit 3-4-1recommended test equipment 5-20Repeater Arrangements 2-10RF cables 5-8RF Channel Separation 1-7RF channel separation 1-7RF Distribution 3-2-1

front panel functions (HH) 3-2-6front panel functions (HS) 3-2-7front panel functions (NN) 3-2-10receive section 3-2-5transmit section 3-2-5

RF Distribution Tray 2-1RF Modules 2-3RF Power Supply Unit 2-4RF PSU 2-4, 3-5-1RF PSU features 3-5-3RF shelf backplane 3-1-11RF Tx fade margin check 5-17RSL 5-19RXU 2-2, 3-4-1RXU-DEMOD switch plane, receiver 2-17

SSCU 3-12-1

switches 3-12-5, C-6SCU Local Loopback 2-25SCU local loopback 2-25SCU switch plane, receiver 2-18SCU Switch Plane, Transmitter 2-14serial communication port connections 4-15Service channel operation 5-13Service Channel Unit 3-12-1signal flow 2-1Signal Processing Modules 2-5Signal Processing Power Supply Unit 3-6-1SP cabinet 1-5SP PSU 3-6-1SP shelf backplane 3-1-10

jumpers 3-1-10SP verification 5-10specifications 1-7switch plane

receiver RXU-DEMOD 2-17

receiver SCU 2-18receiver SYNDES-MUX 2-18transmitter SCU 2-14transmitter SYNDES-MUX 2-13transmitter TXU-MOD 2-14

switch planes 2-13switches

ACU 3-7-4switches, OWU C-8SYNDES

front panel functions 3-11-4SYNDES loopback 2-24SYNDES module 2-1SYNDES-MUX switch plane, receiver 2-18SYNDES-MUX switch plane, transmitter 2-13System Block Diagram 1-3system configuration 5-9system gain 1-2, 2-27system temperature 1-6

TT/I curves A-1T/I ratio 1-7, A-1T/R frequency separations 1-7terminal block 6-2test equipment 5-20test records 5-22test, Interface Panel 5-11tests, initial turn-up 5-10Transmitter Power 1-7transmitter switch planes 2-13Transmitter Unit 2-4, 3-3-1troubleshooting 6-5TXU 2-1, 2-4, 3-3-1TXU-MOD switch planes, transmitter 2-14

Uunpacking 4-2

Vverification 5-8VF1 connector pin assignments 4-10

I-4 5/12/04 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual

Index

Wwaveguide, connections 4-21Wayside Traffic Unit 3-14-1WTU 3-14-1

switch 3-14-5WTU local loopback 2-25WTU switch plane, transmitter 2-14

CM7&8_SONET_SDH_RevD

Documents

Transcript of CM7&8_SONET_SDH_RevD